UNIGRAPHICS

PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS OF UNIGRAPHICS
STUDENT MANUAL September 2002 MT10050 - Unigraphics NX

EDS Inc.

Proprietary & Restricted Rights Notices

Copyright Proprietary right of Unigraphics Solutions Inc., its subcontractors, or its suppliers are included in this software, in the data, documentation, or firmware related thereto, and in information disclosed therein. Neither this software, regardless of the form in which it exists, nor such data, information, or firmware may be used or disclosed to others for any purpose except as specifically authorized in writing by Unigraphics Solutions Inc. Recipient by accepting this document or utilizing this software agrees that neither this document nor the information disclosed herein nor any part thereof shall be reproduced or transferred to other documents or used or disclosed to others for manufacturing or any other purpose except as specifically authorized in writing by Unigraphics Solutions Inc. E2002 Electronic Data Systems Corporation. All rights reserved. Restricted Rights Legend The commercial computer software and related documentation are provided with restricted rights. Use, duplication or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to the protections and restrictions as set forth in the Unigraphics Solutions Inc. commercial license for the software and/or documentation as prescribed in DOD FAR 227-7202-3(a), or for Civilian Agencies, in FAR 27.404(b)(2)(i), and any successor or similar regulation, as applicable. Unigraphics Solutions Inc., 10824 Hope Street, Cypress, CA 90630. Warranties and Liabilities All warranties and limitations thereof given by Unigraphics Solutions Inc. are set forth in the license agreement under which the software and/or documentation were provided. Nothing contained within or implied by the language of this document shall be considered to be a modification of such warranties. The information and the software that are the subject of this document are subject to change without notice and should not be considered commitments by Unigraphics Solutions Inc.. Unigraphics Solutions Inc. assumes no responsibility for any errors that may be contained within this document. The software discussed within this document is furnished under separate license agreement and is subject to use only in accordance with the licensing terms and conditions contained therein. Trademarks EDS, the EDS logo, UNIGRAPHICS SOLUTIONSR, UNIGRAPHICSR, GRIPR, PARASOLIDR, UGR, UG/...R, UG SOLUTIONSR, iMANR are trademarks or registered trademarks of Electronic Data Systems Corporation or its subsidiaries. All other logos or trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners.

Practical Application of Unigraphics Student Manual Publication History: Version 15.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Version 16.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Version 17.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Version 18.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unigraphics NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . February 1999 January 2000 December 2000 September 2001 September 2002

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Course Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Course Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classroom System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Class Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Part File Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Class Part File Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seed Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting Unigraphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unigraphics Site Specific Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unigraphics Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Gateway Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cue/Status line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu bar pull down menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Platform Specific Dialog Box Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shared Features of Windows File Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Creating a New Part file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening Multiple Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To Change The Displayed Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Open an Existing Part File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mouse Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mouse Pop up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preselection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple Selection Candidates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layers and Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDS All Rights Reserved

-1 -1 -1 -1 -2 -2 -3 -3 -4 -4 -5 -5 -6 1-1 1-2 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-9 1-11 1-15 1-15 1-16 1-24 1-25 1-27 1-30 1-30 1-32 1-34 1-34
i

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

Table of Contents

Drafting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engineering Disciplines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Class Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Class Selection Filter Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 3 - Save Part As (Copying a Part File) . . . . . . . . Activity 4 - Closing Part Files and Exiting Unigraphics . Activity 5 - Establish Toolbar Environment in Modeling Introduction to Solid Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coordinate Systems in Unigraphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Absolute Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manipulating the WCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic WCS Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Points for Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utility Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Manipulating the WCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Origin, Edge Lengths Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Additional Toolbars in Modeling Application Activity 3 - Creating a Primitive Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diameter, Height Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Creating a Primitive Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Placement Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Horizontal and Vertical Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feature Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Horizontal, Vertical and Angular Positioning Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hole Creation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Creating Hole Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ii
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

1-34 1-34 1-35 1-36 1-37 1-39 1-41 1-43 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-8 2-10 2-17 2-18 2-19 2-20 2-23 2-26 2-27 2-27 2-28 3-1 3-2 3-2 3-3 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-8 3-14 3-14 3-16 3-21
Unigraphics NX

EDS All Rights Reserved

Table of Contents

Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Creating Slot Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectangular Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 3 - Creating Pocket Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . Boss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 4 - Creating Boss Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectangular Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 5 - Creating and Positioning a Pad . . . . . . . . . . . Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Editing Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Information"Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Getting Familiar with Expressions . . . . . . . . . Face Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hollow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall Thickness Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Performing a Hollow Operation . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Hollow and Selection Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 3 - Creating a Hollow Feature with an Offset . . . Edge Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edge Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edge Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edge Blends Using Dynamic Input Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Creating Edge Blends with Dynamic Input Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offset Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Performing a Chamfer Operation . . . . . . . . . Model Construction Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visually Inspect the Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDS All Rights Reserved

3-22 3-24 3-30 3-30 3-31 3-33 3-34 3-38 3-38 3-39 4-1 4-2 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-5 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-3 5-5 5-7 5-9 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-6 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-12 6-13 7-1 7-2
iii

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

Table of Contents

Inspect the Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information"Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information"Expression"List All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information"Expression"List All by Reference . . . . . . . . . Playback & Suppress/Unsuppress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expression Used by option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analysis Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Model Construction Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definitions and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sub Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Assembly Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top Down Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bottom Up Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combining Both Approaches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Designing in Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bottom Up Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to Load Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fully Loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Partially Loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unloaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Displayed Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Work Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Make Work Part icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repositioning Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dragging Components Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Left Right Up Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

7-2 7-3 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8 8-1 8-2 8-2 8-2 8-3 8-4 8-5 8-5 8-5 8-5 8-5 8-6 8-7 8-8 8-8 8-8 8-8 8-9 8-9 8-10 8-13 8-13 8-15 8-16 8-16 8-17 8-18 8-20 8-20
Unigraphics NX

EDS All Rights Reserved

Table of Contents

Dragging along an axis of the coordinate system . . . . . . . . Rotation about an axis of the coordinate system . . . . . . . . Point to Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate About a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate About a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving the Work Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Adding and Repositioning a Component . . . .

8-20 8-21 8-21 8-22 8-22 8-23 8-24 8-25

The Master Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 The Assembly Modeler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 The Master Model Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Master Model Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Master Model Drawing Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Activity 1 - Exploring a Master Model Assembly . . . . . . . 9-6 Activity 2 - Creating a Master Model Assembly . . . . . . . . 9-12 Introduction to Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uses of the Drafting Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Editing a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a View to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Views From a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Adding a View to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the View Display Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Button Specific Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Option Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 3 - Setting View Display Preferences . . . . . . . . . . Creating Utility Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Associativity of Utility Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Utility Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Cylindrical Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 4 - Creating a Cylindrical Centerline . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vector Definition for Angular Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . Line and Point Definition for Cylindrical Dimensions . . . Dimension Local Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appended Text Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDS All Rights Reserved

10-1 10-2 10-2 10-3 10-5 10-7 10-10 10-10 10-11 10-14 10-15 10-15 10-18 10-19 10-20 10-20 10-20 10-21 10-22 10-29 10-30 10-31 10-32 10-33 10-34
v

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

Table of Contents

Precision Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tolerance Type and Tolerance Value Options . . . . . . . . . . Tolerance Value Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placement Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arrow Line and Extension Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leader Direction Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Justification Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 5 - Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotation Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing the Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating text Without a Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Text with a Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Existing Dimension Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 6 - Using the Annotation Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-35 10-36 10-37 10-39 10-40 10-41 10-42 10-44 10-48 10-49 10-50 10-50 10-51 10-52 10-52 10-53

Datum Plane Reference Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Reference Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Datum Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Relative Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Creating Datum Planes by Inferred Selection . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Datum Plane User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 Dual Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 Datum Plane Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 Offset Datum Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 Center Datum Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 Datum Plane Through Cylindrical Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Datum Plane at an Angle Through a Cylindrical Axis . . . 11-9 Datum Plane at an Angle to a Face or Datum Plane Through an Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10 Datum Plane Tangent to a Cylindrical Face . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 Datum Plane Through Three Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Datum Plane Defined by Point and Direction . . . . . . . . . . 11-13 Activity 1 - Creating Relative Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 Selecting and Using Datums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20 Editing Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20 Deleting Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20 Activity 2 - Cylindrical Faces and Datum Planes . . . . . . . 11-21 Activity 3 - Feature on a Relative Datum Plane . . . . . . . . 11-27 Activity 4 - Creating a Hole Corner to Corner . . . . . . . . . 11-33 Datum Axis Reference Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Datum Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
vi
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Table of Contents

User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relative Datum Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Datum Axis Through Two Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Datum Axis Through an Edge or Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Datum Axis Through a Cylindrical face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Datum Axis Through the Intersection of two Faces . . . . . Editing Datum Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Datum Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Constraining Locations using Datums . . . . . Activity 2 - Relative Datum Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-3 12-4 12-5 12-6 12-7 12-8 12-9 12-9 12-10 12-19

Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 What is a sketch? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Why sketch? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 When should a sketch be used? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Sketches and the Model Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Sketches and Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Creating a New Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 The Sketch Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 Sketch to Define the Base Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 Sketch Associative to Existing Base Feature . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10 Defining the Reference Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 Naming a Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 The Active Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Sketch Creation Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Sketch for a Base Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Sketch on an Existing Face or Datum Plane . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Activity 1 - Sketch Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Sketch Curve Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 Sketch Curve Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 Infer Constraints Setting Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 Locking a Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23 Snap Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23 The Infer Point Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23 Alignment Lines While Creating Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24 Profile Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24 Creating Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26 Creating Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27 Creating Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28 Activity 2- Using the Sketch Profile Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30 Creating Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-39
EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

vii

Table of Contents

Quick Trim and Quick Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-40 Quick Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-40 Quick Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42 Activity 3 - Creating Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-43 Activity 4 - Sketching a Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48 Activity 5 - Using Quick Trim and Quick Extend . . . . . . 13-55 Sketch Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-59 Degree of Freedom Arrows (DOF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-59 Constraining Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-61 Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-61 The Sketch Constraints Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-61 Creating Dimensional Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-61 Text Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-64 Dimensional Constraint Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-64 Editing Dimensional Constraints` . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-67 Delay Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-68 Evaluate Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-68 Update Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-68 Creating Geometric Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-69 Displaying Constraint Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-70 Show/Remove Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-73 Constraint Interrogation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-74 Constraint Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-74 Constraint Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-75 Listing Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-75 Removing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-75 Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-76 Dragging Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-76 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-76 Constraint Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-76 Constraining Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-78 Activity 6 - Constraining a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-80 Activity 7 - Constraining the Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-89 Convert To/From Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-100 Activity 8 - Constraint Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-101 Swept Features and Boolean Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of Swept Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Swept Features from Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extrude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rules for Extruding Section String Objects . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

14-1 14-2 14-3 14-4 14-4
Unigraphics NX

EDS All Rights Reserved

Table of Contents

Extrusion Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Activity 1 - Swept Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Boolean Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 Defining Target and Tool Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 Unite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 Subtract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9 Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9 Swept Feature Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10 Rules for Extruding With Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11 Extruding With Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12 Activity 2 - Extruding with Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13 Sweep along Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19 Rules for Sweeping Section String Objects Along a Guide 14-19 Guide Strings Containing Sharp Corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20 Activity 3 - Sweeping Along a Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21 Defining a Sweep Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23 Activity 4 - Defining a Sweep Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24 Revolve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26 Rules for Revolving Section String Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26 Body of Revolution Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26 Activity 5 - Creating a Body of Revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27 Activity 6 - Adding a Body of Revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32 Trimming Face Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34 Activity 7 - Revolving and Trimming to a Face . . . . . . . . . 14-35 Activity 8 - Extruding to a Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-39 Editing the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Features of the Edit Pull Down Menu . . . . . . . . . . Edit Feature Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delayed Update on Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Feature Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Feature Pull Down Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suppress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unsuppress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delta X, Y, Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate Between Two Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSYS to CSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDS All Rights Reserved

15-1 15-2 15-2 15-3 15-3 15-5 15-5 15-5 15-6 15-6 15-7 15-8 15-8 15-8 15-8
ix

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

Table of Contents

Deleting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Playback, Move & Delete Features . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Dimension Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Edit Features and Positioning Dimensions . . Activity 3 - Using the Update Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show/Hide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Make Current Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suppress and Unsuppress Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reorder Before/After . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object Dependency Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 4 - Reordering with the Model Navigator . . . . . . Reattaching a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Reattach Menu dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reattach Menu dialog box Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 5 - Reattaching a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instance Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectangular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Rectangular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
x
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

15-9 15-10 15-11 15-15 15-17 15-27 15-28 15-29 15-30 15-30 15-30 15-31 15-35 15-38 15-39 15-40 15-40 15-40 15-41 15-41 15-41 15-41 15-41 15-42 15-42 15-42 15-42 15-42 15-43 15-44 15-46 15-46 15-48 15-50 16-1 16-2 16-3 16-4 16-5 16-6
Unigraphics NX

EDS All Rights Reserved

Table of Contents

Activity 2 - Circular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11 Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11 Additional Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Point Constructor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Points vs. Specifying Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Icon Methods To Specify a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inferred Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cursor Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Existing Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intersection Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angle on Arc/Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quadrant Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing a Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectangular Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cylindrical Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spherical Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vector Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDS All Rights Reserved

A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-6 A-9 A-10 A-12 A-14 A-16 A-18 A-20 A-22 A-24 A-26 A-28 A-30 A-32 A-34 B-1 B-1 B-2 B-2 B-3 B-3 B-4 B-5 B-6 B-7 B-8 B-9 B-10 B-10 B-11 B-12 B-13 B-14 B-14
xi

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

Table of Contents

Offset Along Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15 Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transformation Options Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate About a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirror Through a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate About a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Transformations for Symmetrical Geometry . . . . . . C-1 C-2 C-3 C-6 C-7 C-10 C-11 C-12 C-13

Curve Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1 Explicit Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2 The Work Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2 Basic Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3 The Dialog Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4 Pre Selection Highlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5 Control Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5 Inferred Point Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6 Status Line Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6 Inferred Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7 General Curve Creation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8 Point Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8 String Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9 Line Creation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10 Between Two Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10 Through a Point and Horizontal or Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10 Through a Point and at an Angle to the XC Axis . . . . . . . D-11 Through a Point and Parallel, Perpendicular, or at an Angle to an Existing Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12 Parallel to An Existing Line at a Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13 Through a Point and Tangent or Perpendicular to a Curve D-14 Tangent to a Curve and Tangent or Perpendicular to Another Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15 Tangent to a Curve and Parallel, Perpendicular, or at an Angle to an Existing Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-16 Line Creation Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17 Activity 1 - Creating Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18 Creating Arcs and Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-26 Creating Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-27 Creation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-27
xii
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

. . . . . . . . 2 Curve Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trim . . Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure .Creating Arcs and Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . Simple Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fillet Creation Methods Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . IN-1 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual xiii . . . . . . . . . Edit Curve Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 . . . . . D-27 D-28 D-28 D-29 D-32 D-33 D-34 D-35 D-36 D-37 D-40 D-41 D-45 D-46 D-46 D-47 D-47 D-47 D-48 D-49 D-49 D-50 E-1 E-1 F-1 Glossary . Editing a Line . Creating Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving an Arc or Circle to a New Location . . Arc/Circle Creation Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Parameters Mode . . . . . . . . WCS Options . . . . . Defining Points for Location . . . . . . . Editing Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Dragging Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Point on Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Table of Contents Dialog Bar Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GL-1 Index . . . . . . . .Trimming Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Curve Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing an Arc or Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Center Point. . . . . . . . . .Creating Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) xiv Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual -1 .Course Overview Course Overview Intended Audience This course is suited for designers. manufacturing engineers. NC programmers. Demonstrate knowledge of CAD/CAM theory. Open and examine models. Prerequisites There are no prerequisites for this class. and system managers who have a need for understanding and using Unigraphics software. application programmers. Create and edit parametric solid models. the student should be able to: D D D D D D D Apply the standards used in class. Modify existing geometry. CAD/CAM managers. Course Objectives After successfully completing this course. engineers. Create and modify simple drawings. Create and modify basic assembly structures.

As your knowledge of Unigraphics increases. Double-click on the parts sub-directory. Select the file pau_topic_1 and choose OK. If necessary. - From the menu bar. Steps are labeled and specify what will be accomplished at any given point in the activity. The format of the activities is consistent throughout this manual. select File Choose Open. Classroom System Information Your instructor will provide you with the following items for working in the classroom: Student Login: Username: Password: Home Directory: Parts Directory: Instructor: Date: -2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Below each step are action boxes which emphasize the individual actions that must be taken to accomplish the step. Step 1 Open part file pau_topic_1.Course Overview How to Use This Manual It is important that you use the Student Manual in the sequence presented because later lessons assume you have learned concepts and techniques taught in an earlier lesson. the action boxes will seem redundant as the step text becomes all that is needed to accomplish a given task. you can always refer to any previous activity where a method or technique was originally taught.

A four character extension (. About Part File Naming In order to facilitate the identification of design models without requiring the user to open a part file. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual -3 . Standardization allows users to work with and predict the organization of parts created by others . the user community must establish standard names for the various files associated with the part definition.prt) is automatically added to define the file type. This means the maximum number of user defined characters for the file name is actually 124.Course Overview Class Standards The following standards will be used in this class. The following is a sample usage of a filenaming standard: part name (25 characters) revision (4 characters) xxx_xxxxxxxxxxxx_xxxx_xxxx•prt identifier (3 characters) configuration (4 characters) extension (4 characters) TIP Currently up to 128 characters are valid for file names. All work should be performed in accordance with these standards.

5 dia=. Expressions The student will notice that there is a standard set of expressions resident in each of the part files as follows: Expression Name bend_r=.exp.25 thk=. Expression files that are valid for importing carry the file extension of . the initials of the student's given name. -4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .06 w=1 Intended Use identifies bend radius for sheet metal parts identifies diameter identifies height identifies length identifies the outside radius for sheet metal parts identifies Radius identifies thickness identifies width These expressions could be entered by the user in each file or could be a standard expression file that could be imported into the part file by the user.625 rad=. middle name. The total number of characters allowed in an expression is 132. and surname replace the course identifier pau" in the new filename with the remainder of the filename matching the original.Course Overview Class Part File Naming This course utilizes the following filenaming standard: underscore delimiter part name unique identifier number pau_ x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x _ x • p r t course identifier (3 characters) underscore delimiter extension (4 characters) Where the student is requested to save a part file for later use.5 h=1 l=1 out_r=.

TIP Two seed part files are available for use in this course. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual -5 .Course Overview Colors The following colors are preset to indicate different object types: Object Bodies Solid Sheet Generating Curves (non sketch) Lines and Arcs Conics and Splines Sketches Sketch Curves Reference Curves Datum Features Points and Coordinate Systems System Display Color Valid colors Green Yellow Orange Blue Cyan Gray Aquamarine White Red Seed Part Seed parts are an effective tool for establishing customer defaults or any settings that are part dependent (saved with the part file). This may include non geometric data such as: D D D D D Preferences Commonly used expressions Layer categories User defined views and layouts Part attributes Once a seed part is established. it should be write protected to avoid accidental modification of the seed part. pau_seedpart_in for inch parts and pau_seedpart_mm for metric parts. These files incorporate the standards described above. and include the TFR TRI view as the default view.

Objects are created relative to model space. where the designer intends for that tangent condition to be maintained even though the angle of the line may change. Hybrid modelers allow designers to use parametric modeling where needed. Constraint based Modeling A constraint-based model is one in which the geometry of the model is driven. These constraints might be dimensional constraints (such as sketch dimensions or positioning dimensions) or geometric constraints (such as parallelism or tangency). not each other. The designer's intent may be that the hole is always as deep as the pad is high. Examples of explicit modeling include creating a line between two existing points. This is not easily accomplished with an explicit model. designers have more flexibility in modeling techniques. width. Parametric Modeling A parametric model is one in which the values (parameters) used for the definition of the model are stored with the model for future editing. the line/arc would not change.Course Overview Definition of Terms Explicit Modeling Explicit modeling is modeling that is not parametric. If one of the existing points were moved. or the length. The Unigraphics hybrid modeler supports traditional explicit geometric modeling along with constraint based sketching and parametric feature modeling. Hybrid Modeling Hybrid modeling refers to the selectively combined use of the three types of modeling described above. or solved. Examples include a line tangent to an arc. Changes to one or more objects do not necessarily affect other objects or the finished model. Parameters may reference each other to establish relationships between the various features of the model. without requiring that the entire model be constrained before proceeding. or a perpendicular condition being maintained as angles are modified. Examples include the diameter and depth of a hole. Because of this. All tools are integrated so they can be used in combination. -6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . and height of a rectangular pad. from a set of design rules applied to the geometry defining the model as constraints. or creating an arc through three existing points. Linking these parameters together may achieve the desired results.

Close a Part File and Exit Unigraphics. Locate the Cue/Status line. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 Getting Started . Dock and Undock Toolbars. Work with Layers Copy a Part File. Subsequent lessons will reinforce and extend the student's understanding. Create a New Part File. Execute Menu Bar Pull Down Menus. Open a Part File. you will be able to: D D D D D D D D D Start Unigraphics.Getting Started Lesson 1 PURPOSE This lesson is a fundamental introduction to the Unigraphics User Interface. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson.

consult the system administrator for a site specific procedure to follow. and may or may not be displayed at Unix workstations. The Unigraphics NX Activity Menu shown below will not be displayed on Windows workstations. It is shown here to describe the options available in case this is the normal start dialog box at your site.Getting Started Starting Unigraphics The first step in working in Unigraphics is to log on to a workstation and start a Unigraphics process. Because this procedure varies from company to company. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 Unigraphics Site Specific Startup Unigraphics NX Activity Menu Version Select xwi" to enable the display of curve widths Select Starbase" to enable rotatable shaded images Select once to start Unigraphics 1-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . and platform to platform.

This interface only allows the user to adjust default options.Getting Started No Part The graphic below shows the No Part" Unigraphics interface. Menu bar: Use the first mouse button to select an option from the pull down menu Minimize Help Internet Explorer & History Cue line Status line EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-3 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 Unigraphics Windows . open an existing part or create a new part in which to work.

Getting Started The Gateway Application Upon opening an existing part or creating a new part in Unigraphics the Gateway application is entered. one of the other applications such as Modeling must be entered. To create or edit objects within a file. Work and displayed part names Graphics Window Restore Down Resource Bars ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 1-4 Graphics area Cue line: displays user prompts Status line: Displays informational messages Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Gateway allows the review of existing part files and the ability to get information on those files.

Getting Started The Cue/Status line appears at the bottom of the main application window. Menu bar pull down menus The Menu Bar offers a number of options from which to choose. Arrows to the right of the pull down listing indicate that further cascading options are available. NOTE: In a Windows environment the Cue line can be relocated to the top of the user interface. Menu Bar Cascade Menu Pull Down Menu EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-5 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 Cue/Status line . Holding the first mouse button down over a Menu Bar option causes the pull down menu to display. The purpose of the Status line is to give the user feedback about system activity. The purpose of the Cue line is to prompt for user interaction. These options have pull down menus associated with them that allow access to areas of functionality.

Notice the variance in the display of the slider bars. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . option menus. UNIX Windows 2000 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 1-6 Graphics shown in this text are from a Windows workstation.Getting Started Platform Specific Dialog Box Variance Most interaction with dialog boxes is the same on the Windows platform and the Unix platform. some of the dialog boxes at your classroom workstation may differ slightly from those shown. The appearance of some of the controls is slightly different as shown in the example below. check boxes.. etc.

The Look in: option menu shows the name of the current selected drive or directory. and Save Part File As dialog boxes have some very useful common features. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 Shared Features of Windows File Dialog Boxes . Choosing anywhere away from the list of the available folders and drives will dismiss the listing without selecting another folder or drive.Getting Started The New Part File. The folder symbol represents a sub directory. Unigraphics part files have the . Open Part File.prt extension. The list in the window below the Look In: box shows the available folders and files in the currently selected directory. button works with the Look in: option menu to The Up One Level traverse back up through the directory hierarchy. Selecting the arrow on the right side of the box (or anywhere within the box) will list a hierarchy of the available folders and drives.

and any Attributes that may apply to the file. The default listing is that of a List. Properties can be accessed by selected mouse button three while in the Details" view mode The ? button at the top right of the dialog box changes the cursor to and allows selection of any of the controls in the dialog box for a short description of its function. Other options include. button allows new sub folders to be created in The View Menu pulldown button allows the appearance of the listing in the window to be modified. last Modified date and time.Getting Started ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 1-8 The Create New Folder the current directory. Large Icons. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Small Icons and Thumbnails. Type. Size. Selecting the Details button will display a more detailed listing of the files and folders including Name.

- Choose the Millimeters radio button. The New Part File dialog box appears as shown.Creating a New Part file . Shaded radio" button indicates selected option Current directory path and file extension Step 2 Specify the units of measure for the new part file. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-9 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 Activity 1 . Step 1 Create a new part file. - Choose the New icon.Getting Started This activity demonstrates how to create a new part file.

Contact the system administrator for specific information on the number and types of characters for a valid file name. Any part that you create should be saved in a directory that you have permissions to. This will be a standard practice for this class to insure that the user at each workstation will be able to save his or her own part files. - Choose the Save icon. click in the File name field. Ensure the directory is set to your home" directory. The system processes the information and the part file is created and is loaded" into the current Unigraphics session. which means they may modify the file and save the changes. - ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 1-10 With mouse button 1. This will also be a standard practice for this class. Choose OK. Step 4 Save the part. Key in ***_new_1.Getting Started Step 3 Enter a new part file name. In addition. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . File names are governed by the naming conventions established for the operating system of the computer. - - The creator of a file has read and write access. where *** represent your initials. On Windows workstations the dialog box shown below will be displayed while the processing takes place. standards set up by the company or project will affect naming conventions.

each application can also have toolbars and icons displayed which allow access to functions which are most commonly accessed for the specific application (e. but may be located outside the window depending on screen setup. Each application has a set of toolbars which support functions within that application. These toolbars are shown within the Unigraphics window. this will be the state displayed when the same user restarts Unigraphics.g.Getting Started The Unigraphics user interface supports the use of Toolbars to allow quick access to most of the available functionality via logical groupings of common functionality displayed as Icons. Undocked Toolbars EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-11 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 Toolbars . the state of the Toolbars is saved. This is controlled by the Save layout at exit option under the General tab in the Preferences→User Interface dialog box. Drafting) NOTE: When the Unigraphics session is exited. In turn. The graphic below shows three toolbars in an undocked state. located randomly by the user on the screen. The first is undocked where they are free floating on the screen. Modeling vs. Toolbars may be in one of two states.

Use the Third Mouse Button within the Unigraphics window. View and Layer toolbars are docked horizontally just below the Menu Bar. either horizontally or vertically. Docked Toolbar (Vertical) ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1-12 Docked Toolbars (Horizontal) Control of Toolbar display may be accessed from one of 3 places: D D D Choose Tools"Customize from the main menu. The Standard. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . outside the Graphics window. while some Modeling application toolbars are docked vertically on the right and left side of the Unigraphics window.Getting Started 1 The second state that Toolbars may be in is docked. Docked toolbars are always within the Unigraphics window. where they anchor to the main Unigraphics window. Choose View"Toolbars from the main menu. The graphic below shows several toolbars.

. as well as each element of each toolbar.Getting Started EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-13 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 The display of each toolbar. is user customizable. To turn ON or OFF the display of a toolbar choose Tools"Customize or click MB3 in the toolbar area and select Customize. Placing a check in the box next to the toolbar name will instantly display the toolbar in the graphics area.

Removing the check turns off the display.Getting Started 1 To turn ON or OFF the display of a toolbar element choose the Commands tab. Placing a check in the box next to the toolbar command will instantly display the command in the appropriate toolbar. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

excluding the current displayed part. a list of up to ten previously displayed parts is generated as the displayed part is changed.The part file is accessible for creation and editing operations. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 Opening Multiple Parts . There are two designations for loaded part files: D D Displayed . Work . This list contains the latest displayed part at the top (excluding the currently displayed part) and then each previous part in the order that they were displayed until a total of ten are listed. To change the displayed part to any of the parts in the list simply select its name from the list. These parts may have been loaded explicitly or implicitly. as a result of being referenced by a loaded assembly.Getting Started More than one part file may be loaded at any time. In most cases the displayed part and the work part are the same. an option for More Parts is selected. This means that several parts may be worked on interchangeably. There are times when working in an assembly when it is advantageous that the work part be other than the displayed part.The part file is displayed in the graphics area. The Window option works in two ways: In the first method. This displays the Change Displayed Part dialog box and lists all parts being referenced in the current session. This listing will include all components in an assembly structure as well as any loaded parts not contained in a loaded assembly. To Change The Displayed Part Unigraphics allows multiple part files to be open in the same session. In the second method.

1-16 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Continue with the previous part file ***_new_1.Open an Existing Part File This activity will demonstrate working with toolbars to establish an efficient working environment in the Gateway application for this course as well as how to load an existing part file into the work session. - ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 Click Mouse Button 3 (MB3) in the toolbar area and choose Customize. Click MB3 within toolbar area.Getting Started Activity 2 . Step 1 Display the Standard toolbar in the Gateway Application.

- Choose the Open icon. Step 2 Open the part file pau_intro_1. The Standard toolbar should be displayed on the screen docked in the upper left corner under the Menu bar. . - Choose Close to dismiss the Customize dialog box.Getting Started - Verify that the Standard toolbar is checked ON. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-17 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 The Customize Dialog box appears and shows the current toolbars which are displayed.

If necessary. Part Preview window Directory List Box File List Box Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Getting Started The Open Part File dialog box appears. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 1-18 - Check the current directory displayed in the Look in field. choose the proper directory from the option menu.

Once the part is open the following actions occur: D D Options for viewing the contents of the file are available on the menu bar. The title bar of the Unigraphics window displays the current work part in brackets [pau_intro_1. The graphics area is now active. which opens the file (or double click on the file name). showing the model in the condition in which it was last saved. Any new work that you do is not permanent until the part file is saved on disk. meaning that changes may not be saved in this file. . A part file's units can be converted using a program called ug_convert outside of the active Unigraphics session. - Choose OK in the Warning dialog box to dismiss the Read Only message. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-19 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 Notice that there are no radio buttons for Inches and Millimeters in the Open Part File dialog box.prt] and that its status is Read Only. Notice the Status Line. D It is important to keep in mind that a loaded part file is only a copy of what is stored on disk. as well as other information pertaining to the operation being performed.Getting Started - Select pau_intro_1 in the file list box and choose OK. The units of the file were determined prior to creation and may not be changed within an active Unigraphics session. It displays useful information as to what the system is doing while the part file is retrieved.

Remember that toolbars may be docked horizontally on the top or bottom and vertically on the left or right. Selection and Utility toolbars are checked ON. View Selection Utility NOTE: Icons may vary for each toolbar Step 4 Undock and Dock the Utility toolbar. Selection and Utility toolbars. Locate the toolbars. NOTE: This portion of the activity is simply meant to show how to undock and dock toolbars. The toolbars are displayed on the screen in an Docked state. - ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 1-20 Click MB3 in the toolbar area and verify the View.Getting Started Step 3 Display the View. - Place the cursor on the handle portion of the Utility toolbar and press and hold down mouse button 1 (MB1). Select on the Handle Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Whether toolbars are in docked or undocked conditions the process for moving them is very similar.

- Place the cursor on the header portion of the Utility toolbar and press and hold down MB1.Getting Started - - Release MB1. Select Here - Drag the toolbar such that the header portion falls within the main menu bar as shown below. . The Utility toolbar is docked to the Unigraphics window. Locate Here - Release MB1. note that the ghosted display of the outside of the window changes in size as the cursor leaves the graphics window. note that the ghosted display of the outside of the window changes in size. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-21 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 Drag the toolbar onto the graphics window. Notice the toolbar in an undocked condition displays a header with the name of the toolbar.

Select Here - Drag the toolbar such that it is aligned under the Standard toolbar completely to the left side of the window. - ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 1-22 Place the cursor on the handle portion of the Utility toolbar and press and hold down MB1. - The Utility toolbar remains docked to the Unigraphics window in the proper position. Locate Here Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Release MB1. - Select the View toolbar on the handle and drag the toolbar such that it is aligned to the right of the Standard toolbar.Getting Started Step 5 Move a docked toolbar.

it will be used again in a later activity.Getting Started - Locate Here Step 6 Leave the part open. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-23 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 Select the Selection toolbar on the handle and drag the toolbar such that it is aligned to the right of the Utility toolbar. .

starting from left to right. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Mouse Button First Mouse Button (left only) MB1 Action Selects or drags objects Second Mouse Button (center OK while in an operation. Press and hold or both buttons) MB2 down while in the graphics area to Rotate the view. Examples of two different mouse devices are shown. Cancel. Hold down Shift+MB2 to Pan and hold down Ctrl+MB2 to Zoom In/Out.Getting Started Mouse Navigation The mouse may be used as well as the keyboard to make selections. Pan. The mouse buttons are referred to as the first. Also displays action information for objects selected with MB1. second. Third Mouse Button in graphics area MB3 Mouse arrow over icons or option menu in a dialog box Displays pop up menu for Back. Displays either the icon or option label.) 3-BUTTON MOUSE 2-BUTTON MOUSE Both buttons together execute the second mouse button action ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 1-24 1 2 3 1 3 The mouse may be used to perform various actions as shown in this chart. Apply. or third mouse buttons. etc. for users who prefer that orientation. in most terminal control panels. (This order can be reversed.

The pop up menu provides a shortcut to many of the functions that are frequently used in Unigraphics. the Quick View Pop Up menu shown in the graphic below is displayed. Refresh Fit Zoom Zoom Rotate In/Out Pan Wireframe Settings Shaded Settings Wireframe View Orientation EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-25 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 Mouse Pop up Menu .Getting Started As mentioned in the previous chart. the mouse may be used to perform various kinds of actions depending upon placement and position in the steps of the process. When the cursor is in the graphics area and the third mouse button is depressed. NOTE: The View toolbar may also be used to perform many of the view manipulation functions found in the View Pop-Up Menu.

The original visualization settings and view modifications are retained. Generally used in a modeling view. Active only in a modeling view. Specifies the method of display of hidden edges in the graphics window. Erases temporary display entities. Any operation or edit performed prior to the last one will not be affected by undo. Terminates the current operation. Option Apply Back Cancel Refresh Fit Description Performs operation displayed in the current dialog box. pan. The affected view becomes the work view and remains the work view until the expand is turned off. Reverses the effect of the last single operation performed. Performs a Refresh operation as well as redisplaying silhouette curves of faces and hidden edges of solids. Active only in a modeling view. Restores the original view that was in effect before one of the following operations was performed: zoom. Utilizes the fit percentage found on the Preferences→Visualization→Screen dialog box. Specifies the shading method in which the solid model is displayed. rotate.Getting Started 1 The following table gives a brief summary of some of the options in the pop up menu. Rotates the model using the X Y method. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1-26 Zoom Zoom In/Out Rotate Pan Update Display Restore Display Mode Hidden Edges Expand Orient View Replace View Undo Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Refreshes the entire graphics window. Changes the view scale via specification of a reference point and dragging the size using the mouse. Changes the view scale via a user specified rectangle. This is a toggle. Goes back to a previous dialog box. Redisplays the current view in a canned view orientation. Fits the entire part to the view. Replaces the current view with one of the canned views. Pans the view in the direction you pull the mouse. Expands a drawing's member view to the full graphics area.

There are three major categories of objects that a user may focus on: General Objects. and Components. Features.Getting Started The selection toolbar may be used anytime the selection of an object for modification or the extraction of data is required. Components General Objects Features EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-27 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 Selection Toolbar .

Color Layer Reset Deselect All Class Selection Select All Name Selection Once an object has been selected. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1-28 General Objects Features Components The remaining options of the toolbar may be used to further discriminate in the selection of objects. the Type Filter may be used to narrow the band of selectable objects. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Getting Started 1 Depending on which category the user has selected. mouse button 3 (MB3) may be used to select an available operator for that object.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-29 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 NOTE: When depressing MB3 the cursor must be on top of the selected object for the shown pop-up dialogs to appear. .Getting Started General Objects Operations Components Operations Features Operations NOTE: Options may vary based upon application and object selected.

) to appear can be adjusted by choosing Preferences"Selection and adjusting the Confirmation slider.. QuickPick is a selection confirmation interface that allows immediate selection of a single object or an easy method for browsing through multiple selection candidates. Should there be more than one selectable object at the selection ball location and the cursor lingers for a short period of time...Getting Started Preselection Preselection allows highlighting of objects that are selectable for various operations as the selection ball is moved over them. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Preselection may be controlled by choosing Preferences"Selection from the menu bar. the appearance of the cursor changes to a cross followed by an ellipsis (+. NOTE: The amount of time the cursor must be stationary for the ellipsis (+. The state of the Preselection setting is not saved with the part.. During selection the act of moving the selection ball over a selectable object causes the object to pre highlight in the preselection color. The color of the highlighting is specified in the Color option menu. Selection after the cursor changes display will result in the presentation of the QuickPick dialog box shown below. Preselection also applies to highlighting objects that are being deselected. Preselection by default is ON in Unigraphics. and lasts only through the current session. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 1-30 Multiple Selection Candidates During the graphics area selection process it is common to have more than one selectable object contained in the selection ball. Selecting during this pre highlighting phase causes the highlighted object to be chosen for the action to be performed. usually through use of <Shift> first mouse button.) indicating that there is more than one selectable object at this position.

Mouse Button 1 can also be used anywhere on the graphics screen to progress through the multiple candidates. This will also progress the highlighted number in the Quick Pick dialog box and give feedback in the Status line displaying the type of object being highlighted. Placing the cursor in the area outside the truncation causes the buttons to scroll in the direction indicated. . As shown in the previous graphic. the end button is shown truncated. when there are more than six objects in the selection list.Getting Started NOTE: When the Quick Pick dialog box is presented upon selection of an object. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-31 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 Each selectable object beneath the cursor is represented by a number. The maximum number of buttons displayed at once is six. Moving the cursor over the number highlights the object in the graphics area and displays the type of object in the Status area. The desired object may be selected by selecting its numbered button.

Getting Started

Layer Control
Unigraphics offers users the control of visibility and selectability of objects by the use of layers. A layer is a system defined attribute that all objects in Unigraphics must have. Some other required attributes are color, font, and width. A layer may be thought of as a partition in the part file that objects reside in, or on for the purpose of organization. There are 256 usable layers in Unigraphics, one of which is always the Work Layer. Any of the 256 layers can be assigned to one of four classifications of status:
D D D D

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
1
1-32

Work Selectable Visible Only Invisible

The Work Layer is the layer that objects are created on and is always visible and selectable while it remains the Work Layer. Layer 1 is the default Work Layer when starting a new part file. When the Work Layer is changed to another, the previous Work Layer automatically becomes Selectable and could then be assigned a status of Visible Only or Invisible. The number of objects on one layer is not limited. Each user has the freedom to choose which layers they will create objects on and what the status will be. However, it should be mentioned that the use of company standards in regards to layers would be beneficial. To assign a status to a layer or layers, choose Format→Layer Settings or select the Layer Settings icon, which may be turned ON in the Utility toolbar as shown below.

Work Layer can also be changed here

Layer Settings

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Getting Started

Work Layer Text Box

Select a layer from the Layer/Status listing and choose one of the four buttons below the listing.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

1-33

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
1

The following dialog box appears:

Getting Started

Layers and Categories
The following layer and category standards will be followed in this class.

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
1
1-34

Model Geometry
Object Type Solid Geometry Inter part Modeling Sketch Geometry Curve Geometry Reference Geometry Sheet Bodies Layer Assignment 1-20 15-20 21-40 41-60 61-80 81-100 Category Name SOLIDS LINKED_OBJECTS SKETCHES CURVES DATUMS SHEETS

Drafting Objects
Object Type Drawing Borders Layer Assignment 101-110 Category Name FORMATS

Engineering Disciplines
Object Type Mechanism Tools Finite Element Meshes and Engr. Tools Manufacturing Quality Tools Layer Assignment 121-130 131-150 151-180 181-190 Category Name MECH CAE MFG QA

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Getting Started

In the process of creating a model, there are times when it is necessary to move an object to a different layer. This option is available using Format→Move to Layer. The objects which need to be moved are then selected using the Class Selection menu. Once all of the objects to be moved are selected, the Layer Move dialog box appears.

To complete the process, the destination layer may be entered in the Destination Layer or Category field, or the layer may be selected from the list. Choose OK or Apply to move the object(s). If Apply is chosen, more objects may be selected to move by choosing the Select New Objects button.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

1-35

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
1

Moving Layers

Getting Started

Class Selection
The Class Selection dialog box is used to filter for certain types of objects during graphics area selection. Normally direct selection using the selection ball in the graphics area is enough to get the desired object. There are times when filtering using the Class Selection options is necessary or very helpful to ensure that only desired object/types are selected. This often occurs in complex parts.

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
1
1-36

Name filter

Filter methods

Area filters

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Getting Started

D

The Name filter allows selection by object(s) by entering an assigned name attribute. Filter Methods allows control of the selection of objects according to attributes such as features, type, color, and layer.
D

D

Features allows features (e.g. block, hole, datum, sketch) to be selected for various operations (e.g. delete or information). Once this option has been selected and features have been identified, choosing OK will perform the operation which introduced the Class Selection dialog. This option is not available for all operations (e.g. edit object display and Move to Layer). Type allows the object types (e.g. curve, edge, body, datums) to be included or excluded from the selection process. Color allows objects to be included or excluded from the selection process based on their color. All colors are initially selectable as the default. Layer is used to specify the layer(s) on which to allow selection. Valid layer selection may include a single layer, an existing category, or a layer range. Other is used to filter for font (line type), width, and user defined attributes. Reset is used to return all fields to the default state.

D

D

D

D

D

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

1-37

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
1

Class Selection Filter Types

Getting Started D

1

Rectangle/Polygon Method is an option menu used to specify how objects are selected relative to an area defined by a rectangle or a polygon as discussed below. The rectangle or polygon is oriented in the current view plane and may be used in any view. A rectangle may be used by selecting a cursor location and dragging the cursor to another cursor location. The Polygon button must be selected prior to specifying the boundary with rubber banding line segments in the graphics area.
D D

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
1-38

Inside - Objects completely inside the rectangle/polygon are selected. Outside -Objects completely outside the rectangle/polygon are selected. Crossing - Objects crossing the boundary of the rectangle/polygon are selected. Inside/Crossing - All objects inside the rectangle/polygon as well as those crossing the boundary of the rectangle/polygon. This is the default method. Outside/Crossing - All objects outside the rectangle/polygon as well as those crossing the boundary of the rectangle/polygon.

D

D

D

D

Up One Level allows selection of the next level component or group if components or groups are enabled for that operation. This is useful in assemblies work. Select All selects all objects in the work view by current filter methods settings. All but Selected selects all objects in the work view except for those currently highlighted by selection. Chain allows the selection of a sequence of contiguous curves or solid edges. Polygon allows the selection of objects using a polygon that is specified in the graphics area. (See Rectangle/Polygon Method above.)

D

D

D

D

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Getting Started

This activity shows how to make a copy of an existing part file by saving it using a different name. Continue with the previous part file pau_intro_1. Step 1 Create a copy of a part file.
-

Choose File→Save As...

The Save Part File As dialog box appears.
Directory where part is to be saved Up One Level

Enter new filename here

Step 2 Save a copy of the file in the desired directory.
-

In the Save Part File As dialog, use the Save in: option menu to navigate to the proper directory to save the part file. (HINT: should be one level up from the parts folder)

Step 3 Enter a new part file name.
-

Click in the File name field.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

1-39

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
1

Activity 3 - Save Part As (Copying a Part File)

Getting Started -

1

Key in ***_intro_1 as the new part file name where *** represent your initials.

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Type filename here

-

Choose OK.

The Status Line states that the part file is being saved. When the save is complete, the message Part file saved" displays. Work in Unigraphics may be resumed. Step 4 Save the work.

-

Choose the Save icon.

Once again, Unigraphics informs you in the Status Line that it is saving the part file. When the save is complete, the message Part file saved" is displayed.

TIP

You can save your work and exit Unigraphics all at once by choosing File"Close"Save All and Exit.

1-40

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Getting Started

This activity shows how to close a part file and exit Unigraphics. Continue with the previous part file ***_intro_1. Use File→Close→Selected Parts to close one or more of the loaded parts. Close All may be used to close all parts loaded in the current session from the Close Part dialog box. Step 1 Close the part file.
-

Choose File→Close→Selected Parts.

The Close Part dialog box appears showing a list of all open part files, which currently are ***_intro_1 and ***_new_1 part files.

List of open part files

***_intro_1 ***_new_1

-

Select the ***_intro_1 part file and choose MB2.

Since the part was not changed since it was last saved, it is immediately closed.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

1-41

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
1

Activity 4 - Closing Part Files and Exiting Unigraphics

Getting Started

1

If the part had been changed, the system displays a warning message letting you know that the part has been modified since it was last saved.

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
1-42

***_intro_1

Closing the part file does not save the part, it only clears the part file from the local memory in the workstation. Changes that have been made to the part file will be lost if the close operation is continued. Step 2 Learn how to end the Unigraphics work session.
-

Choose File→Exit. A dialog box displays.

If part file(s) are still open and have been modified, a message displays:

To end Unigraphics, from either Exit message window, you would choose OK.
-

Choose Cancel to dismiss the message and keep the session open. Do not Exit Unigraphics at this time.

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Getting Started

This activity will establish an efficient toolbar working environment in the Modeling application for this course. Other toolbars can be added as needed. Step 1 Change the displayed part to ***_new_1 (HINT: Window from the menu bar) Step 2 Display the Application toolbar in the Gateway Application.
-

Click MB3 in the toolbar area and check ON the Application toolbar.

Click MB3 within toolbar area.

Locate the Application toolbar in the Unigraphics window, it may be docked or undocked.

NOTE: Icons may vary.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

1-43

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
1

Activity 5 - Establish Toolbar Environment in Modeling

Getting Started

Step 3 Customize the Application toolbar.
-

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
1
1-44

Click MB3 in the toolbar area and choose Customize.

-

Select the Commands tab and highlight Application in the Toolbars column.

Select these options

A listing with the commands for the Application toolbar is displayed. The commands displayed on the toolbar are checked in the Commands column.

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Getting Started -

Scroll down here

Note that the display of the toolbar changes immediately upon selection of commands.
-

Choose Close to dismiss the Customize dialog box. Locate the Application toolbar as shown below.
Locate here

These toolbar settings will be retained for the Gateway application for the rest of the course.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

1-45

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
1

Scroll down to see all of the options in the Commands column. Turn ON the Modeling, Drafting and Assemblies commands and turn OFF all others options. Also, turn ON the Separator above the Assemblies command.

Select the Modeling icon in the Application toolbar. - Click MB3 in the toolbar area and verify that the Standard. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 1-46 - Entering a different application will introduce a new set of toolbars. The toolbars that were established in the Gateway application may move and have different commands in them. Turn OFF all other toolbars. View. Utility and Application toolbars are checked ON. Selection. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Other toolbars will be turned ON throughout the course as they are needed.Getting Started Step 4 Enter the Modeling Application. Step 5 Display the common toolbars from the Gateway application.

View Refresh Fit Zoom Selection Utility Application Select Work Drafting General Layer Objects Select Layer Assemblies Features Settings Select Separator Gateway Components Separator WCS Dynamics Type Filter Orient WCS Reset Separator Select All Toolbars Standard New Open Save Separator Zoom In/Out Delete Rotate Commands Undo Pan Separator Separator Information Wireframe Settings Shaded Deselect All Settings Wireframe Separator View Up One Orientation Level - Choose Close to dismiss the Customize dialog box.Getting Started - Step 6 Customize the toolbars. - Click MB3 in the toolbar area and choose Customize. Step 7 Close the part file. . - Choose File"Close"All Parts. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-47 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 Dock the toolbars in similar locations as defined in the Gateway application. Select the Commands tab and adjust the toolbars to match the commands in the table below. Choose OK in the Question window. do not save.

By performing these functions you were made aware of that parts are only loaded into memory and are not saved until performing a save" or save as" operation. and saved parts.Getting Started ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 SUMMARY In this lesson you: D Started Unigraphics and were made aware that the user interface appearance may be slightly different on UNIX and NT platforms. Executed Menu Bar Pull Down Menus and saw how these tools can save time. Closed a Part File. Were introduced to the layer system in Unigraphics. Exited Unigraphics. Activated toolbars and adjusted the commands within them. and saw how this convention aids in part file organization. Created. retrieved. D D D D D D D 1-48 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Copied a Part File.

you will be able to: D D D D D D D Define the Absolute Coordinate System (ABS). Define the Work Coordinate System (WCS). Create a primitive cylinder.Introduction to Solid Modeling Introduction to Solid Modeling Lesson 2 PURPOSE This lesson is a fundamental introduction to the Unigraphics Modeling application. Define Points for Locations. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson. Subsequent lessons will reinforce and extend the student's understanding. Manipulate the WCS. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 2-1 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 2 . Create a direction vector. Create and Edit a Primitive Block.

90° apart from each other. 2 Start here and go this direction.Introduction to Solid Modeling Coordinate Systems in Unigraphics Before any portions of the solid model may be defined. all are right hand. Y=0. Y. made up of a set of X. The figure below illustrates that. starting at the origin. This manual will primarily discuss the following different coordinate system types used in Unigraphics modeling. Cartesian coordinate systems. and Z axes. it is important to understand the options Unigraphics offers for location and orientation of objects." ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ +Z -X -Y -Z +Y +X Origin D D D There are many coordinate systems in Unigraphics. Absolute Coordinate System (ABS) Work Coordinate System (WCS) Feature Coordinate System (Discussed in Form Features Lesson) 2-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The intersection of the axes is called the origin of the coordinate system. Since solid modeling takes place in a 3 dimensional environment. model space is defined as the infinite extension of a 3 dimensional field represented in the views of your graphics area. and Z=0. The origin has the coordinate values of X=0. each axis has a positive direction and a negative direction. A three axis symbol is used to identify a coordinate system.

The Absolute Coordinate System is necessary to relate location or orientation between any two objects. and Z=1 in one part file is the exact same absolute position in any other part file. Most solid modeling operations in Unigraphics do not require manipulation of the WCS. or even a Unigraphics part file to any other CAE system. certain functions are dependent on the WCS. solid models. Y=1. However. The WCS can be located and oriented manually anywhere in model space. not relative to positions and directions in model space. Unigraphics uses the Work Coordinate System (WCS) to establish a mobile coordinate system to facilitate geometry construction in different orientations.Introduction to Solid Modeling Absolute Coordinate System The Absolute Coordinate System (ABS) is not mobile. and require the WCS to be positioned prior to performing the operation. In those cases. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 2-3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 2 Work Coordinate System . Unigraphics part files. An object positioned at Absolute X= 1. Curve and Primitive creation are two functions dependent on the WCS. Since the ABS is not mobile. The WCS is not a selectable entity. the WCS is handled automatically by Unigraphics. It defines a fixed point and orientation in model space. since features are added to a model relative to existing geometry of the model.

After choosing WCS Dynamics. WCS Dynamics will be the focus in this lesson. When the cursor is placed directly over the WCS there will be a temporary display of rotation planes shown to indicate that the WCS can be directly selected. In cases where the WCS cannot be double-clicked. The Point Constructor icon also appears in the upper left hand corner of the graphics window. rotation. In general. If there is another object coincident with the WCS the temporary display of rotation planes may not appear. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 2 2-4 Handles Point Constructor NOTE: WCS Dynamics may also be accessed by double-clicking directly on the WCS on the graphics screen. orientation and dynamics.Introduction to Solid Modeling Manipulating the WCS The WCS options are accessed by choosing WCS on the menu bar or from the Utility toolbar (a part file must be displayed). there are four ways to manipulate the WCS. WCS Dynamics can be accessed from the Menu bar or the Utility toolbar (as shown below). WCS Dynamics Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . the WCS displays with handles. They are origin. WCS Dynamics: Provides a dynamic interface to control the location and orientation of the WCS by entering values or dragging handles of the WCS in the graphics screen.

) and help indicators will display next to an object to help you predict where the WCS will relocate to. Vertex Handle EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 2-5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 2 .Introduction to Solid Modeling Dynamic WCS Handles Vertex Handle: If the square handle is selected the WCS can be relocated to any point on the graphics screen (e.g. when selected this option will bring the Point Constructor dialog box up. This handle will also allow the coordinate system to be dragged in any direction. cursor position. option is also available on the graphics window to The Point Constructor position the WCS. control point. etc. arc center.

the definition of specific points in space is necessary.Introduction to Solid Modeling Defining Points for Location To determine the location of the WCS. see Appendix B. Primitives or any other geometry. based on existing geometry or coordinate values. you can define origin points. start points. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . and is a common function in any CAE system. which allows input of specific distances or snap increments. This handle will also allow the coordinate system to be dragged along its axis. Axis Handle: If one of the three axis handles is selected a Dynamic Input Field appears on the graphics window next to the WCS. endpoints. Existing Point End Point Control Point Intersection Point Inferred Point Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center Angle on Arc/Ellipse Quadrant Point None Rectangular Cylindrical Restores Base Point values to zero and Offset to none Spherical Vector Along Curve Point on Surface Point on Curve/Edge 2 Cursor Location ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 2-6 NOTE: For more information on Point types. Using the Point Constructor dialog box. Unigraphics offers a standard dialog box that provides multiple point methods to define location. etc.

The Distance field will update to the distance moved as the handle is dragged. For example. you can snap the WCS incremental distances when you drag the handle. you can snap the WCS 45 degrees when you rotate within the Snap (angle) tolerance. Using an Axis handle. This handle will also allow the coordinate system to be rotated about the axis. You can also use these fields to directly enter a distance or rotation angle. The default value for a tolerance is 45°. it will snap to 45°. which allows input of specific angles or snap increments. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 2-7 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 2 . Finished Moving: Use the middle mouse button (MB2) to confirm the location or orientation of the WCS and exit WCS Dynamics. The default value for a Snap (distance) is 0 (zero). Snap (Angle/Distance): Using a Rotation handle. but you can change the Snap field to adjust the tolerance.Introduction to Solid Modeling Rotation Handle: If one of the three rotation handles is selected a Dynamic Input Field also appears next to the WCS. but you can change the Snap field to adjust the tolerance. Rotation Handle Dynamic Input Field Axis Handle Distance/Angle: When the Dynamic Input Field appears next to the WCS the Distance/Angle fields display the offset distance or rotation that results from a dragging operation. The Angle field will update to the angle moved as the handle is dragged. if the Snap (angle) tolerance is set to 5° and you rotate the WCS anywhere between 40 and 50° from its original position.

Introduction to Solid Modeling NOTE: Undo is available and can be used during WCS movement to restore the WCS to a previous location or orientation. Utility Toolbar The WCS options may also be accessed through the Utility toolbar. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 2 WCS Dynamics Orient WCS Display WCS Save WCS 2-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Y axis option to change origin and rotation in the same step. X axis Y axis After NOTE: The Orient option is commonly used to move the WCS back to the Absolute origin and orientation.Introduction to Solid Modeling Orient WCS: Allows the location and the rotation of the WCS to be altered in one step. Before Using the X axis. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 2-9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 2 . The menu shown below contains the various options to accomplish WCS orientation.

the WCS will be moved to different positions on a model. the WCS location and orientation in a new part file coincides with the Absolute Coordinate System. from the Utility Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . However.Manipulating the WCS In this activity. - Choose the WCS Dynamics icon toolbar. During model construction. Step 2 Change the Work Coordinate System origin. so it is helpful to learn how to manipulate the WCS.Introduction to Solid Modeling Activity 1 . Unigraphics usually manages the WCS automatically. By default. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 2 2-10 Step 1 Open part file pau_wcs_1 and start the Modeling Application. some construction and Info functions depend on the WCS.

) Select this circular edge (Quadrant Pt. Step 3 Change the direction of the Work Coordinate System axes. ZC directions as the prior WCS location. - Choose the WCS Dynamics icon.) The vertex is selected by default when entering WCS Dynamics.) Select here (End Pt.) Select here (End Pt.Introduction to Solid Modeling - Select the various points shown. or Ellipse Ctr.) Select this elliptical edge (Quadrant Pt. or Arc Ctr. or Ellipse Ctr.) Select here (End Pt. Select this elliptical edge (Quadrant Pt. The relocated WCS has the same XC. therefore you can simply pick points in the graphics window to move the WCS. Do not select any of the WCS handles. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 2-11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 2 . - Choose MB2 when finished moving the WCS to exit WCS Dynamics. YC.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 2 2-12 - Select the Rotation Handle shown below. Select this handle The Dynamic Input Field appears allowing an angle or snap (angle) to be entered.Introduction to Solid Modeling - Move the WCS to the arc center shown below. Select this circular edge when the center is high lighted. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Introduction to Solid Modeling -

Enter -905 in the Angle text entry field and press Enter.
After
The origin of the WCS is unchanged, the coordinate system is rotated about the XC axis, from the ZC axis toward the YC axis 90_

Before

-

Choose MB2 when finished rotating the WCS.

Step 4 Change the orientation of the WCS. The image below has be rotated for clarity. Feel free to shade and rotate the view for better viewing of the part.

-

Choose the WCS Dynamics icon. Move the WCS to the location shown below.

Select this corner

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

2-13

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
2

The direction of rotation is based on the Right Hand Rule.

Introduction to Solid Modeling -

Select the XC Axis Handle as shown below.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
2
-

Select this Handle

Orient the XC Axis Handle to the edge shown below.

Arrow should point in this direction

Select here

2-14

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Introduction to Solid Modeling -

Select the YC Axis Handle.

Select this Handle

-

Orient the YC Axis Handle to the edge shown below.

Arrow should point in this direction Select here

-

Choose MB2 when finished orienting the WCS.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

2-15

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
2

Introduction to Solid Modeling

Step 5 Move the WCS back to the Absolute CSYS.
-

Choose the Orient WCS icon as shown below.
Orient WCS

2

The following menu appears, listing the various ways to specify a new location and orientation for the WCS.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
2-16

-

Choose the Absolute CSYS icon.

-

Choose OK.

Step 6 Choose File"Close"All Parts and choose OK in the Question dialog.

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Introduction to Solid Modeling

Primitives
A Primitive is a solid object that is analytic in nature. A Primitive may be thought of as raw stock", to which material will be added or removed to achieve the finished part. There are multiple ways of defining each of the four Primitive types. Primitives may be used as the basic shape at the start of the solid modeling process. Using one of the Primitive types as the base feature eliminates the need to create and sweep curve geometry. When a Primitive is created, its type and its size must be specified as well as its location and orientation in model space. The four types of Primitives are:
D D D D

Block Cylinder Cone Sphere

NOTE: Although Unigraphics continues to allow the use of multiple Primitives in one solid body, the practice is not recommended because of the advantages and associativity of other solid modeling functionality. If a Primitive is used in a part file, the Primitive should be used as the initial solid feature. NOTE: Primitives are positioned explicitly. Their origins are set by a specified point in model space. However, they can be moved manually by either Transforming or, preferably, using Move Feature. A primitive's creation parameter values may be edited and made associative to each other. This lesson will concentrate on the Block feature. Another type of Primitive will be discussed later.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

2-17

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
2

Introduction to Solid Modeling

Block
A Primitive block may be created by specifying the size and location of the block in model space. The orientation will be implied from the orientation of the WCS. There are three different methods that may be used to create a block. The middle portion of the dialog and the Selection Steps change depending on the type of block creation method you choose. This manual will discuss the first method, Origin, Edge Lengths.
Two Points, Height Origin, Edge Lengths

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
2
2-18

Two Diagonal Points

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Introduction to Solid Modeling

Origin, Edge Lengths Method
D D D D

Choose the Block icon.

(Insert→Form Feature→Block)

Choose the creation method of Origin, Edge Lengths Define the length for each edge. Define the Point Method for the corner's origin.

NOTE: When no solid exists, no selection will place the corner at Absolute 0,0,0. The corner used for the origin is the vertex of the edges used to define the size of the block.
D

Choose the desired boolean operation (Although Unigraphics continues to allow the use of multiple Primitives in one solid body, the practice is not recommended because of the advantages and associativity of other solid modeling functionality. If a Primitive is used in a part file, the Primitive should be used as the initial solid feature.).

NOTE: All of the X, Y, and Z values of the edge lengths are measured relative to the WCS, and must be positive values since they are used as the length, width, and height parameters of the block.
D

Choose OK or Apply.

Once the block has been created, its size may be changed by editing the values that were used for edge lengths during creation.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

2-19

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
2

Introduction to Solid Modeling

Activity 2 - Additional Toolbars in Modeling Application
This activity will establish additional toolbars in the Modeling application for this lesson and future lessons. Step 1 Create a new inch part file and name it ***_prim_exp_1 and choose the Modeling icon.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
2
2-20

Step 2 Display additional toolbars in the Modeling application.
-

Click MB3 in the toolbar area and turn ON the Form Feature, Feature Operation, Edit Feature and Modeling Toggles toolbars.

Form Feature

Feature Operation

Edit Feature

Modeling Toggles

NOTE: Icons may vary for each toolbar

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Introduction to Solid Modeling -

Dock the toolbars horizontally or vertically in the locations defined below.
Edit Feature Modeling Toggles

Feature Operation

Form Feature

Step 3 Customize the toolbars.
-

Click MB3 in the toolbar area and choose Customize. Select the Commands tab and adjust the toolbars to match the commands in the following table.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

2-21

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
2

Introduction to Solid Modeling

Toolbars

Form Feature Sketch Extruded Body Revolved Body

Feature Operation Taper Edge Blend Edge Chamfer Hollow Instance Feature Offset Face Separator Unite Subtract Intersect

Edit Feature Edit Feature Parameters Edit Positioning Move Feature Separator Suppress Feature Unsuppress Feature Separator Delay Update on Edit Update Separator Feature Playback

2

Modeling Toggles Form Feature Toolbar Feature Operation Toolbar Edit Feature Toolbar

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Commands
2-22

Sweep along Guide Separator Hole Boss Pocket Pad Slot Groove Separator Datum Plane Datum Axis Datum CSYS Separator Block Cylinder
-

Choose Close to dismiss the Customize dialog box.

Step 4 Continue to the next activity.

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Introduction to Solid Modeling

Activity 3 - Creating a Primitive Block
In this activity, a Primitive Block will be created using the Origin, Edge Lengths method. Only numerical values will be used for the size of the block. Continue with the previous part file ***_prim_exp_1. Step 1 Orient the WCS.

-

Choose the Trimetric icon

from the View toolbar.

Place the cursor over the WCS and double-click on it to enter WCS Dynamics. Select the YC-ZC Rotation Handle and drag the WCS to to orientation shown below.

-

Select this handle

-

Choose MB2 when finished rotating the WCS.

Step 2 Create a Block.

-

Choose the Block icon.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

2-23

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
2

Introduction to Solid Modeling

-

If necessary, choose the Origin, Edge Lengths icon. Key in the following parameters: Length (XC) = Length (YC) = Length (ZC) = 8 (Tab) 6 (Tab) 6/2 (an example of algebraic entry)

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
2
2-24

-

Choose MB2.

-

Choose the Fit icon

from the View toolbar.

Step 3 Move the WCS back to the Absolute CSYS orientation. Choose Orient WCS icon .

-

-

Choose the Absolute CSYS icon. Choose MB2.

Notice the WCS rotated back to the absolute orientation but the block stays in the same orientation. The WCS is only referenced when creating primitives and is not created associative to it. Step 4 Change the size of the block. Ensure the Select Features icon Selection toolbar. is ON in the

-

-

Place the cursor over the block an double-click on it to enter Edit Parameters.

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Introduction to Solid Modeling -

Select the parameter shown below to edit.

Select this parameter

-

Change the parameter value to 4 and choose MB2 twice.

Step 5 Choose File"Close"Save and Close.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

2-25

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
2

Introduction to Solid Modeling

Defining Vectors
Some of the primitives require a direction vector to define in what direction the primitive will be created. The direction, reference, and destination vectors may be defined using the Vector Constructor dialog box shown below.
At Angle Between Two Points Edge/Curve Vector On Curve Vector Face Normal

2

Inferred Vector

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
2-26

Datum Plane Normal

ZC Axis

Datum Axis XC Axis YC Axis

NOTE: The XC, YC, and ZC Axis options are sufficient for the purpose of this course.

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

the direction vector is the ZC Axis. Enter the diameter and height. The methods to create cylinders are shown in the next figure. The origin is shown with the cylinder being created at the specified height in the direction of the vector. Height Method This method is used to create a cylinder by specifying the diameter and height values. After choosing this method: D D D Define the cylinder axis vector using the Vector Constructor. Define the cylinder origin using the Point Constructor. Direction vector Origin ZC YC XC EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 2-27 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 2 . size and location of the cylinder. In the example below. Diameter.Introduction to Solid Modeling Cylinder A Primitive cylinder may be created by specifying the orientation. The location and axis direction vector must also be specified.

Introduction to Solid Modeling Activity 1 . Choose the Cylinder icon. - ZC YC XC Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Creating a Primitive Cylinder In this activity. YC=0. Step 1 Open the part pau_seedpart_mm. Choose OK. Choose Cancel. Choose the Diameter. a primitive cylinder will be created utilizing the direction vector menu. Locate the cylinder at XC=0. Choose Reset in the Point Constructor menu if needed and choose OK. Enter the following Values: Diameter = 75 Height = 200 - - - Choose OK. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 2 2-28 Step 3 Create the Cylinder. Choose the YC Axis direction icon from the Vector Constructor. Step 2 Choose Modeling. Height method. ZC=0. Choose Fit from the third mouse button Pop Up Menu.

- Choose File"Close"All Parts. do not save the part. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 2-29 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 2 . - Place the cursor over the cylinder and double-click on it to enter Edit Parameters. Change the values as follows: Diameter = Height = 15 150 - - Choose MB2 twice. Choose Feature Dialog.Introduction to Solid Modeling Step 4 Edit the size of the cylinder.

rotated. it should be the base feature and that Primitives should be limited to one in a part file because they cannot be associatively positioned. Relocated. and reoriented the WCS. Were taught that the Work Coordinate System is a mobile coordinate system that may be moved and reoriented as necessary to support other Unigraphics functions. Created a Primitive Cylinder. Edited a Primitive Cylinder Reviewed the Vector Constructor dialog. Changed the size of a Primitive after creation. D D D D D D D Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Introduction to Solid Modeling SUMMARY 2 In this lesson you: D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 2-30 Were taught that the Absolute Coordinate System is a stationary coordinate system that defines a fixed point in model space. You were also taught that if using a Primitive feature. Created a Block.

Hole. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-1 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 Create Boss. and Slot Form Features .Form Features Form Features Lesson 3 PURPOSE To introduce Form Features. and Slot Form Features. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson. Pocket. you will be able to: D D D Position Boss. Pocket. . Create a Rectangular Pad. Hole.

Form features are fully associative to the geometry and parameter values used to create them. This planar placement face defines the X Y plane of the coordinate system for the feature being created. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 3-2 Datum Plane used as Planar Placement Face for Hole feature through cylindrical face of boss. slots. pads. the placement face must be cylindrical or conical.Form Features Form Features Form features are used to add detail to the model during creation. bosses. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . A datum plane may be used as the planar placement face. The creation and use of datum planes is covered in a later lesson. The Placement Face All form features require a placement face. Features are created normal to the placement face. These features include holes. the placement face must be planar. For all other form features. For a groove. pockets and grooves.

The Horizontal Reference is required to define the length direction of form features having a Length parameter (slot. Unigraphics will manipulate the WCS back to the FCS orientation during subsequent feature editing. If no edge in a true horizontal direction is available the user can specify a vertical reference from which the system will infer horizontal as perpendicular to the selected vertical direction. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 . The manipulated coordinate system is called a Feature Coordinate System (FCS) and is stored as part of the feature definition. Feature Coordinate System During creation of features of a Unigraphics model. datum axis. planar face. or datum plane that may be projected onto the planar placement face may be selected to define the horizontal direction. Any linear edge. the system will manipulate the WCS automatically to facilitate creation of the feature specified based on the user input provided. and cylindrical pockets). X+ Vector The Horizontal Reference is also required to define horizontal or vertical types of positioning dimensions for features that do not initially require a Horizontal Reference (holes bosses. rectangular pocket and pad).Form Features The Horizontal and Vertical Reference The Horizontal Reference defines the X axis of the feature coordinate system.

They may be used to place the form feature at the proper location on the placement face. that the geometry must obey. There are nine different positioning methods available on the Positioning dialog box. Vertical Horizontal Angular Parallel Perpendicular Parallel at a Distance 3 Point onto Point Point onto Line Line onto Line ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3-4 NOTE: When positioning a form feature. as shown below. or rules. It is not necessary to add positioning dimensions to form features.Form Features Positioning Form Features Positioning Dimensions are distance values measured along the planar placement face. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . These dimensions should be considered as constraints. only applicable dimension types will be displayed. but it is recommended that positioning dimensions be added at the time of creation for ease of later editing.

The feature is not yet uniquely located. Target Solid .The solid body that a Boolean operation acts upon. In the context of a Form Feature it is the solid body that the Hole.The feature has had more positioning dimensions applied to it than are necessary. Pad. Boss. or a Boss or Pad will unite with.Form Features Positioning Terminology D Fully Specified -The feature is uniquely located by the positioning dimensions specified. Overspecified . Pocket or Groove will subtract from. Slot. In the context of a Form Feature it is the representation of the Hole. D D D D EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 . Underspecified . Tool Solid -The solid representation of the feature being defined by the current operation. Pocket. Slot. or Groove that will be subtracted from or united with the Target Solid.

the Horizontal Reference).e.50 Tool edge Horizontal positioning dimension Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . one point on the target solid and the other point on the tool solid. As edges are selected. the nearest valid point is selected (midpoints are not selectable).Form Features Positioning Methods Horizontal . Feature Coordinate System ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 3-6 Target edge Horizontal reference (datum plane) 1.Specifies the horizontal distance between two points. Horizontal is measured along the X axis of the feature coordinate system (i.

Vertical is measured along the Y axis of the feature coordinate system (i.Form Features Vertical . one point on the target solid and the other point on the tool solid. As edges are selected. the nearest valid point is selected (midpoints are not selectable). The angle is measured in a counter clockwise direction (with respect to the feature coordinate system). Feature Coordinate System Tool edge (center line) 30 Angular positioning dimension Horizontal reference Target edge EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-7 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 .Specifies that a linear edge on the target solid (also datum planes or axis) and a linear edge on the tool solid must be at a given angle to each other. from the ends of the edges nearest to where they are selected. Feature Coordinate System Vertical positioning dimension 1.Specifies the vertical distance between two points.e.50 Target edge (arc center) Tool edge (arc center) Horizontal reference Angular . perpendicular to the Horizontal Reference).

and Cylindrical Pockets the Tool Edge is automatically selected and defined as the arc center.500 Tool edge for Horizontal and Vertical Dimension Horizontal reference ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 Fully Specified by Horizontal and Vertical Positioning Dimensions 1. Vertical and Angular Positioning Dimensions 15 . 3-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Form Features Examples of Horizontal.500 Target edge for Horizontal and Vertical Dimension .00 Tool edge (arc center) Target edge for Horizontal and Vertical Dimension (arc center) 1. Vertical and Angular Positioning Dimensions Fully Specified by Horizontal. Bosses.00 Horizontal reference NOTE: When positioning Holes.

Features with length.375 Parallel positioning dimension Target edge (arc center) Feature Coordinate System Target edges 1. will require an additional positioning dimension to control rotation.00 In the above example the feature (hole) can be fully specified with two Perpendicular dimensions. The linear target edge is always the first pick.50 Perpendicular positioning dimension Feature Coordinate System Tool edge (arc center) 2.Specifies the shortest (normal) distance between a linear edge on the target solid (also datum planes or axis) and a point on the tool solid. TIP Using Perpendicular positioning instead of Horizontal or Vertical can save time since no horizontal or vertical reference is needed. Tool edge (arc center) 1. such as slot. pocket and pad. the nearest valid point is selected (midpoints are not selectable). one point on the target solid and the other point on the tool solid.Specifies the shortest distance between two points. . As edges are selected.Form Features Parallel . EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 Perpendicular .

or Point onto Line). Adding another Parallel at a Distance or Line onto Line dimension would overspecify the location of the feature. Perpendicular. Feature Coordinate System Parallel positioning dimension 2. pocket or pad).Form Features Parallel at a Distance . Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Horizontal. To fully specify the feature in the above example an additional positioning dimension is required to solve the final degree of freedom (i. This is typically used for features with length (slot. rotational and distance in one direction.00 Tool edge (center line) Target edge ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 3-10 Horizontal reference These two edges are constrained parallel Using Parallel at a Distance will solve two of the three degrees of freedom necessary to fully specify a feature with length.Specifies that a linear edge on the target solid (also datum planes or axis) and a linear edge on the tool solid must be parallel and at a given distance.e.

This zero value can be edited to a non-zero value through the Edit→Feature→Positioning dialog.Specifies that the distance between a point on the target solid and a point on the tool solid is zero.Form Features Point onto Point . This is most commonly used to align arc centers of cylindrical or conical features and fully constrain their location since rotation is not a degree of freedom for cylindrical or conical features. Point on tool solid Point on target solid EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 Point onto Point is the same as the Parallel positioning dimension only the value is automatically set to zero. .

Point onto Line positioning dimensions 0 0 Feature Coordinate System ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 Target edges (Datum Planes) Tool edge (arc center) Point onto Line is the same as the Perpendicular positioning dimension only the value is automatically set to zero. This zero value can be edited to a non-zero value through the Edit→Feature→Positioning dialog. 3-12 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Form Features Point onto Line .Specifies that the distance between an edge on the target solid (also datum planes or axis) and a point on the tool solid is zero.

or Point onto Line). Line onto Line is the same as the Parallel at a Distance positioning dimension only the value is automatically set to zero.Form Features Line onto Line . To fully specify the feature in the above example an additional positioning dimension is required to solve the final degree of freedom (i. Adding another Line onto Line or Parallel at a Distance dimension would overspecify the location of the feature. Point onto Line positioning dimensions Horizontal reference 0 Feature Coordinate System Target edge (Datum Plane) Tool edge (center line of slot) Using Line onto Line will solve two of the three degrees of freedom necessary to fully specify a feature of length. Horizontal.e. This zero value can be edited to a non-zero value through the Edit→Feature→Positioning dialog. Perpendicular. rotational and translation in one direction.Specifies that the distance between a linear edge on the target solid (also datum planes or axis) and a linear edge on the tool solid is zero and they are constrained parallel to each other. This is typically used for features with length (slot. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 . pocket or pad).

) Choose the hole type. Create positional dimensions as required. The middle portion of the dialog window changes depending on the hole type that is selected.Form Features Hole This option is used to create simple. counterbore. and countersink holes in an existing solid. If a datum plane is selected choose the Reverse Side button as required. Simple Placement face Counterbore Thru face Countersink ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 Hole Creation Method D D D Choose Insert→Form Feature→Hole (or the Hole icon. Select the thru face if applicable. Choose OK or Apply. Select the placement face. Key in the required values (or statements). D D D D 3-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Form Features Simple Hole Depth Hole Diameter Counterbored C Bore Diameter Hole Depth C Bore Depth Tip Angle Countersunk C Sink Angle C Sink Diameter Hole Depth EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-15 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 .

Form Features Activity 1 .Creating Hole Form Features This activity will show the creation of a thru hole feature.50 Step 1 Open the part file pau_seedpart_in. Simple Thru Hole Diameter = 1. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 3-16 - Ensure that the Modeling Application is active. choose the Origin. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Step 2 Create a Block. - - If necessary. Edge Lengths icon. Key in the following parameters: Length (XC) = Length (YC) = Length (ZC) = 10 (Tab) 4 (Tab) 2 - Choose MB2. Choose the Block icon.

select the Placement Face icon and then reselect the correct geometry. Select the top face of the block as shown below. - Ensure the Simple hole icon is selected.Form Features - Choose the Fit icon from the View toolbar. Step 3 Create a simple thru hole. Select thru face with one pick in this region or select and confirm EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-17 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ . - Choose the Hole icon. Select top face here If incorrect geometry is selected. Confirm the selection if necessary. - again Select the bottom face as the Thru Face.

The Positioning dialog box is displayed. The hole is temporarily represented as a long tool solid that extends beyond the thru face. Step 4 Position the hole feature. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 3-18 - The system defaults to the Perpendicular icon the Cue line prompts you to select a Target Edge.Form Features - Enter 1. as shown in the figure below.5 for the diameter and choose OK. and Select this edge as the Target Edge Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Form Features - Key in the name of the expression (dim_1) and the value (2) as shown below. NOTE: The system applied expression names may be accepted. however. it is a good practice to give expressions a meaningful name. doing so will make interrogation of the part easier. - Choose the Perpendicular icon. Select the left edge of the top face as shown in the figure below. Select this edge as the Target Edge EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-19 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 .

The part now looks like the following figure. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 3-20 Step 5 Choose File"Close"All Parts.Form Features - Key in the name of the expression and the value as shown below. - Choose OK. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Since the location of the hole is completely specified. it is moved to the new position and the Boolean operation is performed.

the shape of the imaginary cutting tool corresponds to the slot type and dimensions. The path of the slot will be parallel to the horizontal reference selected.Form Features Slot This option allows you to create a slot in a solid body as if cut by a milling machine tool. The slot feature will be created so that the axis of the imaginary cutter tool is normal to the face or datum plane selected. the Thru slot option extends the slot length along the placement face in the direction of the horizontal reference through the faces. specified by the user. The system prompts for all necessary slot parameters. depending upon the specific type of slot feature chosen. For all slot types. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-21 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 . The slot types are shown in the dialog box illustrated below. In each case.

Form Features Rectangular This option allows creation of a slot in an existing solid body using a tool that has cylindrical end faces and will leave sharp edges along the bottom of the slot. NOTE: The system will not prompt for slot length if the Thru option has been toggled on. as shown below. Rectangular slot parameters are Slot Width. ZC YC XC Width Depth Length ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 3-22 The width of the rectangular slot represents the diameter of the cylindrical cutting tool. Slot Length. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Instead. Slot Depth. Depth values must be positive. The length is measured parallel to the horizontal reference (X in the feature coordinate system). The depth of the slot is measured in a parallel orientation to the tool axis. from the origin point of the slot to the bottom of the slot. it prompts for selection of the two thru faces. Length values must be positive.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-23 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 .Form Features The figure below illustrates a T-slot using the Thru option. Placement Face Second Thru face Centerline First Thru face The four other available slot profiles are illustrated below. Depth Width Depth Ball Diameter Ball End Slot Corner Radius U Slot Top Width Bottom Depth Top Depth Width Angle Bottom Width T Slot Dovetail Slot NOTE: The value of the corner radius of the U-Slot must be less than 1/2 the width of the slot.

- Select the top of the block at the approximate position shown in the figure below.Creating Slot Form Features In this activity. The Cue line prompts you to select the planar placement face.00 depth = 0. Select top face here Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . you will create two different types of slots in the top of a solid. The top edges change to the system color. Rectangular slot width = 2. Then choose the Rectangular option.Form Features Activity 2 . Step 2 Create a rectangular slot. - Ensure that the Modeling Application is active.50 length = 3.00 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 3-24 - Choose the Slot icon. Use the information provided in the figure below for your work. Step 1 Open the part file pau_slot_1.

5 Length= 3 - Choose OK. Select this edge as the horizontal reference A conehead displays the direction of the length of the slot. datum plane. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-25 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 . Or. or any edge parallel to it. datum axis. and the top edges are highlighted. - Select the bottom front edge of the block. The object selected can be a linear edge. - Enter the parameters for the rectangular slot: Width= 2 Depth= .Form Features - If the Cue line asks for a selection confirmation. choose the correct number from the QuickPick dialog box. If the wrong face is highlighted. solid face. a vertical reference could be specified instead using any of the fore mentioned objects. The Cue line asks for a horizontal reference. The horizontal direction selected will determine the direction in which the slot length will be placed in the part. as shown in the following figure. select the Back button in the active dialog box.

Select the target edge as shown below. - Select the slot's centerline that is parallel to the selected edge. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 3-26 - - Choose the Perpendicular icon. - Choose the Parallel at a Distance icon. Key in 2 and choose OK. Select the target edge as shown below. - Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Key in 3.5 and choose OK.Form Features The rectangular slot will appear and be placed at the location of the screen pick on the top of the block. Select this edge. - Select the slot's centerline that is parallel to the selected edge. Select this edge.

Step 3 Create a T slot. The finished rectangular slot should now look like this. Select top face here - Select the horizontal reference. Toggle the Thru option ON.Form Features The Boolean operation is performed. Select this edge EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-27 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 . Select the planar placement face as shown. Choose the T-Slot option. - Select Back.

- Since thru faces have been defined the slot does not need to be positioned along its length.5 . Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .5 Bottom width = . Select this edge. Select the target edge as shown below. Key in 2 and choose OK.Form Features - Select the thru faces for the T-slot. Starting thru face - Ending thru face Enter the following values for the parameters: Top width = Top depth = . ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 3-28 - Choose the Parallel at a Distance icon. - Select the slot's centerline that is parallel to the selected edge.5 - Choose OK.75 Bottom depth = .

a dovetail Thru slot. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-29 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 .Form Features - Choose OK. Your part should look like the following figure. that intersects both of the other slots. Step 4 Optional: Add a third slot. Step 5 Choose File"Close"All Parts.

or from the centerlines provided for this purpose.Form Features Pocket The pocket feature is used to create a cavity in a solid body. There are three types of pockets: D D D Cylindrical Rectangular General The Rectangular Pocket will be discussed in this lesson. The following parameters may be specified: X Length Positioning Centerlines Origin point ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 3-30 Y Length Horizontal Reference Corner Radius Taper Angle Z Length Floor Radius Pocket features may be positioned from a tool edge. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . with or without a floor and/or corner radius. Rectangular Pocket This option allows a rectangular pocket to be defined to a specified depth. having either straight or tapered sides.

- Ensure that the Modeling Application is active.Form Features Activity 3 .Creating Pocket Form Features In this activity. Step 2 Create a rectangular pocket. Step 1 Open the part file pau_pocket_1. Select the placement face as shown in the figure below. - Choose the Pocket icon. The finished part will look like the figure below. a rectangular pocket will be created on the block. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-31 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 . Choose Rectangular. Select placement face here Select this face as horizontal reference - Select the horizontal reference as shown in the same figure.

Form Features - Enter the parameter values as follows: X Length = Y Length = Z Length = Corner Radius = Floor Radius = Taper Angle = 3 1. and parametric values.5 . Step 4 Choose File"Close"All Parts.25 0 - Choose OK. - 3 Fully position the pocket using your own methods. The rectangular pocket appears at the location where the planar placement face was selected. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3-32 Step 3 Use a similar method to create the second pocket shown at the beginning of the activity.5 1 . Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-33 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 . Height is measured from the placement face. Taper angle is the angle at which the cylinder wall of the boss inclines. having either straight or tapered sides. The parameters of the boss are diameter. Diameter Height Z Y Tapered boss Z Y X X Diameter is the distance across the required boss. A zero value results in a vertical cylinder wall. height and taper angle. A positive or negative value may be entered depending on which way the wall is to incline.Form Features Boss The Boss feature allows the addition of a cylindrical shape to a specified height.

Before Boss diameter=0. NOTE: The dimensions shown are from the outside of the part. Step 2 Create a boss feature. - Save the part as ***_coverplate_1 where *** represent your initials.20 Boss height=0. - Choose File→Open.Creating Boss Form Features In this activity. - Ensure that the Modeling Application is active.075 After ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 3-34 Step 1 Open the part file. Select pau_coverplate_1.Form Features Activity 4 . Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . be sure to select the proper edges to dimension from. two bosses will be created and positioned on a cover plate for a modular telephone jack as shown below.

and EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-35 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 .2 . Select top inside face approximately here - Enter the parameters for the boss: Diameter = Height = . - The system defaults to the Perpendicular icon the Cue line prompts you to select a Target Edge. The Positioning dialog box is displayed. Select and accept the planar placement face as shown below.075 Taper Angle = 0 - Choose Apply.Form Features - Choose the Boss icon. Step 3 Position the boss. The boss is temporarily placed on the face where you selected it.

A temporary display appears that shows the distance from the center of the boss to the target edge. as shown below. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 3-36 Target edge - Enter 1 for the new value and choose OK. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Choose the Perpendicular icon again. - Enter 1.5 for the new value. Select a front edge on the outside of the part for the target edge for the second perpendicular dimension. The boss is moved into the correct location and the Boolean operation is performed. Front Select either of the right outside edges as the target edge. as shown below.Form Features - Select a right side edge on the outside of the part for a target edge for the perpendicular dimension.

- Repeat Step 2 and Step 3 for the second boss. Use the same positioning values.Form Features Step 4 Create the second boss and position it. Do not close the part. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-37 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 . Step 5 Choose File"Save. outside edge to locate the boss. this time use the back.

A zero radius results in sharp corners on the pad feature. The Corner Radius specifies the blend radius for the vertical edges of the pad feature (along the Height). and taper. The parameter values of the pad feature are X. with or without taper and corner radii. and must be positive or equal to zero. Tapered Pad Positioning Centerlines Width ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 3-38 Length Height Corner Radius Horizontal reference Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Y. A zero value results in vertical walls. Width. Length is measured along the displayed vector. corner radius.Form Features Pad This option allows a raised pad on a solid body to be created. and Height is measured normal to the Placement face. The Taper Angle is the angle at which the four walls of the pad feature incline inward. and Z lengths. Width is measured perpendicular to the displayed vector. This number may be positive or zero. and Height values of the Pad feature relate directly to the displayed vector indicating the Horizontal direction. The two types of pads are: D D Rectangular General (Not covered in this course) Rectangular Pad The Length.

Choose Rectangular from the dialog box. When complete.1 height 0. This determines the direction of the Length parameter of the pad as well as the direction for a horizontal Positioning Dimension. - Choose the Pad icon. two pads will be centered with respect to the two existing bosses. Rectangular pad length 2.Creating and Positioning a Pad In this activity. Location for pad It is now necessary to define the horizontal reference.0375 Step 2 Create the first rectangular pad.9 width 0. Select the top surface at a location which approximates the position shown. the part should appear as shown below. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-39 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 . Step 1 Continue working with ***_coverplate_1.Form Features Activity 5 .

0375 0 0 - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 3-40 - Choose OK.Form Features - Select one of the edges or faces shown below to establish the horizontal direction of the feature coordinate system. Enter the parameters for the pad: Length = Width = Height = Corner Radius = Taper Angle = 2. Select back edges or face for Horizontal Reference Select front edge or face for Horizontal Reference A vector arrow displays the horizontal direction of the pad.9 . choose Back and respecify the horizontal reference. The pad is temporarily positioned at the location selected for the placement face. - If the vector is not pointing in the desired direction.1 . on the Positioning - Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Step 3 Position the pad. Choose the Line onto Line icon Method dialog box.

. Tool edge Target edge - Select a tool edge (the small edge at the top end of the pad) The position is specified in one direction. Select the pad's horizontal center line as the Tool Edge. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-41 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 - Choose the Vertical icon. Choose OK. - Select the target edge (circular edge of the boss) as shown in the figure below. another positioning dimension is required to fully specify the feature's location.Form Features - Select the target edge (an inside edge as shown below). Enter a new value of 0. Target edge - Choose Arc Center.

3-42 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . When completed the part should look like the figure shown below.Form Features The pad moves into position and the Boolean operation is performed. The part should look as shown below: Step 4 Create the second pad and position it in the same way to the other boss. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 Step 5 Save and close the part file.

Created Slot Form Features.Form Features SUMMARY In this lesson you were introduced to Form Features. Created Boss Form Features Created a Rectangular Pad. Form features are used to add detail to the model during creation. Created Pocket Form Features. Identified Target and Tool Solids Applied Positioning dimensions to a form feature. Identified a Horizontal Reference. The different form features are: Hole Boss Pocket Pad Slot Groove This lesson you: D D D D D D D D D Identified a Placement Face. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-43 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 . Created a Hole Form Feature. Form features are fully associative to the geometry and parameter values used to create them.

Form Features (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 3-44 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Expressions Expressions Lesson 4 PURPOSE This lesson is a fundamental introduction to Expressions. Edit Expressions. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 4-1 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 4 . you will be able to: D D Create Expressions.

Unigraphics automatically creates expressions when: D D D a feature is created.5 Name Statement Value Length is the name of the expression and represents the value 1. equal sign. Expressions are case sensitive. a statement. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .5. The statement is the portion displayed on the right side of the equal sign. Expressions define the dimensions and relationships of a model. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 4 4-2 The value is the result of the evaluation of the statement portion of the equation within the expression. and comments in an expression is 132.5+2*cos(60) 1. a feature or sketch is positioned.Expressions Expressions Expressions are algebraic or arithmetic statements used to control the characteristics of a part. and a value. Understanding Expressions All expressions have a name. a sketch is dimensioned. statement. The name is the portion of the expression on the left side of the equal sign. The statement may be a numeral or an algebraic function and may contain pre existing expression names. NOTE: The total number of characters allowed for the name. Example of an Expression Length=. Expression names are alphanumeric strings of text that begin with a letter.

The Name Filter Name Creation order Reverse creation Expression List Expressions editor and calculator Used By Saving changes to the expressions EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 4-3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 4 . choose Tools→Expression.Expressions Creating and Editing Expressions To work with expressions.

The expression is then added to the Expression List. Choose Apply or OK to save the expression. D D Using Information→Feature Many times there is a need to determine what expressions control what features in the model. user created expressions (Thk=0. Click in the expression editor field and key in the entire expression (for example: rad=1. Predefined. Procedure: D D D Editing Expressions Procedure: D D Choose the expression to modify from the expression list. By choosing Information→Feature. It is displayed in the expression editor field. modify the statement (right side of the equal sign). a listing window will show information about the selected feature(s). Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .5). choose Tools→Expression. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 4 4-4 Used by The Used by option provides a means of finding out if an expression is referenced in another expression and what feature(s) use the expression.00). select the expression and then choose the Used by icon. If the name (left side of the equal sign) is modified. To use this option. Thk used as a text entry in a parameter field). In the expression editor field.Expressions Creating Expressions There are three methods to create expressions: D D D System generated expressions (p#).60. a new expression will be created. Press the <Enter> key. Choose Apply or OK to save the expression. and selecting the feature(s) in question. User defined expressions created during text input (Rad=5. Press the <Enter> key.

Start the Modeling application. Choose the Delete icon from the Standard toolbar. - Select the block in the graphic window and choose OK. Step 3 Delete the Block.Expressions Activity 1 . and p2 expressions. The Edit Expression dialog box shown above lists all of the expressions in the part file. The same block will then be created with the same dimensional values. Step 1 Open the part file pau_prim_exp_1 and save as ***_prim_exp_1. Step 2 Examine the Expressions for the Block created in the previous activity. p1. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 4-5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 4 . However. Notice the p0. - Choose the Tools→Expression option.Getting Familiar with Expressions This activity will demonstrate how expressions were created when the block was created in the previous activity. this time logical names for the expressions will be used. These are default expression names given to the block.

The display on the Edit Expression dialog box should be similar to the one shown below. These expressions were created during the creation of the block. - Choose the Tools→Expression option. Edge Lengths. Step 5 Examine the Expressions for the newly created Block.Expressions Step 4 Create a new Block. Length. - Choose Origin. and Width. Key in the following expressions: Length (XC) = Length (YC) = Length (ZC) = Length=8 (Tab) Width=6 (Tab) Height=6/2 - Choose OK. - Choose the Block icon. Notice the expressions Height. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 4 4-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

The expression is displayed in the expression text editor field. at the bottom of the The graphic shows the listing window with the information about the feature selected. This relationship could not be established upon creation as the Width expression was not in existence. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 4-7 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 4 . The true intent is that the Height grows proportionally with the Width. Step 7 Change the expression. Select the Height expression from the Expressions window. This is not the true intent of the design. - Choose the Information→Expression→List All option or select the Information icon Expressions dialog window. - Close the Information window. Notice that the Height is tied to the numeric value 6/2.Expressions Step 6 Find information about the newly created Block.

Any time that the Width changes the value will change accordingly.Expressions - Place the cursor in the text editor field just to the right of the numeral 6 in the 6/2 expression field. - Select the Width expression. replace it with 4 and press Enter. Text Editor Field - Backspace once to delete the numeral 6 and replace it with Width and press Enter. The value for the expression Height is now changed to Width/2. Backspace once to delete the numeral 6. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 4 Step 8 Change the Width value. 4-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 4-9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 4 . Step 9 Save and Close the part.Expressions - Choose OK.

and a value. a statement. Retrieved information through Information→Expression. All expressions have a name. a feature or sketch is positioned.Expressions SUMMARY Expressions are algebraic or arithmetic statements used to control the characteristics of a part. Expressions are created when: a feature is created. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 4 4-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . In this lesson you: D D D Created Expressions. a sketch is dimensioned. Expressions define the dimensions and relationships of a model. Edited Expressions.

you will be able to: D Hollow a solid body. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 5-1 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 . OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson.Face Operations Face Operations Lesson 5 PURPOSE To introduce the Hollow face operation.

the Hollow operation will be discussed.Face Operations Face Operations Face Operations are available to provide additional definition to the faces of a model. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 5-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The Face Operations are Taper. In this lesson. and Offset Face . Hollow.

Negative values for the wall thickness will result in a hollow that forms a shell of the specified value around the original solid. based upon a specified thickness. Face to be pierced Thickness Before After Wall Thickness Value Positive or negative values may be used as follows: D Positive values will hollow the existing solid so that the wall thickness is measured inward from the original faces of the solid. In the figure below. the top face has been selected as the face to be pierced. The entire solid body is hollowed during this operation. D EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 5-3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 . or a shell around an existing solid.Face Operations Hollow The Hollow operation creates a cavity inside.

The "Region" button may be selected to quickly select a region of faces to be pierced. The "Body" button may be selected to create a void region in a body without piercing any faces. A unique thickness may be assigned for each face with the Offset Face option. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 5-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . When Offset Face is selected the Alternate Thickness text box becomes active. any changes in the region are automatically reflected in the hollow. as the offset features are not required. Region Face Body Pierced face Type Filter Offset face Default Thickness Alternate Thickness A hollow may be created in three different ways: D D D The "Face" button may be chosen to select pierced faces individually. Using variable thickness hollows reduces the number of features in the part. Since a region of the body is pierced rather than individual faces.Face Operations Choosing Insert"Feature Operation"Hollow from the main menu will display the following dialog box for hollow creation. and results in more compact models that are easier to comprehend.

The figure below illustrates the solid that will be hollowed. Step 3 Hollow the solid and pierce the proper faces.Performing a Hollow Operation In this activity the Hollow operation will be used to take material away from the model of a plastic molded part. and start the Modeling application. Step 1 Open the Part File. - Open the part file pau_hair_dryer_1. and Restore EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 5-5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 .Face Operations Activity 1 . - Set the display mode back to Wireframe the view (third mouse button). Right Step 2 Inspect the Part. - Set the Display Mode to Shaded and Rotate the part to verify that the solid requires hollowing.

The finished part is shown below. After both of the desired faces are selected to be pierced. Select the right. Back side face Right face Step 4 Inspect the Part. - Set the Display Mode to Shaded and Rotate the part (third mouse button). ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . and back side faces to pierce. choose OK twice. 5 Step 5 Choose File"Close"All Parts. from the Feature Operation - Enter a Default Thickness of 2.Face Operations - Choose the Hollow icon toolbar.

Choose the Hollow icon.Face Operations Activity 2 . - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 5-7 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 . and start the Modeling application. The figure below illustrates the solid that will be hollowed. - Open the part file pau_hollow_1. left. right. back.Hollow and Selection Practice In this activity the Hollow operation will be used to create a sheet metal part. and bottom. Front Step 2 Create a hollow feature. Enter a Default Thickness of . Step 1 Open the Part File. Select the 5 following faces to pierce: front.12.

Step 3 Choose File"Close"All Parts.12 and examine the result.Face Operations - After all the desired faces are selected to be pierced. The finished part is shown below. Repeat the operation with a thickness of -. choose OK twice. - Choose Edit→Undo List→Hollow. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 5-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

. - Key in an Alternate Thickness of 8. Select the faces to pierce as shown below. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 5-9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 - Choose the Offset Face icon. and start the Modeling application. Select the 3 faces that are NOT shaded. - Choose the Hollow icon.Face Operations Activity 3 . Step 1 Open the Part File. Enter a Default Thickness of 4. Step 2 Hollow the solid. - Open the part file pau_hollow_2.Creating a Hollow Feature with an Offset This simple activity will demonstrate the application of a hollow feature with an offset face.

do not save. - Choose OK. Select this face to offset.Face Operations - Select the face to offset as shown below. Step 3 Close the part. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 5-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

In this lesson you: D D D D D Specified a Default Thickness. based upon a specified thickness. Created a Hollow Feature. In addition. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 5-11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 . Specified a Alternate Thickness. Specified Faces to be Offset. selected faces may be assigned various offset thickness.Face Operations SUMMARY The Hollow operation creates a cavity inside. or a shell around an existing solid. Specified Faces to be Pierced.

Face Operations (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 5-12 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Edge Operations Lesson 6 PURPOSE To introduce Blend and Chamfer edge operations. Create Chamfers. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 6-1 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 Edge Operations . OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson. you will be able to: D D Create Blends.

Edge Operations

Edge Operations
Edge Operations are available to provide additional definition to the edges of a model. The Edge Operations are Edge Blend and Chamfer.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
6

6-2

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Edge Operations

Edge Blend
This option creates cylindrical or conical faces in place of an edge on a solid body. The system adds or subtracts material depending on the topology of the solid body and shortens the faces intersecting at the edge selected.
Blend radius

Selected edge

Blend radius

Shortened faces

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

6-3

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
6

Edge Operations

Edge Blends Using Dynamic Input Field
With the cursor selection set to General Objects, an edge may be blended by first selecting the edge(s) in the graphics window, then the third mouse button is used to access a pop-up menu. From this menu, the Blend operation is chosen and a Radius value may be input directly on the graphics screen. The edge blend is automatically created as a preview.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
6

When you achieve the desired radius value, choose the checkmark in the upper left corner of the graphics screen.

6-4

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Edge Operations

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

6-5

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
6

You can also access the full Blend Dialog by choosing the Blend Dialog icon at the upper left corner of the graphics screen. By choosing the Blend Dialog, you may make changes to the Blend default settings.

Edge Operations

Activity 1 - Creating Edge Blends with Dynamic Input Fields
In this activity you will create Edge Blends using the MB3 pop-up menu and on screen Dynamic Input Fields. Step 1 Open the part pau_edge_blend_1 and choose the Modeling application. You will create Edge Blends using the new functionality.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
6

Step 2 Create the first Edge Blend. Ensure the Select General Objects icon Selection toolbar. is ON in the

-

-

Choose the edge shown above, click MB3 and choose the Blend option.

6-6

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Edge Operations -

.75

-

Choose the Checkmark at the upper left corner of the graphics window to apply the radius.

Step 3 Create the second Edge Blend.
-

Choose the edge shown below , click MB3 and choose the Blend option.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

6-7

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
6

Highlight the Dynamic Input Field and enter .75. Watch the previewed radius to make sure it looks as desired.

Edge Operations -

6

Highlight the Dynamic Input Field and enter .5 . Watch the previewed radius to make sure it looks as desired.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
6-8

Notice that the tangent edges were automatically selected. That is because the Add Tangent Edges toggle is on in the Blend dialog.

.5

If you chose OK at this point, only part of the edge would be blended. Instead you would like to blend the entire left side of the part. To do this, you must manually select the additional edges. Note: At this point, if you wanted to make changes to the Edge Blend default settings, you could choose the Blend Dialog icon from the upper left corner of the graphics screen and make the desired changes.

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Edge Operations -

-

Choose the Checkmark icon

to apply the blends.

Step 4 Close the part without saving.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

6-9

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
6

Select the two additional edges at the left side of the part. If Enable Blend Preview is toggled ON in the dialog, you will see a preview of each blend as the edge is selected. If Blend Preview does not display, you can choose the Blend Dialog icon in the upper left corner of the graphics screen and toggle Enable Blend Preview ON.

Edge Operations

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
6
6-10

Chamfer
This option bevels the edges of a solid body by defining the desired chamfer dimensions. There are five methods of creating a chamfer:
D D D D D

Single Offset Double Offset Offset Angle Freeform Single Offset (Outside scope of class) Freeform Double Offset (Outside scope of class)

The system adds or subtracts material depending on the topology of the solid body and shortens the faces intersecting at the edge selected. Outside Chamfer Inside Chamfer

Shortened faces Selected edge Selected edge

Chamfer Shortened faces

Chamfer

Removes Material

Adds material

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Edge Operations

This option allows a chamfer to be placed with an offset that is the same along both faces, as shown in the figure below (offset 1 and offset 2 have the same value). This value must be a positive value.
Selected edge Offset 1

Face 2 Offset 2

Face 1

The single offset shown below is measured along the path of the curved face and is not necessarily a linear distance.
Offset

Selected edge

Face 2

Chamfer Face 1

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

6-11

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
6

Single Offset

Edge Operations

Double Offset
This option allows different offsets to be placed along the faces. Both of the offset values must be positive and applied as shown below.
Second offset Face 1 First offset

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
6
6-12

Selected edge

Chamfer

Face 2

Offset Angle
This option allows an offset value and the chamfer angle to be entered. Note that the chamfer angle is measured from the second face selected. NOTE: The option of flipping the chamfer is available if the display is not what is desired.

Angle

Selected edge

Face 1 Offset Chamfer

Face 2

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Edge Operations

In this activity, a chamfer will be placed on different edges of the model. Step 1 Open the part file.
-

Open pau_chamfer_1 and make sure you're in the Modeling application.

Step 2 Create a chamfer using offset and angle.

-

Choose the Chamfer icon. Choose Offset Angle option. Select Edge 1 as shown below.

Edge 1

-

Choose OK. Key in the following parameters: Offset = 1.75 Angle = 30

-

Choose OK.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

6-13

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
6

Activity 2 - Performing a Chamfer Operation

Edge Operations

The model should appear as shown below.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
6
6-14

Edge 2

Step 3 Create a double offset chamfer.
-

Choose the Double Offset option. Select Edge 2 as shown above. Choose OK. Key in the following parameters: First Offset = .25

Second Offset = .5
-

Choose OK and note the option to Flip Last Chamfer.

Step 4 Choose File"Close"All Parts.

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Edge Operations

SUMMARY

The Edge Blend and Chamfer Operations are available to provide additional definition to the edges of a model. In this lesson you:
D D D D D

Blended different edges. Chamfered edges using Offset Angle Chamfered edges using Double Offset. Became aware of the Flip Last Chamfer option. Became aware that all blended edges or chamfered edges created in a single operation are considered one feature.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

6-15

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
6

Edge Operations ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) 6-16 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 7-1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 7 . Querying a part file is useful in that a user may gain an understanding of the part's design intent and how the part was created. Retrieve Expression Information. Suppress & Unsuppress Features. Open and close the Model Navigator. Measure the distance between objects.Model Construction Query Model Construction Query Lesson 7 PURPOSE To demonstrate different methods available to query a part file. Identify where expressions are used. Retrieve Feature Information. you will be able to: D D D D D D D D Retrieve Layer Information. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson. Playback the model construction.

D D 7-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The Category Names are listed in the Category listing window on the Layer Settings dialog box as well as in the Layer/Status listing window next to assigned layers when Show Category Names is enabled. this may be done with the model shaded or displayed as wireframe. These display modes may also be controlled using the View toolbar. They work like invisible containers to house the different objects used to create a Unigraphics solid model. or All Selectable Layers. Layer Listing: There is a filtering option menu at the bottom of the dialog box that allows the Layer/Status listing window to display All Objects. Layers with Objects. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 7 Refresh Fit Zoom Zoom Rotate In/Out Pan Wireframe Settings Shaded Settings Wireframe View Orientation Inspect the Layers Layers are used to organize a part file. Depending upon the graphics driver being used. The model may be rotated by using the middle mouse button or the Rotate icon in the View toolbar. Things to look for: D Object Count: Enabling Show Object Count using the checkbox will change the display in the Layer/Status listing window to a Layer/Status/Count listing window that shows the number of objects contained on each layer. At times this is very beneficial in order to see clearly what is displayed on the screen. Category Names: Unigraphics offers the ability to name layers or groups of layers using Categories.Model Construction Query Visually Inspect the Part Visual inspection of the solid model may be accomplished by rotating the model to view the different features.

Conversely. When a check is displayed in the box.Model Construction Query Model Navigator The Model Navigator may be used to identify the different features of the model. the feature is displayed in the graphics area. UNIX: Icon from Navigator toolbar Windows: Icon from Resource Bar EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 7-3 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 7 . The Model Navigator allows the display of features to be temporarily removed (suppressed) from the graphics screen by selecting the check box associated with the feature name. Both. by default. The Model Navigator also allows various editing functions to be performed from a central location. selecting a feature from the graphics area will highlight the selected feature and its parents/children in the Model Navigator window. Holding down the third mouse button causes a feature specific pop up menu to be displayed offering pertinent editing options. are located vertically on the right side of the Unigraphics window. Selecting a feature from the Model Navigator window will highlight the selected feature in the graphics area and will also highlight the parent and/or child features of the selected feature in different colors. To access the Model Navigator in UNIX use the Navigator toolbar and to access the Model Navigator in Windows use the Resource bar.

the Playback and Suppress/Unsuppress functions (found under Edit→Feature from the Menu Bar or in the Edit Feature toolbar) will allow the user to reconstruct the model and watch the progress graphically. Information→Feature Information→Feature may be used to identify Parent/Child relationships between the selected feature and the other features in the model. The main differences between these two methods is that Playback does not suppress reference features or sketches. Some of the most useful menu options when trying to interrogate a model are listed below with a brief description of what they do. Playback & Suppress/Unsuppress In regards to investigating how a model was created. The Edit→Find option within the Information Window allows easy navigation through the listing. However. the amount of information that can be learned to determine if it is an acceptable practice for a particular model. The feature will then be highlighted in the Feature Browser window. Information→Expression→List All by Reference Information→Expression→List All by Reference allows expressions that reference other expressions to be identified. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 7 7-4 TIP When using Information→Feature. the feature may also be selected in the graphics window. On very large models. Choose OK or Apply to bring up the Information window which will display the relative expressions. Playback does allow editing of features during update. as well as identifying to what features these expressions belong. Information→Expression→List All Examining the expressions may reveal associativity that is built between features or the expressions associated to them. In addition.Model Construction Query Information The Information pull down from the main menu offers a number of options for obtaining information about the model. where Suppress/Unsuppress does not. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . users will have to weigh the invested time vs. expressions that control the feature may be displayed in the graphic screen by toggling Display Dimensions on.

D An Information window pops up identifying the features that are using the selected expression. Choose the Used by icon. To use: D D Choose Tools→Expressions Select the expression.Model Construction Query Expression Used by option Features may be identified that have an association to a particular expression by using the Used by" option found in the Expressions dialog window. Identified feature Used by EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 7-5 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 7 .

it returns the closest point on each object and the delta distances in absolute and work coordinate systems. You can change the units of measure in the Information window using Analysis→Units. and/or faces. YC plane. curves. Just select a new first object. The new distance is then displayed in the Information window. The system calculates the three-dimensional distance and the two-dimensional distance relative to the XC. edges. You can continue verifying distances between one of the selected objects and any other object as long as you specify the new unselected object first. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . and then select one of the previously selected objects. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 7 7-6 All data in the Information window is converted to the current units. Once the Information window has displayed the results. The graphics window will indicate the distance measured by a temporary line. and then choosing OK. bodies. planes.Model Construction Query Analysis Distance The Analysis→Distance function obtains the minimum distance between any two Unigraphics objects such as points. In addition. you can verify the distance between one of the selected objects and a new object.

Spline B : Specified start point EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 7-7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 7 . you may wish to specify a point to indicate the region of the selected object in which you'd like the system to calculate the distance. which allows you to select the desired start point for the curve or face.Model Construction Query Start Points In cases where multiple closest points exist. if there exists more than one pair of points that are normal to both objects. Use Start Point lets you indicate a start point for a selected curve or face object. you want to specify the minimum distance between point A and a certain area of spline B. as shown below. the system may not produce the desired results unless you indicate a start point to use. Point A But if you specify a start point as shown. Use this option to distinguish between multiple points on an object when the selection of more than one is possible. Use Start Point toggles from No to Yes. For example. the system displays the Point Subfunction menu. the system knows which minimum distance you are looking for. In this case. If no start point is specified. When you set the toggle to Yes and select a curve or face. the system may indicate the minimum distance here.

If there is only 1 object on a solids layer and just a few objects on a curves layer. 7-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Inspect the model. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 7 Step 2 Visually Inspect the Model.Model Construction Query This activity deals with identifying different feature relationships and design intent. the model may be a simple extrusion. Although detailed instructions are supplied. it may be beneficial to attempt to navigate through the interface without using them. (View toolbar) Orient the view back to trimetric using the Trimetric icon in the View toolbar. As the part is rotated. Step 1 Open pau_arm_1 and start the Modeling application. - Rotate the model (hold down MB2 and drag in graphics window).Model Construction Query Activity 1 . Rotate the model (MB2). - Choose the Shaded icon. Step 3 Inspect the Layers. try to identify different features and the possible methods used to create them. Viewing the layers may help gain an understanding of how complex a model may be.

Choose OK in the Layer Settings dialog box. - Choose the Model Navigator icon from the Navigator toolbar (UNIX) or from the Resource Bar (Windows) and size as required. (Utility toolbar) Toggle ON the Show Category Names options. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 7-9 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 7 . if required to better view - - Make layers 1.Model Construction Query - Choose the Layer Settings icon. Review the listing for category names and object count. 8 objects on a Sketches layer and 3 objects on a Datums layer. 21. Choose the Wireframe icon interior features (View toolbar). Either option should be located vertically on the Right side of the graphics window. Notice that there is 1 object on a Solids layer. and 61 selectable so that the construction aids may be seen. - - Choose the Fit icon in the View toolbar. Step 4 Identify the Different Features using the Model Navigator.

Starting at the top of the Model Navigator feature list. - Choose the Feature Playback icon Feature toolbar. from the Edit Feature Playback Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 7 7-10 Step 5 Review the model construction using Playback.Model Construction Query - Windows ONLY: Choose the tack icon in the upper left hand corner to permanently display the Model Navigator. select the first feature with MB1. The corresponding feature will be highlighted in the graphic window as well as the parent (pau_arm_1) and its children (S21_SKETCH(3)). Continue through all features to see which is which. This will also adjust the graphics window to fit the part within the viewing area.

- Choose the Step icon. The next feature. - Choose the Step icon again. FIXED_DATUM_AXIS(1).Model Construction Query All of the solid features are suppressed except the reference features and the sketch. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 7-11 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 7 . The next feature . this is the base feature of the model. - Continue to Step through until the model has been completely updated. is updated. The Edit during Update dialog box informs you that the FIXED_DATUM_PLANE(0) feature has been updated. You may have to move the slider to read the entire message displayed in the Edit during Update dialog box. FIXED_DATUM_AXIS(2). is updated.

Before unsuppressing the features we will change the listing method back to Timestamp Order. - Starting at the top of the Model Navigator feature list. This will give us a true creation order listing and will show what features where created from first to last. select the checkbox in front of the first feature with MB1 to suppress the feature. - Suppress the two Fixed Datum Axis by selecting the checkboxes to remove the checkmark. except for two fixed datum axes. select MB3 and choose the Quick Look option from the drop-down list. Click MB3 here Notice that all of the features in the list. To get a better idea about direct associativity to features we will change the listing method of the Model Navigator. except for the two fixed datum axis. This is due to all of the other features in the model sharing some sort of associativity with these reference features. branch out under the first feature in the list. The Quick Look option shows the parent/child relationships in a tree structure format. become suppressed.Model Construction Query Step 6 Review the model construction using Suppress/Unsuppress. 7 Note that all of the features in the list. - ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 7-12 Place the cursor over the Feature Name header in the Model Navigator. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

- The expressions p8 and p9 are identified as limits 1 and 2. select MB3 and choose the Timestamp Order option from the drop-down list. by selecting on each of the empty checkboxes with MB1. - In the Model Navigator.25. these expressions control the start and end distances from the generator geometry for the extrusion. Scroll through the Information window to see the various parameters and controlling expressions. Note that the Parent of this feature is the sketch S21:SKETCH (3). Starting at the top of the Model Navigator feature list. select the empty" checkbox in front of the first feature with MB1 to unsuppress the feature. the obvious place to look for the expression that controls the hole to hole distance is in the sketch. Step 8 Identify the Expression that Controls the Distance from the Large Hole Center to the Small Hole Center. place the cursor on WEB_EXTRUSION(4). press MB3 and select Information. one at a time. Since the web feature was generated from the sketch geometry. Continue down the list and unsuppress the remaining features. Step 7 Find the values that control the Thickness of the Web Extrusion.Model Construction Query - Place the cursor over the Feature Name header in the Model Navigator. The values of -.125 produce a web thickness of . - Close the Information window.125 and . - - TIP You can also use the Shift and CTRL keys to select multiple features from the Model Navigator and then use MB3 one any of the selected features to Suppress/Unsuppress them together. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 7-13 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 7 .

Choose Cancel in the Edit Sketch Dimensions dialog box. 7-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .5 - Orient the view back to the Trimetric using the View toolbar. Choose the Model Navigator icon again (UNIX) to - close the Model Navigator or select the tack icon again (Windows) and drag the cursor off the Model Navigator to collapse it. press MB3 and select Edit Parameters. To find the answer to this question. you will select a feature directly from the graphics screen rather than from a list. arm_length=8. Step 9 Close the Model Navigator. which can take more time when trying to identify a specific feature. place the cursor on S21:SKETCH(3). Step 10 Determine how the Large Hole Feature is located. Orient the view to the Front using the View toolbar. Click here and select the Front icon - ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 7 The expression in question can clearly be identified.Model Construction Query - In the Model Navigator.

The p17 expression appears at the arc center of the extrusion and hole. - Choose Tools→Expression. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 7-15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 7 The information window pops up. pan or rotate the part to get a better look at the feature. Select the Large Thru Hole feature in the graphic window and accept it if necessary. It can be seen that p17 is a parallel positioning dimension with a value of 0 (zero).Model Construction Query - Choose Information→Feature. Select the expression. The information window appears and the expression is identified as one used on an object A2 in the S21:SKETCH(3) feature. Step 11 Identify where an expression is used. - Choose the Edit Positioning icon Feature toolbar.25. . Choose MB2. If you don't see the expression. You can zoom. The logical assumption can be made that the hole is located Point to Point relative to the Large Knuckle extrusion. small_dia=1. - Choose the Used by icon. from the Edit - Select LARGE_THRU_HOLE(7) and choose MB2. - Close the Information window. - This finding can be further confirmed by the following actions. - Cancel the Edit Positioning dialog box. rotate the part.

Model Construction Query - Close the Information window and cancel the Expression dialog box. Select S21:SKETCH(3). The expression's associated feature and object has now been identified. Step 12 Measure a distance. . ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 7 - Select Arc A2. Choose Information→Feature. make layer 21 the work 7-16 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Using the Layer Settings icon layer and all other layers invisible. Choose the Object Dependency Browser button. - The child objects of the sketch are listed. notice that A2 is present. The arc is highlighted in the graphic window. - Cancel the Object Dependency Browser dialog box.

625. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 7-17 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 7 . Select the arc here. Select the arc here. The Information window appears and the 3 D and 2 D distances should report a value of 10. Select the arc as shown below. The Quadrant Point is still selected. - Select the other arc as shown below. Step 13 Choose File"Close"All Parts. - Choose the Quadrant Point icon. - Choose the Point Constructor button again. Choose the Point Constructor button.Model Construction Query - Choose Analysis"Distance.

These skills are important because of the need to review part files that have been created by other users. Identified Expressions. Identified where an expression was used. In this lesson. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Measured a distance. Reviewed the model construction using Playback. Reviewed the model construction using Suppress & Unsuppress. you: D D D D D D ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 7-18 Opened the Model Navigator.Model Construction Query SUMMARY 7 In this lesson you were instructed on how to query a model to determine creation method and design intent.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-1 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 Activate the Assemblies application.Introduction to Assemblies Introduction to Assemblies Lesson 8 PURPOSE To introduce the Unigraphics Assembly Modeling application. . you will be able to: D D D D Set your Load Options. Add Components to an assembly. Reposition Components in an assembly. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson.

In the figure below. the toy laser gun is an assembly consisting of many components. The figure below shows the sub assembly of the Integrated Circuit board for the toy laser gun. A sub assembly has components of its own. 8 Sub Assembly A sub assembly is an assembly used as a component within a higher level assembly. It is a collection of pointers to piece parts and/or sub assemblies.Introduction to Assemblies Definitions and Descriptions Assembly An assembly is a part file which contains component objects. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

A component object can also be a sub assembly made up of other component parts and/or component objects. Component Object Component Objects EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 .Introduction to Assemblies Component Objects A component object is the entity that contains the pointer that links the assembly back to the master component part. Shown below are component objects of the sub-assembly. Every piece of the Integrated Circuit board is a separate component object.

by the assembly. Top level assembly component piece part component piece part ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 component piece part component piece part 8-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Sub assembly This is a component part of the top level assembly. not copied. component piece part Component parts of the sub assembly Unigraphics NX .Introduction to Assemblies Component Parts A component part is a part file pointed to by a component object within an assembly. The actual geometry is stored in the component part and is referenced. The term piece part is used to refer to master geometry as it exists outside of an assembly.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 . Edits can be made to the features and expressions residing within the work part. If a component exists several times in the assembly (i. creating sub assemblies and components. Bottom Up Modeling A Bottom Up assembly modeling approach starts by identifying the lowest level piece parts that will make up the assembly. an assembly is created at the top level hierarchy and parts are filed down the hierarchy. a fastener). D D Top Down Modeling Bottom Up Modeling (Demonstrated in this manual) Top Down Modeling As the name suggests. any change to the component while it is the work part will affect all the other occurrences as well. For example. Combining Both Approaches It may be more practical for the methods to be combined.e. Designing in Context The ability to make a component of an assembly the work part while leaving the assembly itself as the displayed part allows the assembly to be designed in context. new subassemblies and piece parts may be defined in a top down mode as the design progresses. and finally existing fasteners may be added in a bottom up mode from a standard parts library. Component parts and sub assemblies are created as the process moves up the assembly level hierarchy. purchased or existing hardware for the assembly may be added using the bottom up method. All new geometry that is created is added to the work part.Introduction to Assemblies General Assembly Concepts There are two basic ways to define an assembly model.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . to reflect changes made to the component parts. component parts are designed separate from the assembly and later added to the assembly.prt 8 All assemblies are automatically updated. This approach applies to purchased parts or existing parts. the pin is created in a separate part file outside the assembly. Then. locator_pin. If hole features are added to the solid in a component part they will be seen in all occurrences of the components in the assembly when it is opened.Introduction to Assemblies Bottom Up Design In the Bottom Up approach. First. when opened. the pin is added to the assembly as a component.

Load Options establish how and from where the system loads the component parts. the system must find and load any component parts that are referenced by that assembly. Where to look for component parts Which components will be loaded Controls whether components are fully or partially loaded Controls what to do if a component is not found EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-7 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 .Introduction to Assemblies Introduction to Load Options When an assembly part file is opened using File→Open. The Load Options dialog box is accessed by choosing File→Options→Load Options.

Partially Loaded When a part is partially loaded. All components can be fully loaded by changing the Load Components option to All Components and toggling Use Partial Loading to off before opening the assembly. D D Load States The Load Options also controls whether component parts will be fully loaded. This is beneficial when working with large assemblies. D The As Saved method looks for each component part in the same directory it was in when the assembly was last saved.Introduction to Assemblies Load Method The Load Method determines where the system will search for the component parts when an assembly is opened. The Search Directories method looks for each component in directories specified in a user defined list. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 8-8 Fully Loaded A part is fully loaded if all of its data is loaded into system memory. or unloaded when an assembly is opened. Components will be partially loaded if Partial Loading is toggled on when the assembly is opened. partially loaded. the system pulls only the data required to display the part into memory. These are referred to as load states. The From Directory method looks for each component in the same directory as the assembly part. There are three possible settings. Partially loading components reduces the memory requirements and improves performance. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

The first component it is unable to find will be listed in an Open Error window. When toggled Off.Introduction to Assemblies Unloaded A component part is unloaded if it is not loaded when the assembly is opened. Component parts may be refrained from loading by changing the Load Components option to No Components before opening the assembly. Those components that are not found will be listed in an Open Warning window and left unloaded. D When toggled On. the system will open the assembly and load any of the components that it can find. This will drastically reduce the amount of memory required and improve system performance but no component geometry will be seen. Load Failure The Abort Load on Failure option controls how the system behaves if a component part is not found based on the current load method. the system will not load any parts unless all of the components are found. D EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 . Individual components or subassemblies may be opened as desired to work on them using File→Open.

This toolbar/menu contains most of the functions that affect the hierarchical structure of the assembly and the relationships between components. The Assemblies toolbar and the Components Pull Down menu will be available as long as the Assemblies application is turned ON. 1 3 4 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 2 or 1 2 8-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Introduction to Assemblies Component Editing A component part may be added to an assembly by choosing the Add Existing Component icon from the Assemblies toolbar or the Add Existing button in the Components Pull Down menu under Assemblies. Turn ON the Assemblies application to access the Assemblies toolbar or the Components Pull Down menu.

Select an existing component in the graphics window. Select a previously loaded part from the list.Introduction to Assemblies The component part to add is specified in the Select Part dialog box. Select an existing component in the Assembly Navigator display. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 . Enter the name of a previously loaded part. There are several ways to identify the part in this dialog box: D D D D D Select the Choose Part File button to retrieve an unopened part.

the only change from defaults will be the placement of the part on the Original layers. Assemblies_ModelReferenceSet: BODY Layer Options . D D D Work . D D Default reference sets are. Original .Introduction to Assemblies After the part is identified.Places all objects from the component on the layer specified in the Specified Layer entry field. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 8-12 Reference Set Allows you to control the amount of data that is loaded from each component and viewed in the context of an assembly. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . NOTE: In order for a BODY" reference set to be created automatically the following line must be set in the ug_english. the Add Existing Part dialog box appears so that it may be established how the existing part will be added as a component object to the assembly and what information is stored with it.def environment files.Defines which layer the objects in the new component will be added to in the current work part.Places each object from the component part on the same layer in which it resides in the component part file. Reference sets may be manually created or automatically created. Empty and Entire Part. At this time.Places all objects from the component part on the current work layer. As Specified .def and ug_mectric.

(this will not be covered in this manual) Selection Toolbar The selection toolbar may be used anytime the selection of a component for modification or the extraction of data is required. The Displayed Part can be changed by: D D D D Using the Selection toolbar and the Select Components option. Using the Assembly Navigator pop-up menu. which contains up to the last ten loaded parts for selection to be the displayed part. The part file.Introduction to Assemblies The Displayed Part Unigraphics allows multiple part files to be open at the same time either implicitly as a result of being referenced by a loaded assembly or explicitly through the use of File→Open. Choosing Window→More Parts (Change Displayed Part dialog box) Choosing the Window Loaded Part List. whether it be an assembly or component. that is currently displayed in the graphics window. This lesson will focus on the use of the Select Components option. the Type Filter may be used to narrow the band of selectable objects. is called the Displayed Part. Select Components Depending on which category the user has selected. Components EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 . This method of editing uses an Object/Action approach. where the object needing editing is selected first from the graphic window and then the necessary action is defined.

Introduction to Assemblies The remaining options of the toolbar may be used to further discriminate in the selection of objects. NOTE: When depressing MB3 the cursor must be on top of the selected object for the pop-up dialog to appear. mouse button 3 (MB3) may be used to select an available operator for that object. Reset All icons not shown Select All Deselect All Up One Level Once an object has been selected from the graphic window. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 8-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Introduction to Assemblies Window Choosing Window→More Parts will activate the Change Displayed Part dialog box. When this dialog box is active. listing all loaded parts except the one currently displayed. Entering the name in the Part Name entry field. a part may be selected by: D D D Choosing it from the list of loaded parts. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-15 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 . Selecting geometry from the graphics area (if the current displayed part is an assembly).

The Work Part may be the displayed part or any component part which is contained in the displayed assembly part. In a case where the displayed part is not the work part.Introduction to Assemblies The Work Part The part in which geometry is created and edited is termed the Work Part. D D Choosing Assemblies→Context Control→Set Work Part. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . the reference set is returned to its original condition. Selection Toolbar Select Components Once an object has been selected from the graphic window. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 8-16 D NOTE: When a component is made the work part. When the component is no longer the work part. Using the Assembly Navigator pop up menu. the component's reference set is changed to Entire Part. (not covered in this manual). it will initially be both the displayed and the work part. The displayed part and the work part do not need to be the same. The Work Part can be changed by: D Using the Selection toolbar and the Select Components option. When a part file is opened. Choosing the Make Work Part icon on the Assemblies tool bar. mouse button 3 (MB3) may be used to select an available operator for that object. the work part will be displayed in color and the other component parts will be de emphasized.

will activate the Set Work Part EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-17 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 .Introduction to Assemblies NOTE: When depressing MB3 the cursor must be on top of the selected object for the pop-up dialog to appear. Make Work Part icon Choosing the Make Work Part icon dialog box.

a part may be identified by: D D D Choosing it from the list of loaded parts.Introduction to Assemblies When this dialog is active. Repositioning Components To access the Reposition Components dialog. Choosing the Displayed Part button changes the work part back to the whole assembly. The Reposition Components dialog can be accessed by: D D Choosing Reposition Component icon on the Assemblies tool bar. Entering the part name in the Part Name entry field. the Assemblies application must first be turned ON. Selecting geometry from the graphics screen. This makes the displayed part and the work part the same. Choosing Assemblies→Components→Reposition Component. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 8-18 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Rotate About A Line Rotate About A Point Rotate Between Two Axes Translate Point to Point Reposition Rotation Handle Vertex Handle Axis Handle Dynamic Repositioning Coordinate System Component objects may be repositioned by using the six options at the top of the dialog window or interactively dragged using the dynamic coordinate system.Introduction to Assemblies After Reposition Component is chosen and a component object is selected the repositioning dialog appears and a dynamic repositioning coordinate system appears in the graphic window. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-19 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 .

it may be dragged along an axis of the coordinate system by selecting on one of the axis handles. simply by placing the cursor any where in the graphic window and holding MB1 down. rotate the part using your spaceball or MB3 Rotate (F7). The Snap Increment option may be toggled off and on as desired. To move the component in the third dimension. If one of the coordinate system's axis or rotation handles is currently selected.Introduction to Assemblies Dragging Components Objects Component objects may be dragged three different ways: D D D Left Right Up Down Along an Axis of the coordinate system Rotated about an axis of the coordinate system. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . it may be dragged left or right and up or down. you must first select the vertex handle to deselect the other handles. exit the rotation mode and continue to drag the object. Dragging along an axis of the coordinate system After a component object has been selected. while the object is selected. In addition the Distance and Snap Increment text fields become active. which causes the object to snap to the incremental value as the object is dragged along the axis. The Snap Increment value acts as a detent. Axis Handle Distance field Snap Increment field ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 8-20 Snap Increment toggle Keying in a positive or negative value in the distance text field and pressing return will cause the object to be moved that distance value along the selected axis. Left Right Up Down After the component object has been selected.

The Snap Increment value acts as a detent. which causes the object to snap to the incremental value as the object is dragged about the axis. The orientation of the translated component with respect to the second point will be identical to that of the original component with respect to the first point. . In addition the Angle and Snap Increment text fields become active. Second Point (arc center) First Point (arc center) EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-21 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 Keying in a positive or negative value in the angle text field and pressing return will cause the object to be rotated that value about the respective axis. The Snap Increment option may be toggled off and on as desired.Introduction to Assemblies Rotation about an axis of the coordinate system After a component object has been selected. Rotation Handle Angle field Snap Increment field Snap Increment toggle Point to Point Point to Point allows a component to be translated by indicating a first point and a second point. it may be dragged about an axis of the coordinate system by selecting on one of the rotation handles.

A positive rotation direction is counterclockwise. Rotate About a Point 8 This option may be used to rotate components about a vector parallel to the ZC axis and passing through a specified reference point. Translated components maintain the original orientation relative to other parts. as shown below.Introduction to Assemblies Translate Translate provides a means to move a component a delta value with respect to the reposition coordinate system. Component being repositioned Axis of Rotation ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8-22 Reference Point ZC YC XC Angle = 90 degrees ZC YC XC Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Choose Apply. A positive rotation direction is counterclockwise relative to the defined vector.Introduction to Assemblies Rotate About a Line This option allows components to be rotated about a defined vector which is not necessarily parallel to the ZC axis. Define the vector using the Vector constructor. Key in the desired value of rotation. Component being repositioned Defined vector Axis of Rotation Angle=90 degrees EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-23 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 . To use this method: D D D D Define a point that the vector is to pass through.

any modified component parts below it are also saved. The File→Save option allows the saving of the work part without saving all of the parts in the displayed assembly. If the work part is an assembly or subassembly. only that part will be saved. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 8-24 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . the work part must be saved to keep the modifications.Introduction to Assemblies Saving the Work Part After editing. D If the work part is a piece part (lowest level component). D TIP TIP Open files for which the user does not have write privilege may not be saved. File"Save All saves all loaded parts in the session that have been modified regardless of the work part designation. Higher level assemblies will not be saved even if they were modified.

Save the part as ***_test_assm_1 where *** represent your initials. The Load Options must be set properly before loading the assembly. Choose the Open icon.Introduction to Assemblies Activity 1 . Ensure Use Partial Loading is turned ON. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-25 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 . open the part pau_test_assm_1. Step 1 Set the Load Options. Choose OK.Adding and Repositioning a Component In this activity components will be added to an assembly. Ensure Load Method is set to From Directory. - Choose File→Options→Load Options. - - - Choose the Modeling icon. These components will then be repositioned to the proper locations. From the laser_gun subdirectory. Step 2 Open the test stand assembly.

Introduction to Assemblies - Choose the Assemblies icon. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Fit the view. Choose BODY from the Reference Set pull down and choose OK. From the laser_gun subdirectory. Step 3 Add the test stand to the assembly. The test stand is the part that the circuit board fits in for assembly and circuitry testing. select pau_mounting_block. Choose Reset and OK. from the - - - - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 8-26 - The illustration below shows how the mounting block is to be oriented to the circuit board. The next step will direct you through the repositioning of the mounting block. Choose Choose Part File. Choose the Add Existing Components icon Assemblies toolbar. Choose Cancel in the Select Part dialog box.

Select this rotation handle. - Change the Snap Increment to 15. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-27 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 . Select the rotation handle shown below. Ensure that Snap Increment is toggled ON. - Choose the Point to Point icon.Introduction to Assemblies Step 4 Reposition the mounting block. Drag the selected rotation handle with MB1 until the angle text field indicates -90. - Choose the Reposition Component icon. Select the mounting block and choose MB2.

Introduction to Assemblies - Select the first and second points as directed by the CUE line and shown below. - Choose OK. Second point ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 8-28 First point The mounting block moves to the new position. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Choose the Add Existing Component icon.Introduction to Assemblies Step 5 Add a new component to the subassembly. - In the graphic window. - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-29 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 . Choose Make Work Part from the Pop-Up menu. (Verify the component name in the Status line) Select here - Place the cursor over the component and select MB3. - Choose OK to acknowledge the Read Only warning. select the pau_ic_board_13 as shown below and confirm if necessary.

Introduction to Assemblies - Choose Choose Part File. followed by OK to locate the part at Zero. - - Fit the view. Select the part pau_c2_13 and choose MB2. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 - Newly added component. Press Reset in the Point Constructor dialog box. Choose BODY from the Reference Set pull down and choose OK. Choose the Point to Point icon. Change the Positioning method to Reposition. 8-30 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Choose the Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center icon.

The system now prompts you to perform a save as on the top level assembly. - Choose OK. Choose Cancel. - Choose File→Save As. Step 6 Save the subassembly. Select this arc center as the Second point Select this arc center as the First point The component moves to the new position.Introduction to Assemblies - Reposition the component as shown below. so this step is not necessary. In your home directory save the circuit board assembly by keying in ***_ic_board_13 and choose OK. It may be necessary to rotate and zoom in on the view so that the proper arc centers are selected (Remember: Holding down MB2 and dragging the cursor on the graphic window rotates the view). You already own this part file. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-31 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 . Since you do not presently have write access to the subassembly you will perform a save as on it.

Choose the Make Work Part icon toolbar. - Choose OK to accept the warning. Choose File→Close→All Parts. Choose OK to acknowledge the Save As Report. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 8-32 - Choose File→Close→Save All and Close. Your assembly file is saved in your home directory while the component parts are stored in the course parts directory. A warning message appears. Close the Information window. Currently the load options are set to look for the component parts in the same directory as the assembly part file. Choose OK to continue the Save As. Step 7 Make the Work Part the Displayed Part. Step 9 Reopen the saved assembly. from the Assemblies - - Step 8 Save and close the assembly. Choose Displayed Part.Introduction to Assemblies - Choose Cancel. Choose OK to confirm the close. Choose OK. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Choose File→Recently Opened Parts→***_test_assm_1. This step will demonstrate the importance of Load Options.

- Choose File→Options→Load Options. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-33 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 . - Choose File→Recently Opened Parts→***_test_assm_1. Step 12 Choose File"Close"All Parts. Step 11 Reopen the saved assembly. Choose OK. Toggle the As Saved option ON. This time all of the components are opened.Introduction to Assemblies Step 10 Set the Load Options.

Set your Load Options. Assemblies may be created using the Top Down. It is a collection of pointers to piece parts and/or sub assemblies. Added and repositioned a component in an assembly. Assemblies provides the ability to design in context. In this lesson you: D D D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 8-34 Activated the Assemblies application. or a combination of the two methods. Bottom Up.Introduction to Assemblies SUMMARY An assembly is a part file which contains component objects. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 9-1 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 9 . you will be able to: D D Review an existing Master Model.The Master Model The Master Model Lesson 9 PURPOSE To introduce the Master Model concept. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson. Create a new Master Model.

Therefore. The Master Model Concept Applying the Master Model Concept in a Drafting situation is simply the creation of an assembly consisting of one component part.The Master Model The Assembly Modeler The Unigraphics assembly is a file containing stored links to the part files that are pieces of the assembly. The Master Model Concept is also valuable in protecting the design intent of the part from inadvertent corruption by a downstream user. edits to the master model will be updated in the non-master part file. and its relationship to other parts. Implementing Master Model theory allows diverse yet dependent design processes to access the same master geometry during development. etc. degree of display. The geometry that defines the piece parts of the assembly resides in the original part file only. permissions. It is valuable as a means of promoting concurrent engineering. The solid model is referenced for the application work. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 9 9-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . analysis. but the downstream user will not have the ability to change it. origin. but only read privileges to the model. The person responsible for the design of a part is not the same person responsible for all of the downstream applications performed on the part. there is no duplication in the assembly file. orientation. These downstream applications may include drafting. Because the application information in the assembly or non-master file is referencing the original master model part. manufacturing. The downstream user will have write privileges to the assembly file. A component object stores information about the piece part such as its location. the entire part creation process becomes more efficient allowing many disciplines to work at the same time and allowing master model edits to be automatically updated in non-master parts. attributes. A link in the assembly file is referred to as a component object.

the other applications will automatically update with minimal or no associativity loss. Drafting Assembly Master Model Analysis N/C Each application uses a separate assembly file. The design intent of the various design applications can be maintained through protection of the Master Model. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 9-3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 9 . When the Master Model is revised.The Master Model The power of implementing a Master Model is that the independent design processes are dependent on the same master geometry during development.

EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . define machining operations.The Master Model Master Model Example Manufacturing engineers have the need to design fixture devices. and designate cutter tools and save this data in their models.prt ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 9 9-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual Contains master model geometry The manufacturing engineer has ownership of the assembly file without necessarily having write access to the master model which is owned by the designer. By creating a manufacturing assembly" and adding a component to it. they can then generate their application specific geometry or data in a separate part file which references the master geometry: D D This avoids duplication of model geometry Different users can work in separate files simultaneously (owned by manufacturing engineer) abcd1234_mfg.prt Contains manufacturing data and a component object which references master model part (owned by designer) abcd1234.

intersection symbols (INSERT→UTILITY SYMBOL) 14. typically top or front (DRAWING→ADD VIEW→IMPORT VIEW) 9. detail. Start the Assemblies application (APPLICATION→ASSEMBLIES) 3. Adjust the paper. section. title block. Adjust the View Display Preferences. move. FILE→SAVE AS. centerlines. orthographic. Add the drawing formats. Change to the Drafting Application (APPLICATION→DRAFTING) 5. labels. edit entire object. name. section backgrounds. Add more views. target symbols. border. Add the notes. Adjust the views. erase object. edit object segment (EDIT→VIEW DEPENDENT EDIT) 13. per view (PREFERENCES→VIEW DISPLAY) 12. standard notes (Site dependent) 7. revision block. projection angle (DRAWING→EDIT) 6. size. Add the part to be detailed as a component (ASSEMBLIES→COMPONENTS→ADD EXISTING) 4. hidden line removal. and GD&T's (INSERT→ANNOTATION) D D D D D D D D EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 9-5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 9 . auxiliary. align. isometric. Add the dimensions (INSERT→DIMENSION) 15. threads (PREFERENCES→VIEW DISPLAY) 8. Add the first 'Imported' view.The Master Model Master Model Drawing Guidelines D D D D D D D 1. xxxxxxx_dwg) 2. exploded (DRAWING→ADD VIEW→ORTHOGRAPHIC VIEW) 10. remove (DRAWING→EDIT VIEW) 11. units. Clean up individual views with view dependent edits. scale. Add the Utility Symbols. Set View Display Preferences. Create the 'drawing' file (Open seedpart_mm or seedpart_in.

Step 3 Choose Drafting.88 and the corner radius of . - Zoom in on section view A-A and note the slot width of .12. Step 4 Inspect the drawing for dimensional values. Step 2 Open the part file pau_tapedisp_dwg.The Master Model Activity 1 .Exploring a Master Model Assembly This activity will demonstrate the advantages of a Master Model Assembly. Step 1 Choose File"Options"Load Options and ensure that the Load Method is From Directory. Slot Width ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 9 9-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual Corner Radius EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Make sure that you are selecting pau_tapedisp_dwg. Both dimensions have been rounded from the model dimensions to two decimal places.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 9-7 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 9 . This part contains the Master Model definition. SH1. - Choose Modeling. Choose Assemblies→Reports→List Components. - Close the information window. Choose Information→Feature and note that there are no features. Step 5 Investigate the model. Choose Tools→Expression and note that there are no expressions.The Master Model - Restore the view and note the drawing name. - - An information window appears showing the assembly file structure for the file pau_tapedisp_dwg and indicates that there is one component named pau_tapedisp. at the lower left corner.

.. When the cursor changes to the cross with the ellipsis (+. - An information window appears with information regarding the solid. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Choose pau_tapedisp from the list box.) select once. and confirmation that it is a component. then select it. Place the cursor over the solid body.The Master Model Step 6 Examine the display. Choose OK. - Choose Information→Object. - Dismiss the information window. its owning part. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 9 9-8 Step 7 Retrieve the Master Model file. Pass the cursor over the numbers in the QuickPick window until the solid body is highlighted.75 - Choose Tools→Expression. Step 8 Edit the expression for Roll_width to . - Choose Open.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 9-9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 9 . - Replace the .The Master Model - Select the Roll_width expression. The opening for the tape roll changes in width to accommodate the modified dimension. - Choose Edit→Feature→Parameters.75 and choose OK. Step 9 Edit the blend on the inside of the spool cavity.875 value with .

The Master Model - Select the Blend(21) feature at the bottom of the list. Confirm the selection with OK. - Choose Window→pau_tapedisp_dwg to change the Displayed Part. Notice the drawing name now shows (OUT-OF-DATE) to remind you the views are not updated. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 9 9-10 Step 10 Change Displayed Part to pau_tapedisp_dwg. key in a new value of . Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Choose OK. - Choose OK. - In the Radius Dynamic Input Field. - Choose Drafting.06.

Choose All in the Update Views dialog box and choose OK. Step 12 Zoom in on section A-A again to see the changes to the master model reflected on the drawing Slot Width Corner Radius Step 13 Choose File"Close"All Parts. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 9-11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 9 . - Choose Drawing→Update Views.The Master Model Step 11 Update the drawing.

Step 3 Add the part pau_dwg_1 to the discipline specific assembly file. Choose pau_dwg_1 from the parts directory.The Master Model Activity 2 . Step 1 Open the part file pau_seedpart_in. Choose BODY from the Reference Set pull down and choose OK. then OK. 9-12 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Press Reset in the Point Constructor dialog box. Choose the Add Existing Component icon. if it is not on). followed by OK to locate the part at Zero.Creating a Master Model Assembly This activity will demonstrate creation of a Master Model Assembly. Step 2 Save the part as ***_dwg_1 where *** represent your initials. Choose the Choose Part File button. - - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 9 Step 4 Choose Save. - Check to see the Assemblies application is toggled on (Choose Application→Assemblies. Change the Positioning option to Absolute. Step 5 Choose File"Close"All Parts.

Users can access whatever they want. If these two files were read protected by different departments. distinct responsibilities would be enforced by the protection and yet all of the appropriate model data is shared by each of the departments concerned.The Master Model SUMMARY This Master Model approach offers many benefits to Unigraphics customers. whenever they want with full confidence that no data or revision work can be lost without active confirmation by the users. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 9-13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 9 .

The Master Model (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 9 9-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Create Annotations. Create Dimensions.Introduction to Drafting Introduction to Drafting Lesson 10 PURPOSE This lesson will introduce the fundamentals of the Unigraphics Drafting application. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-1 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 . Create Utility Symbols. you will be able to: D D D D D D Edit drawings. Add Views to Drawings. Modify Preferences.

Fully associative view boundaries automatically calculated when the drawing is updated. In this mode objects are displayed in the color that they appear in the modeling application and the background is the color set by the Preferences"Visualization"Color Pallet"Edit Background dialog. Every view is fully associated with the solid. Drafting annotations are fully associative to the geometry selected and will update automatically to changes in the solid part. Show Widths may also be set here but only applies to drawings. When Monochrome Display is toggled off. Drafting annotations (dimensions. D D D D D Drawing Display Drawings may be displayed two different ways. If the solid is updated. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . As orthographic views are added. labels. The foreground and background colors may be set in this dialog. Monochrome Display provides a means for a drawing to appear more like an actual drawing (black-on-white). they will automatically be aligned with the parent view. Monochrome is toggle on or off by choosing Preferences"Visualization"Color Pallet"Color Settings and then toggling Monochrome Display. and symbols with leaders) are placed directly on the drawing. drawings will be displayed in full color. Full color is the default setting. Some of the features of the Drafting application are: D Views may be added to the drawing just by indicating their location with the cursor.Introduction to Drafting Uses of the Drafting Application The Drafting application can be used to rapidly create drawings of solid parts. the views will also update. full color or monochrome.

or projection angle. scale. units of measure. size. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 .Introduction to Drafting Editing a Drawing The Drawing"Edit option may be chosen to change the creation parameters of a current drawing such as name.

Introduction to Drafting The current state of the displayed drawing affects the edit options available. D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . if the drawing is edited to a size so small that a view falls entirely outside the boundary of the drawing. an error message will appear. However. The following are things to be aware of: D The projection angle can only be changed if no projected views exist on the current drawing being modified. The drawing may be edited to a larger or smaller size.

size and scale will be modified.Introduction to Drafting Activity 1 . Step 1 Open the file pau_edit_1. the current drawing name. Step 3 Choose Drawing"Open and select 93A12345-5 from the listing as the drawing to open and choose OK.Editing a Drawing In this activity. Step 2 Choose Drafting. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 .

Choose Apply and notice the drawing name update in the graphics area. Choose Apply and notice the drawing size update. Length= 1100. - Change the drawing name in the Selection text field to 93A12345 6. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Introduction to Drafting Step 4 Rename the current drawing. 10 - Change the values so that Height= 594. - Choose Drawing"Edit. - Step 5 Change the current drawing size.

the part file must be saved. layer settings. It also establishes the part orientation on the drawing. - Enter a new drawing scale in the text fields (1/1) and choose OK. Once this view is added to the drawing. 93A12345–6 (DWG) WORK Multiple drawing edits may be performed before choosing Apply or OK. Step 7 Choose File"Close"All Parts. it determines scale. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-7 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 . Adding a View to a Drawing The first view added is based on the view orientation selected from the list box in the upper portion of the Add View dialog.Introduction to Drafting Step 6 Change the current drawing scale. as well as the orthographic space and alignment of subsequent orthographic views. NOTE: In order to save the drawing information or edits.

View direction ZC YC XC Choosing Drawing"Add View displays the following dialog.Introduction to Drafting Any modeling view may be used as the first view placed on a drawing. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Introduction to Drafting View Type Icons View Creation Steps Viewpoint Selection List View Specific Options EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 .

Once a view is removed from a drawing. this option automatically creates linear.Introduction to Drafting Create Centerline When toggled ON. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Removing Views From a Drawing You can use the Drawing"Remove View option to remove one or more views from a drawing. all drafting objects or view modifications associated to that view are deleted. cylindrical. and bolt circle centerlines (with a circular instance set) for views where the hole or pin axis is perpendicular or parallel to the plane of the drawing view.

- Choose Add View to Drawing. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 . Any one of the listed viewpoints could be imported as the first view on the face of the drawing. The Top viewpoint is the default view orientation.Adding a View to a Drawing In this activity. - Choose File→Options→Load Options and select As Saved. a view will be added to the drawing previously created. Open the part ***_dwg_1 or open pau_drawing_1_assm and save as ***_drawing_1_assm. - Ensure that the Create Center Line option is toggled On. Step 1 Add a view to the drawing.Introduction to Drafting Activity 2 . select B" size drawing. Choose OK. - Choose Drafting. Choose Drawing→Edit.

- Choose the Orthographic View Icon. Notice the creation of the centerline. then specify a new view center. View View Center View bounds are ghosted to assist in view placement DWG1 (DWG) WORK If there is a need to reposition the view after placement. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-12 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Step 2 Place an orthographic View on the Drawing.Introduction to Drafting - Use the first mouse button to indicate a location near the lower left corner of the drawing as shown. choose the Move button from the dialog box. This flexibility assures that the drawing views necessary to depict the part may be placed on the drawing independent of the orientation of the part in model space. Note that the Top viewpoint of the part as it relates to model space is being placed on the drawing such that it depicts an orthographic front view of the part.

The location of the cursor relative to the base view determines the Orthographic view projection from the parent view. View bounds are ghosted to assist in view placement Orthographic View Parent View DWG1 (DWG) WORK - Use the first mouse button to indicate a location above the parent view. do not close the part.Introduction to Drafting - Select the imported view as the parent view. Step 3 Choose File"Save. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 .

silhouettes. smooth edges. etc. View Selection Box View Option Buttons Button Specific Options Global View Options ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The View Display dialog box may be used to define and edit the display of such things as hidden lines.Introduction to Drafting Setting the View Display Preferences Choosing Preferences"View Display produces the View Display dialog box..

and Width option menus. Button Specific Options The Button Specific Options area of the dialog box varies to support the different View Option Buttons available. or choose the view(s) from the selection box. Hidden Lines=Dashed Hidden Lines=Invisible EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-15 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 . Hidden Line removal is not performed and all hidden lines in the view will appear. font and width of the hidden line display is determined by the settings in the Color. View Option Buttons Hidden Lines If the Hidden Line option is toggled Off. To edit the View Display preferences of an existing view. If the Hidden Line option is toggled On. When each View Option Button is selected the appropriate choices for the option are displayed in this area. the color. or this dialog box may be used to edit the settings of existing drawing views. Font.Introduction to Drafting The View Display dialog box may be used to preset preferences for subsequent views added to the drawing. select the view(s) from the drawing.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-16 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Font and Width option menus may be used to determine the appearance of the smooth edges. Font. and Width option menus.Introduction to Drafting Smooth Edges Smooth edges are those edges that their adjacent faces have the same surface tangent at the edge where they meet. the Color. If the Smooth Edges option is toggled to the On position. The End Gaps option may be used to vary the edge intersection appearance. Smooth Edges=On Smooth Edges=Off Smooth Edges=Dashed Visible Lines The appearance of visible objects may be determined by using the Color.

Edges are extracted at the component level and remain associative to the component. smooth edges. These views always automatically update after the model is changed. where the display of smooth edges may cause confusion. the Color. This option does not affect section views. Virtual Intersections Extracted Edges The Extracted Edges option allows the edges of an assembly to be shown without loading all of the component parts. NOTE: If the Preferences"Drafting"Suppress View Update option is turned On. and silhouettes are updated after changes are made to the model. If Automatic Update is turned on. hidden lines. If Automatic Update is toggled off. these edges are not updated. or detail views made from section views. no automatic update will occur during the return to the Drafting application. The End Gaps option may be used to vary the edge intersection appearance. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-17 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 . If the Virtual Intersections option is toggled to the On position. Font and Width option menus may be used to determine the appearance of the virtual intersection display. Automatic Update The Automatic Update option may be used to control whether a drawing view is updated after the model has been changed.Introduction to Drafting Virtual Intersections Virtual Intersections are the theoretical sharp intersections that occur where blended faces would intersect.

Set the Hidden Line Font to Dashed. - - Step 3 Save and close the part file. toggle the Smooth Edges option off. whichever is applicable. you will practice setting the view display preferences. Step 1 Continue using the part ***_dwg_1 or ***_drawing_1_assm. Select the imported view. With the Smooth Edges View Option Button depressed.Setting View Display Preferences In this activity. Step 2 Change the view display preferences for the imported view added to the drawing. - Choose Preferences→View Display. make sure Hidden Line is toggled on. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-18 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . With the Hidden Lines View Option Button depressed.Introduction to Drafting Activity 3 . Choose OK.

Introduction to Drafting Creating Utility Symbols The Utility Symbols option creates various centerlines. These parameters may also be used to modify existing drafting symbols. target points. Symbol Icons Point Position Options Symbol Display Parameters Preference Options EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-19 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 . symbol display parameters and preference options. Symbol Display Parameters control the creation of each utility symbol as it is placed. The utility symbol dialog is activated by choosing Insert→Utility Symbol in the Drafting application. and intersection symbols. The Utility Symbols dialog box consists of four distinct areas: symbol icons. offset center points. position options.

The system will automatically size the symbol components to the objects used to create it. then a linear centerline is created for each hole. The symbols may be selected at any position. The following views are not supported: D D D Faceted representation view Unfolded section view Revolved section view Associativity of Utility Symbols A utility symbol's placement is controlled by a position on an object. based upon the symbol display parameters.Introduction to Drafting Automatic Centerline This option automatically creates centerlines in any existing view(s) where the hole or pin axis is perpendicular or parallel to the plane of the drawing view. Deleting a Utility Symbol A utility symbol may be deleted by choosing Edit→Delete and selecting the symbol to delete. If a series of holes in a circle (bolt hole circle) are not a circular instance set. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-20 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

5M-1994 standards may be created through points. D EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-21 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 . arcs. The following associativity rules apply to cylindrical centerlines: D D A cylindrical centerline must be associated to two point positions. If one of the objects to which a cylindrical centerline is associated is deleted. or cylindrical faces. A cylindrical centerline is updated when the data to which it is associated is moved or re sized. the centerline will conform to the Retain Annotations setting setting found under Preferences→Drafting.Introduction to Drafting Creating a Cylindrical Centerline A cylindrical centerline that conforms to ASME Y14. The point position options allow a centerline associated to objects other than cylinders to be created.

- Choose Drafting. Step 1 Open the part pau_symbols_1. Choose Insert→Utility Symbol - Select the Cylindrical Centerline icon. cylindrical centerlines will be created using both the arc center and cylindrical face options.Introduction to Drafting Activity 4 . - Set the Point Position option to Arc Center. Step 3 Create a Cylindrical Centerline symbol.Creating a Cylindrical Centerline In this activity. Step 2 Rename the part ***_symbols_1 where *** represent your initials. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-22 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Select this pair of edges. for placement of a single centerline symbol. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-23 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 . Select this pair of edges. confirming your selections if needed. Select this pair of edges. indicated below. Repeat for the other two pairs of positions.Introduction to Drafting - Select two positions.

Step 4 Create a centerline symbol using the Cylindrical Face option.Introduction to Drafting The resulting cylindrical centerlines are shown. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-24 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Continue using the Cylindrical Centerline icon. Change the Point Position option to Cylindrical Face.

- Toggle Multiple Centerlines to On. or outside face first. as well as in the adjacent view. - Indicate end points 1 and 2 of the cylindrical centerline. using cursor locations as shown. as the system will select the main. This time. 1* *2 Step 5 Repeat the procedure for the two counterbored holes in the orthographic view. This face will highlight in the view that the face was selected. the face selection will need to be confirmed. and two drafting points are created that are associated to the selected face. The indicated end points are projected to the axis of the cylindrical face.Introduction to Drafting - Place the cursor over the cylindrical face as shown and select the face using the first mouse button. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-25 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 .

1* *2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-26 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Select this face - Indicate end points 1 and 2 of the cylindrical centerline.Introduction to Drafting - Use the numbers from the QuickPick window to select the inner cylindrical face. using cursor locations as shown.

Introduction to Drafting - Make a similar centerline through the lower counterbored hole by selecting the counter bored face shown below. . Select this face Notice how you did not have to select the endpoints for this centerline. this is because Multiple Centerlines was turned on. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-27 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 Step 6 Create Automatic Centerlines. The completed centerlines are shown below. - Choose File"Close"Reopen Selected Parts.

- Choose Automatic Centerline. Dismiss the Information window. - Step 7 Choose File"Save. Choose Insert"Utility Symbol. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-28 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Choose OK twice.Introduction to Drafting - Choose ***_symbols_1. Hold the Ctrl key down and select the following views from the list: FRONT@16 ORTHO@26 RIGHT@10 SX@25 Choose Apply. do not close the part.

One way is by choosing Insert→Dimension and then selecting the desired dimension. The other way is by choosing the dimension from the customizable Dimension toolbar.Introduction to Drafting Creating Dimensions The various dimensions types may be accessed two different ways. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-29 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 .

Introduction to Drafting Dimension Dialog Whenever a dimension type is selected a dimension dialog specific to that type of dimension is displayed. Second selection Fold Location Name of dimension type First selection Origin Line and point type definitions for Cylindrical dimensions Point type Vector definitions for Angular dimensions Annotation editor for appended text Local Preferences ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-30 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

The various options provide a means of defining the vectors Existing Line Two Points Extension Line Arc Center Enter Angle Horizontal Right Vertical Up Horizontal Left Vertical Down EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-31 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 .Introduction to Drafting Vector Definition for Angular Dimensions The Vector Definitions options are only available when creating an angular dimension. An angle dimension is the measurement between two vectors.

The various options provide a means of defining the lines or points that the dimension measures.Introduction to Drafting Line and Point Definition for Cylindrical Dimensions These options are only available when creating a cylindrical dimension. Existing Line Inferred Point Control Point Intersection Point Arc Center Tangent Point Baseline ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-32 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Local Preferences EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-33 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 .Introduction to Drafting Dimension Local Preferences The Dimensions dialog box contains options that control the display and placement of dimensions. These local preference settings may be changed with each dimension created.

Before D After Above Below ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-34 Enter the desired text for the different positions as required and choose OK. In the annotation editor select the required position button. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Annotation Editor To create appended text: D D D Select the desired dimension type. One or all four positions may be used on the same dimension. Choose the Annotation Editor button.Introduction to Drafting Appended Text Controls Text or symbols may be added to dimensions via the Annotation Editor and toggling on Use Appended Text.

D D Toggle Use Appended Text on.2 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-35 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 . select the position button and delete the text. This pull down is active when using dual dimensions. Any text entered in the appended text fields will continue to be added to any new dimensions created unless the Use Appended Text option is toggled off. that is an indicator that text is present and will be displayed in the dimension.XXX R 2. If the dimension display format is set to fractional values (instead of decimal values) then the Dimension Precision dialog box will show fractional values for the nominal precision option. If that text is not desired.Introduction to Drafting NOTE: If the position arrow displays solid. Dimension the object.195 Example: X.X R 2. OR For decimal precision For fractional precision Example: X. Precision Options The Precision button activates the Dimension Precision dialog box which is used to independently control the precision of both dimension values and tolerance values. Both single (Primary) and dual (Secondary) dimensional precision is supported.

1 Line -Limit. 1 Line Basic Reference Diameter Reference Not to Scale ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-36 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Click here Bilateral Unilateral+ UnilateralBilateral No tolerance +Limit.Introduction to Drafting Tolerance Type and Tolerance Value Options The display of tolerance values may be controlled using the Tolerance Types shown below. 2 Lines Tolerance Types -Limit. 2 Lines +Limit.

Tolerance Values EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-37 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 . Use the Tolerance Value fields to enter upper and lower tolerance values for both Inch and SI units. The units buttons are active depending on the dual dimension format that has been selected by Preferences→Annotation→Units. Inches or Millimeters.Introduction to Drafting Tolerance Value Options The Tolerance Value fields are active in respect to the units button. that has been selected. Any value entered in these fields will be interpreted as positive unless a negative (-) value is specified.

53 – 5. the lower value is ignored.50 inches upper tolerance = .50 inches upper tolerance = . 5.030 lower tolerance = -.010 Equal Bilateral Only the upper tolerance value is used.000) will be zero.030 lower tolerance = -.50 ) .00 * . 5. No tolerance values are displayed.030 lower tolerance = -. 5. and subtracting the negative value for the lower limit 5.50 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-38 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .010 Unilateral The negative limit below (-TOL) will show value while the positive limit above (+.49 Basic Displays a basic dimension enclosed in a rectangular box around the dimension. nominal size= 5.Introduction to Drafting Some examples of different tolerance values and displays are shown below.010 + Limit 1 Line Limits are calculated by adding the positive tolerance value to the dimension value for the upper limit of your dimension.50 ".03 nominal size= 5.50 inches upper tolerance = .01 nominal size = 5.

Auto Placement Manual Placement. or moves the text outside the extension lines if necessary.Introduction to Drafting Placement Options Dimensions placement on the drawing may be controlled using the options shown below. the dimension is placed at the cursor location specified. Arrows In Manual Placement. When using the Manual Placement. Arrows Out Auto placement automatically centers the dimension between the extension lines if space allows. Initial Position Cursor Movement cursor position Initial Position Cursor Movement Final Position cross hairs In Auto" placement. The leader line placement is controlled manually using the Leader From option. the cursor is insensitive to the horizontal direction EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-39 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Final Position cursor position In Manual" placement the cursor is sensitive to cursor position 10 . Arrows In or Arrows Out options. Auto placement also controls whether the leader lines come from left or right.

0000 Example: Arrow 1 & Extension 2 8.Introduction to Drafting Arrow Line and Extension Line Options The display of arrow lines and extension lines for dimensions may be controlled using the Arrow Line Display and Extension Line Display options shown below. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-40 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .0000 NOTE: Side 1 refers to the first object selected and Side 2 refers to the second object selected. Display Arrow on Side 1 Display Extension Line on Side 1 Display Arrow on Side 2 Display Extension Line on Side 2 Example: 2 Arrows & 2 Extension Lines 8.

Example: Left Infer From Left From Right R 2. The leader option may be set prior to creating the dimension or changed during placement of the dimension.Introduction to Drafting Leader Direction Options The dimension leader direction may be controlled by selecting one of the three leader options.000 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-41 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 .000 Example: Right R 2.

if Automatic Placement was used during creation.000 12 Places 6. The dimension will drag within the constraints that it was created.Introduction to Drafting Text Justification Options Text justification may be controlled using the Horizontal and Vertical Justification options. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-42 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .000 12 Places Left/Top Justification Center/Middle Justification Right/Bottom Justification 10 The origin of the dimension may be changed simply by selecting it and dragging to the new position. Vertical Justification Options Horizontal Justification Options 6. such as appended text or GD&T symbols. i. the dimension will remain centered between the arrows.000 12 Places 6. These are used when there is more than one line of dimension text and/or symbols.e.

Global Drafting Preferences EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-43 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 .Introduction to Drafting In addition to the Dimension Local Preferences. These are the Preferences found in the Preferences pull down menu shown below. there are Global Preferences governing drafting views and entities.

Step 3 Create a Horizontal dimension. NOTE: It will be necessary to set Dimension local preference settings and the Global preferences to create each of the following dimensions. - - Choose the Appended Text Below icon. Step 1 Continue using the part ***_symbols_1. - Choose Preferences→Annotation→Lettering.Creating Dimensions In this activity. Choose OK. several dimensions will be created using various local settings on the Dimensions dialog.Introduction to Drafting Activity 5 . ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-44 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Choose Make Work and OK.25. Set the Lettering Types option menu to Dimension. Step 2 Set the work layer to 111 (category DIMS). - Choose Format→Layer Settings. and the Character Size to . Choose Insert"Dimension"Horizontal. Choose layer 111. In the Horizontal dialog window choose the Annotation Editor icon.

Set the alignment methods to Center and Middle. Select the two centerlines as shown in the figure below.Introduction to Drafting - Enter 6 EQ SPACES in text field and choose OK. Select a cursor location to place the dimension on the drawing. - Set the Precision for 2 decimal places. Set the Placement option menu to Auto Placement. Notice the extension lines are spaced from the linear centerlines. Notice that Use Appended Text was automatically toggled on. - Choose Insert"Dimension"Vertical. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-45 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 . not the arc centers. Step 4 Create a Vertical dimension.

- Set the Precision to 3 decimal places. Select the outer edges of the cylinder to dimension as shown below. - Place the dimension on the drawing. Select the objects shown below. Step 5 Create a Cylindrical dimension. Select this edge ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-46 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual Select this edge EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Set the tolerance type to No Tolerance. Set the Precision to 1 decimal place. - Choose Insert"Dimension"Cylindrical.Introduction to Drafting - Toggle Use Appended Text off. Set the tolerance type to Equal Bilateral Tolerance. Accept the default value in the Upper Tolerance field (.005).

Step 6 Create a Radius NOT to Center dimension. Select the arc and place the dimension on the drawing as shown below. - Step 7 Create a Hole dimension.Introduction to Drafting - Place the dimension on the drawing. - Choose Insert"Dimension"Hole. do not close the part. Step 8 Choose File"Save. Set the Placement Option to Manual Placement. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-47 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 . Arrows Out. Set the Precision to 2 decimal places. - Choose Insert"Dimension"Radius. Select the arc and place the dimension on the drawing as shown below. Set the Precision to 3 decimal places.

Introduction to Drafting Annotation Editor The Annotation Editor is used to place other information on the drawing such as notes. Tool Bar Text Entry Window Preview Window Symbol Display and Text Preference Options Placement Options ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-48 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . labels. and User Defined Symbols. GD&T symbols. Any of these symbols can be placed on the drawing with a leader or as a standalone note without a leader.

the text and control characters appear within the Text Entry Window. In this window the formatting options available within the Tool Bar may be used to customize the appearance of the text. hold the cursor over the icon until the name of the button appears. The Tool Bar The Tool Bar contains several buttons that allow various text formatting operations to be performed. The preview window displays the text as it will appear when it is placed on the drawing. Insert from File Reset Text and Dialog Preferences Clear Copy Delete Text Attribute Preview Save As Cut Paste Select Next Symbol Fit to Preview Window Font Bold Underline Superscript Text Justification Character Scale Factor Italic Overline Subscript TIP To reveal the function of any button. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-49 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 .Introduction to Drafting As text and symbols are entered.

Introduction to Drafting Placing the Text Notes and labels may be placed on the drawing either with or without a leader line. the Origin Tool dialog box is displayed. This dialog box allows you to specify the placement and alignment method for the text. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-50 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Create with Leader Create without Leader Creating text Without a Leader When the Create without Leader option is selected. depending on the placement option chosen.

Extend to maximum Below Bottom. This dialog box allows one or more leaders to be specified as well as the display characteristics of each leader. Underline Below Top. choose the button to display the Create Leader dialog box.Introduction to Drafting Creating Text with a Leader To create text with a leader line. Extend to maximum Below Top. Underline Below Top Below Top. Underline Below Bottom Below Bottom. Extend to maximum. Extend to maximum. Plain Plain with All Around Symbol Plain with Aligned Arrow Plain with Aligned Arrow and All Around Symbol Extension Line ASME 1994 / ISO 1983 Datum Feature ASME 1994 / ISO 1983 Datum Feature With Extension Line Options Available For ASME Y14. Underline EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-51 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 .5M-1994 ASME 1994 / ISO 1983 Standards Datum Feature On Dimension Text Alignment Options Top Middle Bottom Datum on Annotation Datum on Stub Below Bottom.

simply select the reference geometry for the leader end point. Editing Text Text may be edited in a previously created note or label by selecting it from the drawing. select the preferred leader type. or intersection point. arc center. simply choose the Apply button to accept and display the changes on the drawing. leader side placement. A horizontal and vertical distance is given as multiples of the current character size when using the Offset Character option. Editing Existing Dimension Preferences The Annotation Preferences of existing dimensions may be edited simply by double clicking on the dimension. D D D D Dimension Line/Arrow Lettering Units Radial ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-52 D Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The Annotation Preferences dialog will appear and the following types of preferences may be edited. Text may also be aligned either horizontally or vertically with an existing drafting object using the Align Text option. indicate up to seven intermediate leader points (if necessary). and leader/text alignment. choosing OK will proceed to the Place Annotation dialog box discussed earlier. it is captured in the Text Entry Window so that changes may be made. The default placement method is Drag.Introduction to Drafting To create a leader. Drafting objects may be created with more than one leader by selecting the New Leader button anytime during the leader creation process. Once all selections are made for the Create Leader dialog box. but the Point Constructor option may be used to tie the text location to a control point. When a note or label is selected. When editing is completed. The Offset Distance option may be used to indicate an origin position offset from an existing drafting object.

Step 2 Make layer 101 the Work Layer. Step 1 Continue using the part ***_symbols_1. as shown in the illustration above.Using the Annotation Editor In this activity. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-53 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 . key in 101 for the work layer.Introduction to Drafting Activity 6 . - In the Utility tool bar. the Annotation Editor will be used to create a label. in the text entry area using the appropriate degree symbol. - Choose the Text Justification button from the Control Character Area. - Choose Insert→Annotation. Step 3 Create the Label Shown to define the chamfer. - Enter the text. Ensure that Drafting Symbols is selected.

Select this edge - Choose OK to indicate that no intermediate points are required. Left Justify Center Justify Right Justify - Choose the Create with Leader option. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-54 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Locate the Label in the proper location. Select the edge shown to place the arrow leader.Introduction to Drafting - Choose Left Justify. - Step 4 Choose File"Close"Save and Close.

Created Dimensions. Added views to a drawing. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-55 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 . In this lesson you: D D D D D D Modified a drawing. Created Utility Symbols. Created Cylindrical Centerlines. Views and dimensions that are placed on a drawing are associative to the solid model and update when changes are made to the model. Added annotation to a drawing.Introduction to Drafting SUMMARY The Drafting Application provides for the creation of drawings.

Introduction to Drafting (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 10-56 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-1 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 Datum Plane Reference Features . Create a hole feature on a tangent datum plane. Move a hole feature location by changing a datum plane angle. you will be able to: D D D Create a Datum Plane.Datum Plane Reference Features Lesson 11 PURPOSE This lesson will define datum plane reference features. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson.

normal to the axis of the cylinder. construction tools are necessary. These tools are needed because the hole feature requires a planar placement face for creation rather than the cylindrical face of the base solid. Two examples below show a hole in the side of a cylinder. Plane 1A Plane 3B Plane 1B ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 Plane 2A Plane 2B parameter Example A Example B In example A above. while Plane 2A defines a placement plane that is tangent to the cylindrical face and perpendicular to Plane 1A. or as associative linear objects. Plane 1A defines a position through the cylinder axis.Datum Plane Reference Features Reference Features Reference features are construction tools that assist in the creation of features and sketches in locations and orientations where planar placement faces do not exist. The amount of control desired over placement of a feature sometimes dictates the number of reference features required. Reference Features are theoretically infinite in size. 11-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The example on the right requires an additional datum plane to position the hole perpendicular to the slot. This lesson will only discuss relative datum planes. Reference Features may be created relative to an existing solid model or fixed in model space. Datum Plane reference features are accessible by choosing Insert"Form Feature"Datum Plane from the menu bar while in the Modeling application. In the case where a hole must pierce a cylinder to a certain depth from the outside of the cylinder. This allows the hole to be placed on the tangent datum and be relative to both the cylinder and Plane 1A. but the display is limited to a size slightly larger than that of the solid model.

Generally. To act as the planar placement face for the creation of form features (ie: hole. whatever is necessary to describe the relationship of the plane to other objects determines the constraint type(s) to be used. In Drafting. As a target edge for positioning features. The constraint type is determined (inferred) by the objects selected. For the mirror plane in Mirror Body and Mirror Feature. As a horizontal or vertical reference. One. as mating TO or FROM object. two. Simply selecting the objects will present the applicable constraint types. To help define a relative Datum Axis. pocket. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 . Many constraint combinations can be used to create relative datum planes.Datum Plane Reference Features Datum Plane The datum plane option allows a planar reference feature to be created that may be used: D D D D D D D D D D To define a sketch plane. face. To act as the 'trim to' face (extruded and revolved bodies). In assemblies.). boss. or three constraints may be necessary. etc. Relative Datum Planes Relative datum planes are constrained (associated) to other geometric objects. or feature. To trim a body. pad. as a hinge line for a section or auxiliary view. slot. A constraint is a restriction on a datum that positions it relative to some existing plane. Creating Datum Planes by Inferred Selection Relative datum planes are created by selecting an existing object.

Datum Plane Reference Features 11 A Single Constraint associates the datum plane to the target solid using either one of the following creation methods: D D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11-4 Offset From Face or Datum Plane (Select a face or Datum Plane) Through Face Axis (Select cylinder. Only Endpoints and Midpoints on linear edges are selectable. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . cone or revolved feature) Using Dual Constraints means that the constraints must be specified in pairs to create the datum plane. The Triple Constraint method is inferred by selecting three points on a single solid body. The Datum Plane is associative to the body and constrained to the selected points. The Datum Plane Dialog may be used to create datum planes that are more specific than those you can create with the Inferred method. The possible combinations of selections are shown on the next page. Datum Plane User Interface Most of the datum planes created in this course can be created with the Static Datum Plane Dynamic Input Field by inferred methods.

90) 0 Tangent to Face Through Point Through Point Through Edge Through Datum Axis Through Cyl/Con/Rev Face Axis Angle to Face/Datum Plane Angle is 0 Angle is 0 or 90 Tangent to Face Through Curve EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 Dual Constraints .Datum Plane Reference Features First Constraint (selection) Offset From Face Second Constraint (selection) Offset From Face (Center Plane) Through Edge Through Datum Axis Through Cyl/Con/Rev Face Axis Parallel to Face/Datum Plane Tangent to Face Tangent/Normal/Binormal to a Curve/Edge Through Point Through Edge Through Datum Axis Through Cyl/Con/Rev Face Axis Angle to Face/Datum Plane Through Point Through Edge Through Datum Axis Through Cyl/Con/Rev Face Axis Angle to Face/Datum Plane Through Point Through Edge Normal to Edge Normal to Datum Axis Through Datum Axis Through Cyl/Con/Rev Face Axis Angle to Face/Datum Plane Through Edge Through Datum Axis Through Point Through Cyl/Con/Rev Face Axis Tangent to Face Through Point Angle to Face/Datum Plane (Angle is 0.

and choose OK. press Enter.Datum Plane Reference Features Datum Plane Types The following is a list of the datum planes that will be covered in this lesson: D D D D D D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 11-6 Offset Center Angle Tangent Through Control Points Point and Direction Offset Datum Plane To create an offset datum plane D D D Choose the Datum Plane icon. Select the base of the normal. D D Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Do one of the following: D Choose OK to accept a value of 0 (zero). drag the datum plane to the desired location and choose OK. Select the face to offset from. Key in a value.

Select two parallel faces or datum planes. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-7 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 Center Datum Plane . Choose OK.Datum Plane Reference Features To create a center datum plane D D D Choose the Datum Plane icon.

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Select the cylindrical axis symbol. Choose OK.Datum Plane Reference Features Datum Plane Through Cylindrical Axis To create a datum plane through a cylindrical axis: ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 11-8 D D D Choose the Datum Plane icon.

Choose the Datum Plane icon. Key in a value. Select the rotation drag handle and drag the datum plane to the desired location and choose OK. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 Datum Plane at an Angle Through a Cylindrical Axis . D D D Choose the Datum Plane icon. and choose OK. Do one of the following: D D D D D D D Choose OK to accept the default value of 90. press Enter. Select the cylindrical axis symbol. Select the cylindrical axis symbol. an additional datum plane must be created.Datum Plane Reference Features To create a datum plane at an angle through a cylindrical axis. Select the previously created datum plane. Choose OK.

Select the edge that the datum plane is to pass through. Select the rotation drag handle and drag the datum plane to the desired angle and choose OK. Select the planar face or datum plane that the angle will reference. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . do the following: ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11-10 D D D D Choose the Datum Plane icon. press Enter. and choose OK.Datum Plane Reference Features 11 Datum Plane at an Angle to a Face or Datum Plane Through an Edge To create a datum plane at an angle through an edge. Do one of the following: D D Key in a value.

Select the cylindrical face (not on the axis). EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 Datum Plane Tangent to a Cylindrical Face . Select the cylindrical axis symbol. Choose the Datum Plane icon. an additional datum plane must be created. Select the previously created datum plane. Choose OK. D D D D D Choose OK. Choose Alternate Solution from the Datum Plane toolbar until the correct tangent datum plane is previewed.Datum Plane Reference Features To create a datum plane tangent to a cylindrical face. D D D Choose the Datum Plane icon.

Select the control points as desired (edges or curves).Datum Plane Reference Features Datum Plane Through Three Points To create a datum plane through 3 points. Tab through and set the U Parameter as required. Values less than 0 (zero) or greater than 1 may also be used. NOTE: The U Parameter is a value that indicates a position along a theoretical infinite curve. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Choose OK. do the following: ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 11-12 D D D D Choose the Datum Plane icon. Values between 0 (zero) and 1 define locations on the selected edge or curve.

Choose Datum Plane from the Datum Plane toolbar. do the following: Choose the Datum Plane icon. D Choose OK twice. Select a point through which the datum plane should pass. D D D D D Choose Point & Direction. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 Datum Plane Defined by Point and Direction .Datum Plane Reference Features To create a datum plane defined by a point and direction. Define the normal of the datum plane using Inferred Vector or Vector Constructor.

- Choose Datum Plane.Datum Plane Reference Features Activity 1 . Datum plane 1 Datum plane 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 Datum plane 3 Step 1 Open the part pau_ref_1. Pick this top face. 11-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Step 2 Choose Modeling.Creating Relative Datum Planes In this activity. The datum planes created are shown below. Step 3 Create a Datum Plane Offset at a distance of 1 inch above the upper face of the block. three relative datum planes will be created. Select the top face of the block and confirm the selection if necessary.

the positive ZC direction. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-15 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 The top face highlights and a direction vector points normal to the face. - Choose Datum Plane.Datum Plane Reference Features - Key in 1 and press Enter. Step 4 Create a second datum plane through three points. . in this case. - Choose OK. Datum plane Datum planes have infinite bounds even though they are displayed with visible boundaries. The vector displays the positive offset direction. The second datum plane will be created diagonally through the block.

The relationship of this datum plane through the points will remain if the block parameters are changed. - Choose Datum Plane. - Choose OK. Step 5 Create the third datum plane midway between the left and right faces. The datum plane is created and positioned through the three selected points. Any of the edges are acceptable because they share the end point.Datum Plane Reference Features - 11 Select the first point and confirm any of the edges. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11-16 First Point Third Point Second Point - Carefully select each of the two midpoints.

Step 6 Edit the block to verify the parametric relationship of the datum planes to the block. . - Choose Edit→Feature→Parameters. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-17 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 Select the right planar face. The datum plane is created and located at the center of the part and is parallel to the faces selected. Left Face - Choose OK.Datum Plane Reference Features - Right Face - Select the left planar face.

In this case. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Change the Block Dimensions values to: X Length = Y Length = Z Length = 2 2 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 11-18 - Choose OK. those features could be selected at this time.Datum Plane Reference Features - Select BLOCK(6) and choose OK. If there were more features that needed to be edited. The feature may still be modified without updating the model. - Choose OK in the dialog box. Again a dialog box displays options to edit the feature. The revised values are displayed in the graphics area. Choose Feature Dialog. there are no more edits desired. - Choose OK in the Edit Parameters dialog box to complete the change.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-19 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 Fit the view. Step 7 Close the part.Datum Plane Reference Features - Notice that the constraints applied to the datum planes at the time of creation continue to control the positioning of the datum planes after the block is edited. . do not save.

Datum Plane Reference Features Selecting and Using Datums Selecting Datum Planes . The side shown can be accepted by selecting the Accept Default Side option. D D Deleting Datum Planes D D Use Edit→ Feature→Delete Select the datum plane. the system will display a direction vector showing the side of the datum plane on which the feature will be created. These features are positioned in the center of the datum plane as a default if no positioning dimensions are specified. the Flip the Default Side option must be selected. Double click on a datum plane. When a datum plane is selected for the planar placement face. one of its displayed boundaries must be selected. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 11-20 Editing Datum Planes Datum planes may be edited three different ways: D Select the datum plane.When selecting a datum plane in the graphics area. Creating Features using Datum Planes .Form Features created using datum planes for the planar placement face are created normal to the datum plane. With the cursor over the selection click MB3 and choose Delete from the pop up menu. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Choose Edit→Feature→Parameters and select the datum plane. If it is desired that the feature be created in the opposite direction of the default vector. click MB3 and choose Edit Parameters. and with the cursor over the selection.

Step 2 Save the part as ***_ref_2 where *** represent your initials. Relative reference features are required to accomplish this task.Cylindrical Faces and Datum Planes . centered in the feature.Datum Plane Reference Features This activity will demonstrate the creation of relative datum planes as they apply to a cylindrical face. A hole is required through the cylindrical face at the bottom of the part. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-21 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 Activity 2 . Step 1 Open the part pau_ref_2.

- Select the existing Datum Plane.Datum Plane Reference Features Step 3 Start the Modeling Application. - Move the cursor over the outside cylindrical face of the feature at the bottom of the part. Choose Datum Plane. - Choose OK to accept the default value of 90. Step 5 Create a Datum Plane through the feature axis. at an angle to the existing plane of 90 degrees. Step 6 Create a datum plane tangent to the outside of the same cylindrical face to use as a placement face for the hole feature. - Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 11-22 Step 4 Choose Datum Plane. Select the cylindrical axis symbol.

Datum Plane Reference Features - Select the cylindrical face of the feature at the bottom of the part. - Choose OK. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-23 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 Select the original Datum Plane. Step 7 Create a center datum plane. - Choose Datum Plane. . - Choose Alternate Solution until the new tangent datum plane is in the orientation shown below.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 11-24 - Choose OK. Choose the cylindrical face of the hole through the center of the bottom of the part as the thru face. Specify a diameter of 10.Datum Plane Reference Features - Select the two faces shaded below. Ensure that the direction arrow is pointing into the part. Select the tangent datum plane as the placement face. Step 8 Create a hole feature. Choose Simple. Choose Hole. - Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Step 9 Move the datum planes to another layer. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-25 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 Choose OK. - Choose Format"Move to Layer. Select all the datum planes. Choose OK. Key in 62 and choose OK.Datum Plane Reference Features - Location Datum Placement Datum Thru Face Location Datum - Use Point onto Line positioning to locate the hole centered on the two datum planes shown above. .

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11-26 Step 10 Choose File"Close"Save and Close. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Datum Plane Reference Features 11 The newly created hole will remain centered in the part due to its relationship with the datum planes that are constrained to the solid body.

Recently Opened Parts allows switching back and forth between parts opened recently.Feature on a Relative Datum Plane . EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-27 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 Activity 3 . a relative datum plane will be created. in the current Unigraphics session or previous sessions.Datum Plane Reference Features In this activity. Step 2 Create a datum plane through an edge and at an angle to a face/plane. and through a block. Step 1 Choose File"Recently Opened Parts and select the part pau_ref_1. Design Intent Create a simple hole that will have its angle parametrically controlled. which is to be used as a placement plane for a hole at an angle to. - Choose Modeling. The Recently Opened Parts list may contain up to ten parts.

and confirm the selection if necessary. Select the right edge (not the mid point) and confirm the selection if necessary.Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 11-28 - Choose Datum Plane. Choose OK. - A datum plane is created at a 20 degree angle from the top of the block and passes through the selected edge. key in 20 and press Enter. Face - In the Angle Dynamic Input Field. Edge - Select the top face. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

but will pass through the block at an angle because the datum plane is angled to the block. Choose Simple for the hole type. - Bottom Face - Choose OK. The hole will be normal to the datum plane. Select the bottom face of the block as the Thru Face. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-29 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 Step 3 Create the hole perpendicular to the datum plane. Select the boundary of the newly created datum plane for the placement face.5 for the diameter.Datum Plane Reference Features Now a Simple Thru Hole will be created using the datum plane. Key in . . - Choose Hole.

In this case the hole will be positioned to the front and right edge of the model. If no other positioning dimensions are specified.Datum Plane Reference Features 11 Features are initially positioned in the center of the datum plane.75 as the positional expression value. the hole will stay in this position. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Select Edge - Key in -. - is already selected for the first positioning Select the edge of the block shown as the target edge. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11-30 The Perpendicular icon dimension.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-31 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 Select the edge of the block shown as the target edge.Datum Plane Reference Features - Select edge - Accept the value of 2. . The hole is positioned to the newly constrained location. - Double click on the datum plane. Step 4 Modify the angle parameter of the datum plane. Change the angle from 20 degrees to 75 degrees.0 by choosing OK.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 11-32 - Try 80 and 90 degrees. Can you explain the results? Step 5 Close the part. do not save. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Datum Plane Reference Features - Choose OK.

you will create a relative datum plane using the Point and Direction option. The intent is to create a hole feature that goes through one corner of a block and comes out the opposite corner and maintains associativity. where *** represent your initials. - Choose Datum Plane.Creating a Hole Corner to Corner . Step 4 Change the work layer to layer 61. Step 5 Create a datum plane with the point and direction method.Datum Plane Reference Features In this activity. Choose Datum Plane Dialog from the toolbar. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-33 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 Activity 4 . Step 1 Open the part file pau_seedpart_mm and save it as ***_hole_corners. Step 2 Choose Modeling. Step 3 Create a block that is 200 x 100 x 100 on layer 1.

Select this end point. Select the end point as shown to define a point on the datum plane. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Set the Vector Method to Two Points.Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 11-34 - Choose Point and Direction. - Change the Inferred Vector to Vector Constructor.

Select this end point. Key in a diameter value of 25. Step 6 Create a simple hole perpendicular to the datum plane. through the block. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-35 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 Select the end points shown below.Datum Plane Reference Features Select this end point. . - Choose OK twice. Choose Simple for the hole type. - Choose Hole.

Select the far side of the block as the thru face and choose OK. Choose Point onto Point as the positioning dimension. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 Thru Face Placement Face - If the hole is not going into the block. choose Reverse Side.Datum Plane Reference Features - Select the datum plane as the placement face. - Point to Point 11-36 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-37 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 Select the end point as shown. - Select the block. . With the cursor on the block.Datum Plane Reference Features - Select this end point - Change the work layer to 1 and make layer 61 invisible. Step 7 Modify the size of the block. click MB3.

Fit the view and note the associativity of the features.Datum Plane Reference Features - Choose Edit Parameters.000. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 11-38 - Click on p2=100. Step 8 Save and close the part. Choose OK twice. Key in 400. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Created a hole feature from an associative datum plane. In this lesson you: D D D Created associative datum planes. but the display is limited to a size slightly larger than that of the solid model.Datum Plane Reference Features SUMMARY Datum planes are reference features that are used as construction tools to assist in the creation of features and sketches in locations and orientations where planar placement faces do not exist. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-39 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 . Reference Features are theoretically infinite in size. Created an associative datum plane by defining a point and direction.

Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) 11-40 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 12-1 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 12 . This lesson will define another type of reference feature. Locate a hole feature using a datum axis.Datum Axis Reference Feature Datum Axis Reference Feature Lesson 12 PURPOSE datum axis. you will be able to: D D Create a Datum Axis. the OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson.

Pivot axis for datum planes. Directional reference.Datum Axis Reference Feature Datum Axis This option allows a linear reference feature to be created that may be used as a(n): D D D D D Axis of rotation for revolved features. Axis of rotation for circular arrays. Dimensional reference for feature position. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 12 12-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

The static toolbar uses the Inferred method to let you quickly create a datum axis based on your object and constraint selections.Datum Axis Reference Feature User Interface When you first open the Datum Axis option. To open the main Datum Axis dialog. the Datum Axis static toolbar displays in the upper left corner of the graphics window. The main Datum Axis dialog is used to create datum axes that are more complex than those you can create with the Inferred method. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 12-3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 12 . click its icon on the Datum Axis Static toolbar.

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Conical or Revolved Face Axis Intersection of Two Faces/Datum Planes ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 12 12-4 The important function of these Reference Features is that they are associative to existing geometry.Datum Axis Reference Feature Relative Datum Axis The four relative datum axis methods that will be covered in this lesson are: D D D D Through Two Points Through Edge Through Cylindrical.

Tab through and set the U Parameter as required. do the following: D D D Choose the Datum Axis icon. D NOTE: The U Parameter is a value that indicates a position along a theoretical infinite curve. Choose OK. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 12-5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 12 .Datum Axis Reference Feature Datum Axis Through Two Points To create a datum axis through 2 points. Values between 0 (zero) and 1 define locations on the selected edge or curve. Values less than 0 (zero) or greater than 1 may also be used. Select the control points as desired (edges or curves).

do the following: D D Choose the Datum Axis icon. 12 D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 12-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Select the edge or curve. Choose OK.Datum Axis Reference Feature Datum Axis Through an Edge or Curve To create a datum axis through an edge or curve.

Choose OK. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 12-7 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 12 D . Select the face. do the following: D D Choose the Datum Axis icon.Datum Axis Reference Feature Datum Axis Through a Cylindrical face To create a datum axis through a cylindrical face.

This requires creation of an associative linear reference feature (datum axis) at the desired intersection to serve as the pivot position. D D D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 12 TIP There is no option to create a datum plane at the intersection of two faces/planes from the datum plane dialog box.Datum Axis Reference Feature Datum Axis Through the Intersection of two Faces To create a datum axis through the intersection of two faces. 12-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Select the faces. Choose OK. do the following: Choose the Datum Axis icon. A datum plane may then be created through the axis using whatever other constraint that applies.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 12-9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 12 .Datum Axis Reference Feature Editing Datum Axes To edit datum axes parameters. click MB3 and choose Edit Parameters. use any of the following methods: D Select a datum axis. and with the cursor over the selection. D D Deleting Datum Axes D D Use Edit→ Feature→Delete Select a datum axis. Use Edit→Feature→Parameters. click MB3 and choose Delete. Double-click a datum axis in the graphics window. With the cursor over the selection.

- Choose File→Recently Opened Parts. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 12 12-10 ZC YC XC A/2 A Step 1 Open the part file. a datum axis and datum planes will be added to constrain the pivot location of a hole feature. Design Intent A 0. Step 2 Create the Reference Features. Select pau_ref_1.Constraining Locations using Datums In this activity.5 inch diameter hole is to be located in a block. The origin of the hole will be on the top face and located from the right face. The angle of the hole shall be editable in a plane parallel to the front face. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Choose Modeling. - Change the work layer to 61. - Choose Datum Plane.Datum Axis Reference Feature Activity 1 . The hole is to remain centered in the block along the YC axis.

Choose OK. ZC YC XC Right Face - In the Offset Dynamic Input Field key in -2 and press Enter. - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 12-11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 12 . Choose OK. Choose Datum Plane. Back Face - - ZC YC XC Front Face - Select the front face of the block as shown and confirm. Select the back face of the block as shown and confirm.Datum Axis Reference Feature - Select the right face on the block as shown.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 12 12-12 ZC YC XC Top Face Datum Plane - Choose OK. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Select the datum plane as shown below. - Choose Datum Plane. A datum axis is created at the intersection of the top of the block and the associative datum plane. - Choose Datum Axis.Datum Axis Reference Feature A center datum plane is created. Select the top face as shown below.

In the Angle Dynamic Input Field key in 45 and press Enter. - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 12-13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 12 . Choose OK.Datum Axis Reference Feature - Select the right face of the block as shown. ZC YC XC Right Face - Select the Datum Axis.

Select the newly created datum plane. - Choose the Simple icon. - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 12 Step 3 Create a Thru Hole. Fit the view.Datum Axis Reference Feature - Choose Datum Plane. - Choose Hole. 12-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . In the Offset Dynamic Input Field key in 1 and press Enter. Choose OK.

5 for the Diameter. - Choose Point onto Line. - Choose the Point onto Line. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 12-15 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 12 . The tool solid for the hole appears in the display. A positioning dimension appears in the graphics area with a value of 0. confirm and choose OK. Select the datum axis as the target edge. Datum Plane ZC YC XC Bottom Face - Select the bottom face of the block as the Thru Face. Select the edge of the datum plane as shown.Datum Axis Reference Feature - Enter .

The hole will always remain on the datum axis and stay centered in the block.Datum Axis Reference Feature - Select the center datum plane as shown and choose OK. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 12 12-16 ZC YC XC Select this Datum Plane The hole is located.

ZC YC XC - Change the angle from 45 degrees to 20 degrees. but the point of entry remains the same. - Double click on the datum plane indicated below. The angle of the hole changes. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 12-17 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 12 . Choose OK.Datum Axis Reference Feature Step 4 Modify the angle parameter of the datum plane.

12-18 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . ZC YC XC Step 6 Choose File"Close"All Parts. Do not save the part file. ZC YC XC ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 12 - Change the Offset from -2 to -3 and choose OK.Datum Axis Reference Feature Step 5 Change the Location of the Datum Axis. - Double click on the datum plane indicated below.

- Use the third mouse button pop up menu to change the Display Mode to Wireframe.Datum Axis Reference Feature Activity 2 . Step 2 Investigate the model.Relative Datum Axes This activity will demonstrate the difference in positional associativity between Point Direction and Datum Axis when either is used to define the rotation axis of an instance array. Choose Format"Layer Settings and make the display of ALL layers Selectable. Step 1 Open the part pau_datumaxis_1 and start the Modeling application. - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 12-19 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 12 .

Choose OK to dismiss the feature Edit Parameters dialog box. Change the Y Length to 10 and choose OK. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 12 Step 3 Modify the model. Change the X Length to 5 and press Tab. Select the BLOCK(0) feature and choose OK. Choose the Feature Dialog button. - 12-20 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Choose Edit"Feature"Parameters from the main menu bar.Datum Axis Reference Feature The model contains two identical hole patterns. The hole pattern on the left in the graphic was created by specifying a point in space and a vector to revolve the pattern about. The pattern on the right was created by specifying the relative datum axis to revolve the pattern about. The central hole in each pattern is located associatively to the relative datum planes in the part.

The model updates to reflect the change. This is due to this hole pattern being created with a non associative reference point and direction vector. Notice that the hole pattern on the left does not update as expected. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 12-21 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 12 .Datum Axis Reference Feature - Choose OK to update the model.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 12 Step 4 Choose File"Close"All Parts. The hole pattern on the right that depends on the relative datum axis to define the rotation point and vector updates as expected. 12-22 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . but the non associative specified point in space does not change. Do not save the part file.Datum Axis Reference Feature The left hole pattern maintained its relationship to the objects used to define it.

Datum Axis Reference Feature SUMMARY In this lesson you: D D Created a Datum Axis. . Positioned features using a Datum Axis. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 12-23 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 12 A Datum Axis is a linear reference feature that is used as an aid in the construction of other features.

Datum Axis Reference Feature ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 12 12-24 (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Apply geometric constraints to sketches. OBJECTIVES D D D D D D Upon completion of this lesson.Sketching Sketching Lesson 13 PURPOSE To introduce the method of creating a sketch and free hand sketching of curves. Convert a sketch curve to reference. Apply dimensional constraints to sketches. Create sketch curves. Identify constraints. you will be able to: Create a sketch. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-1 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 .

constitute the essence of constraint based modeling. a very powerful portion of Unigraphics solid modeling. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Dimensional and geometric constraints may be used to establish a design intent as well as provide the ability to perform parameter driven changes. A profile may contain some. a sketch parametrically controls the two dimensional profile. These rules. all. called constraints. or to define sections for free form features such as a swept feature or a through curves lofted surface. or none of the constraints required to fully capture the design intent. Using a set of rules applied by the user.Sketching What is a sketch? A sketch is a feature that is intended to contain a collection of two dimensional curves. Geometric relations may be established between the curves within a profile as well as with curves in other profiles and model geometry such as edges or datums. Profiles may be used to produce extruded or revolved features.

it will automatically move when the position of the placement face/datum is changed. Another reason is when there is a need to iterate through a number of various solutions to validate a certain design intent. The most obvious reason for sketching is when a design intent is well known and constraints can be quickly applied to capture that intent.Sketching Why sketch? Sketched profiles possess a higher level of control over features. this approach is the quickest way to build features and still have a sufficient level of associativity. Since sketches do not require constraining. the sketch objects change and move to reflect the effect that the assigned rule has on the geometry. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . Once a sketch is placed on a face or datum plane. as rules are applied. thus automating the propagation of changes. The inherent ability to solve a sketch in real time means that. This gives the user the ability to quickly change profiles of features created using sketch curves.

Sketching When should a sketch be used? Unigraphics users should sketch whenever they have a need for parametrically controlled curves. This could be accomplished with explicit curves. The Unigraphics sketcher gives the user the ability to sketch shapes that are not available as standard form features. but there would be no parametric control over the shape. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Most features of solid models can be created using combinations of form features. The user might also consider sketching when a combination of features used to create the desired shape makes the shape difficult to edit.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . a sketch as part of a user defined feature should be considered. Sketches may be used as base features of a model if the shape lends itself to extruded or revolved geometry.Sketching When there is a commonly used shape that varies in size from part to part.

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Potential Areas for Change .Sketching Sketches may be used in a number of different ways. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-6 An important aspect of modeling that helps the user decide when to use a sketch is defining the design intent of the model. and their effects on the part configuration.Known design changes or iterations. The design intent consists of two items: D Design Considerations . or as section curves for free form features. D As a general rule. Consider them for guide paths for swept features. including engineering and design rules that determine the detail configuration of the part. the more likely there are benefits from sketching.The geometric requirements on the actual part. The added advantage of being able to quickly and easily change the geometry based on rules that the designer applies should be a large part of the determination of when to sketch. the more design considerations and potential areas for change.

they are listed in the Model Navigator and any edits supported by the Model Navigator that are germane to sketches are available. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-7 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 .Sketching Sketches and the Model Navigator Since sketches are features of the solid model.

The sketcher helps in this endeavor by automating layer control as sketches are activated and deactivated. the work layer is set to the layer assigned to the sketch. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . This automated layer management is designed to ensure that the user does not accidentally construct objects in the active sketch across multiple layers. As the user subsequently activates the sketch. Unigraphics assigns the current work layer at creation to the sketch.Sketching Sketches and Layers Organizing part files is a very important part of modeling.

all of the features need to be associative. But.Sketching Creating a New Sketch Choosing the Sketch icon starts the sketch function. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 Sketch Plane 2 XC-YC Plane 3 YC-ZC Plane 4 XC-ZC Plane 5 Datum Plane 6 Datum CSYS 7 OK 8 Cancel Sketch to Define the Base Feature If the sketch is going to define the base feature then you may define the plane of the sketch by choosing one of the following: D D D D XC-YC Plane ZC-YC Plane ZC-XC Plane Datum CSYS EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . Is the sketch going to define the base feature or has a base feature already been created? The tool bar shown below is used to define the sketch plane. before this can be done you must consider the state of the model. Since our goal is to develop a parametric model. The Sketch Plane The first thing that needs to be defined is the plane that the sketch curves will be placed on.

Choose OK. Define the horizontal or vertical reference Choose OK. Sketch Associative to Existing Base Feature If a base feature already exists. then you will define the sketch plane on a planar face or a datum plane of the base feature. You to accept and enter the sketcher function. The datum plane may already exist or may be created on the fly. Define the horizontal or vertical reference Choose OK. Select the face or datum plane.Sketching After the plane is chosen the plane is highlighted in the graphic window. D D D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-10 D If you are defining a datum plane on the fly: D D Choose the Datum Plane icon Select the required objects to define the datum plane. D D D Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . If you are choosing a face or an existing datum plane: Choose the Sketch Plane icon. The sketch then chose OK plane is then oriented normal to the graphics screen.

the normal of the sketch plane may be changed by double clicking on the ZC axis. There are times when no linear object is pointing in the desired horizontal direction. To specify a new direction. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 Resultant Sketch Orientation . double click on it. Desired Horizontal Direction YC ZC XC Vertical Reference Planar Placement Face The direction of an axis may be changed as follows: D D To flip the direction of an axis. In addition. At these times a vertical reference may be defined. the system is able to interpret where the desired horizontal direction is when using a vertical reference. select the axis to redirect then select a straight edge. because vertical is by definition ninety degrees from horizontal.Sketching Defining the Reference Direction The reference direction is used to specify the horizontal direction on the sketch plane. This only applies when the sketch plane is being defined by a datum plane. The straight edge is projected to the sketch plane to define the new direction.

SKETCH_001.Sketching Naming a Sketch The system requires a unique name for each sketch.). etc. A sketch name may be defined during or after the sketch has been created by clicking on the default sketch name and then typing in the new name. This allows downstream users to understand the function of the sketch at a glance. and therefore will select the next available sketch name in the queue as the default. The system default from Unigraphics is SKETCH_###" where the pound signs are replaced by the next available number counting up from 000 (SKETCH_000. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-12 The sketch can also be renamed by: D D Choosing Task→Sketch Properties Using the Model Navigator TIP It is highly recommended that sketches be named in a descriptive manner rather than accepting the default. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Curves created while a sketch is active become associated with the active sketch. select the desired sketch. the sketch must be activated.Sketching The Active Sketch In any given part there may be numerous sketches of different features at different orientations. There are two ways to deactivate an active sketch as follows: D Choose Task→Finish. There are three ways to activate a sketch: D D D Double clicking on a sketch curve. Select the Sketch icon and from the Sketch Name pull down. only one sketch may be worked on at a time. . EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 D Select the Finish icon. In the Model Navigator double click on the sketch feature node. When using the sketcher. When returning to a sketch to add to or modify a profile. This sketch is called the active sketch.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-14 D Sketch on an Existing Face or Datum Plane D Choose the Sketch icon. D D D D D Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Define the horizontal or vertical reference Name the sketch. Choose the Sketch icon. Choose OK. Define the sketch plane by one of the following. Select the face or datum plane.Sketching Sketch Creation Steps Sketch for a Base Feature D Set the work layer for the sketch. Choose the Sketch Plane icon. Choose OK. D D D D D D XC-YC Plane ZC-YC Plane ZC-XC Plane Datum CSYS D Name the sketch.

Choose the YC-ZC Plane. Notice the WCS. a sketch that is to be defined on an existing face and a sketch where the datum plane is created on the fly. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-15 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . Click on the sketch name. key in base and press Enter.Sketch Creation In this activity you will practice the creation of a sketch for a base feature. - - - The sketch is created. Step 1 Open pau_seedpart_in and start the modeling application. The system has manipulated it so that XC is parallel to the horizontal direction and YC is vertical. Step 3 Close the part do not save. Unigraphics created a fixed Datum Plane on the specified sketch plane and two fixed Datum Axes along its major axes to support the new sketch. - Make layer 21 the work layer. Step 5 Create a sketch on an existing face. - Choose Finish. - Make layer 21 the work layer. Step 4 Open pau_skt_creation and start the modeling application. Choose OK.Sketching Activity 1 . Step 2 Create a sketch for a base feature. Choose Sketch.

Select the Face shown below. The Sketch Plane - icon is already selected. key in skt1 and press Enter. Step 6 Create a curve on the sketch plane. - Select the horizontal reference at the location shown above. Select this face. Click on the sketch name.Sketching - Choose Sketch. - Choose OK. - Choose Line. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-16 Horizontal Reference The 2D sketch plane indicator appears and the X Axis is active (highlighted).

- Replace the view with the TFR TRI view. . - Choose Finish. then Click here. Rotate the part and notice how the line remained associative to the face. - Step 8 Create a sketch on a datum plane. Select the expression. - Choose Tools"Expression. and change the value to 3. . - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-17 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 Step 7 Change the orientation of the face that defines the sketch plane. Click here . Change_Me=1.5. . Make layer 22 the work layer. and layer 1 selectable. layer 21 invisible. Choose OK.Sketching - Create the line as shown below. Choose Sketch.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-18 - Choose OK. Select the 2 shaded faces shown below. The 2D sketch plane indicator appears and the X Axis is active (highlighted). A center datum plane is created. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Sketching - Choose Datum Plane.

- Choose Finish. Horizontal Reference - Click on the sketch name. - Choose OK.Sketching - Select the horizontal reference at the location shown below. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-19 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . key in skt2 and press Enter.

Sketching Step 9 Activate existing sketches. This step will demonstrate 2 ways of activating existing sketches. - Make layer 21 selectable. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Double click on the sketch curve (1) shown below. 1 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-20 - Fit the view (MB3). - Choose Finish. Sketch SKT1 is activated and oriented in the graphic window.

Step 10 Close the part.Sketching - Choose Sketch. Choose SKT2 from the sketch name pull down. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-21 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . Sketch SKT2 is activated and oriented in the graphic window. - Choose Finish. do not save.

Sketch Curve Tool Bar Profile Line Arc Circle Infer Constraints Setting Dialog Vertical Midpoint Horizontal Perpendicular Tangent Parallel ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-22 Collinear Coincident Point on Curve Equal Radius Point on String Concentric Equal Length As you create the curves a symbol will appear near the curve being created to represent the constraint that will be applied. As curves are created geometric constraints are assigned to the curves relative to the Infer Constraint Settings.Sketching Sketch Curve Creation Sketch curves are created via the Sketch Curve tool bar. if any. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

When creating lines outside of the sketcher. is doing so parallel to the reference curve. Snap Angle The Infer Point Tool Bar The Infer Point tool bar is displayed when creating most of the curve types in the sketcher. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-23 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . The default snap angle is set to 3° and is user definable between 0° and 20°. you press MB2. effectively creating a 6° tolerance zone by default. Snap Angle The snap angle is a global preference set in the Sketch Preferences dialog box that is applied any time curves are being created. so that you have more control over the selection of locations. Now as you move the cursor. When the Infer Point toolbar is active. It is used to snap" a line to horizontal or vertical. Cursor Location is always available. the new line that is rubber banding. This angular tolerance is defined on either side of horizontal or vertical from the first specified location.Sketching Locking a Constraint When a constraint symbol appears during curve creation you may lock in that constraint by pressing MB2. you are creating a line and the parallel symbol appears. snap angle is only applied when using inferred cursor location. regardless of the point types turned on. For example.

if you are horizontally or vertically opposite a control point. Existing Curve Alignment Lines ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-24 Profile Tool The Profile tool allows creation of a string of lines and arcs. The icons at the upper left corner of the graphics screen allow you to switch between lines and arcs. New curve being created. and allow you to switch between entering X-Y locations and entering parameters. Line Arc XY Parameters Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Profile is accessed by choosing the Profile icon on the Sketch Curve tool bar.Sketching Alignment Lines While Creating Curves In the process of creating a curve. the system will display an alignment line. without having to specify a start for each curve after the first curve is created.

You can change this any time you wish. the system will revert to creating a line.Sketching The default settings are: D D Line creation X-Y location Once you have created the first curve (line or arc). EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-25 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . You can also switch to arc creation by using press-drag-release with MB1. The circle-X" symbol controls the direction in which the arc will be created.

Creating Lines Line creation is accessed by choosing the Line icon tool bar. re-cross the end of the line (with the cursor).Sketching If the desired arc is in the wrong direction. on the Sketch Curve 13-26 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . and exit in a different quadrant of the symbol. Circle-X Symbol Arc originating from top quadrant Arc originating from Left quadrant Arc originating from right quadrant ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 Arc originating from bottom quadrant As you are creating curves with the profile tool. the string mode can be broken by clicking MB2.

The first is creation method. The same as the previous.Sketching Once in line creation. For Arc by 3 Points: creating the arc: D D D there are several combinations of methods for Locate the start. but enter the radius value after locating the end point. Once you indicate a start location. and then locate the end. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-27 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 Creating Arcs . locate the end point and then determine which of the 4 options you wish to create. There are several combinations of methods for creating a line: D D D D Locate the start. and then locate a point on the arc. and then enter the length and angle parameters. But you can still give an end location without changing back to XY. locate the end. Locate the start. Locate the start. enter one parameter. and then locate the end. the icons in the upper left corner of the graphics screen give you two sets of options. Locate the start. Enter the parameters and then locate the start. the system will switch to the Parameters mode. and the second is for the XY-Location/Parameters choice. enter a radius value and press Enter. but before the point on arc. the icons in the upper left corner of the graphics screen give you two options: Location (by cursor location or entering an X-Y location). on the Sketch Curve Once in arc creation. Arc creation is accessed by choosing the Arc icon tool bar. and entering parameters.

Locate the center. locate the start point. and locate the end point. locate the end point. D Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . and the second is for the location/parameters choice. the system will switch to the Enter Parameters mode.just indicate another location for a circle center. But you can still give a location without changing back to XY. You are then in multiple circle creation mode . Locate the center. For Circle by Center and Radius: circles: D D there are several methods for creating Locate the center. on the Sketch ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-28 Once in circle creation. Press Enter. the icons in the upper left corner of the graphics screen give you two sets of options.) Locate the center. and then locate a point on the circumference of the circle. Creating Circles Circle creation is accessed by choosing the Circle icon Curve tool bar. Locate the center. and press Enter. and locate the direction for the sweep. locate the start point. (The start point location determines the radius. enter a radius value and press Enter.Sketching For Arc by Center and End Points: methods for creating the arc: D D D there are also several combinations of Locate the center. The first is creation method. drag the radius until you get the size you want. The circle is created. Once you indicate a first location. enter a radius. locate the start of the sweep. Indicate another center. enter radius and sweep angle values and press Enter. and you are in multiple circle creation mode. The circle is created.

But you can still give a location without changing back to XY. the system will switch to the enter Parameters mode. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-29 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 .Sketching For Circle by 3 Points: D D there are also two methods for creating the circle: Locate three points on the circumference of the circle. enter a radius value and press Enter. Locate two points on the circumference of the circle. then choose which of the two options you want by cursor location. Once you indicate a first location.

- Start the Modeling application. Step 3 Create a sketch on the XC-YC plane. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-30 Step 4 Set the Infer Constraints Setting. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Choose the Sketch icon. You are going to set the Infer Constraints Setting to make available only the constraints that you may want to apply during curve creation.Sketching Activity 2. - Choose Infer Constraints Settings. - Choose OK to accept the XC-YC Plane. Step 2 Change the Work Layer to 21.Using the Sketch Profile Tool Step 1 Open pau_seedpart_in and save it as ***_skt_profile_1 where *** represent your initials.

Sketching - Set the dialog as shown below. Step 5 Create a Profile. - Choose OK. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-31 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . - Choose the Profile tool the graphics window. In this step you will create the sketch curves shown below using the Profile tool. and then move the cursor into - Key in -4 for the XC value and press Tab.

- Move the cursor to a position that defines a Length of approximately 3 inches and click MB1. Horizontal Symbol Notice the horizontal symbol indicating the constraint that is going to be applied to the line. - Press MB2 to lock in the horizontal constraint.Sketching - Key in -2 for the YC value and press Enter. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 - Next. Hold MB1 down and drag the cursor straight up from the end point of the last line and then release. Move the cursor so that the rubber banding line snaps to the horizontal orientation as shown below. you are going to create the first arc. You are now in arc creation mode. Create the arc by indicating a location with MB1 as shown below. Now notice that as you move the cursor around the rubber banding line remains horizontal. 13-32 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Notice the alignment line that aligns the center point and end points.

- Hold MB1 down and drag the cursor up and to the right from the end point of the last line and then release. - Key in . Next you will create another arc just like the first one.5 for the Radius and press Tab 2 times. but you will use a different method. Create a horizontal line approximately 1 inch long by indicating the end point with MB1. Key in 180 for the Sweep Angle and press Enter. - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-33 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 .Sketching - Create a horizontal line approximately 2 inches long by indicating the end point with MB1. Click in the graphic window to apply.

13-34 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Click in the graphic window to apply. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 - Key in 1. drag and release.875 for the Radius and press Tab 2 times. Key in 145 for the Sweep Angle and press Enter.Sketching - Create the line as shown below. - Start the creation of an arc in the orientation shown below by holding MB1 down.

Key in 90 for the Sweep Angle and press Enter. drag and release.Sketching - With MB1 indicate a cursor location. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-35 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . Click in the graphic window to apply. The next line to be created is to have a perpendicular constraint relative to the 35° angle line. so that horizontal and tangent constraints will be applied to the line. as shown below. The line should also be approximately 2 inches long.5 for the Radius and press Tab 2 times. - Key in 1. - Start the creation of an arc in the orientation shown below by holding MB1 down.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-36 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Sketching - Move the cursor over the line indicated below. Note the alignment lines and the perpendicular constraint symbol. Move the cursor over this line. - With MB1 indicate a cursor location as shown below.

Sketching - Create a horizontal line approximately 1. Move the cursor over these lines.5 inches long as shown below. - Move the cursor over the lines indicated below. - Close the profile by selecting the end point of the first line. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-37 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . - With MB1 indicate a cursor location as shown below. Note the alignment line and the parallel constraint symbol.

Step 6 Save and close the part.Sketching - Choose Finish. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-38 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

It is for controlling whether or not the original curves are trimmed. and then drag the size and quadrant. enter a radius value. there is a single icon in the upper left corner of the graphics screen. on the Sketch Curve Once in fillet creation. and the indicate the desired quadrant. You can create fillets between lines. Drag (with MB1) across the two curves you want to fillet. Select one curve. arcs or conics. and select the second curve. enter a radius value.Sketching Creating Fillets Fillet creation is accessed by choosing the Fillet icon tool bar. Select two curves individually. You can also create a fillet between two parallel lines. and drag the size and quadrant. Select two curves individually. The size of the fillet is governed by where the curves are selected. D D D D EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-39 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . There are several methods for creating Fillets: D Select two curves with a single selection (at their intersection).

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Hold down MB1 and drag across the portion of curves you want to trim away.Sketching Quick Trim and Quick Extend Quick Trim Quick Trim will trim any curve to the closest curve in the sketch. The system will preview the results in pre-selection color. by using ctrl-select to select the desired boundary curve. You can also select more than one bounding curve using the ctrl-select method. by using the crayon" select method. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13-40 You can also select a specific curve to trim to. 13 You can also trim multiple curves at one time.

In the example above. two Point on Curve Constraints. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-41 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . When a curve is trimmed. . the center section is previewed as the portion to be removed. . (between the two boundary curves). and one Colinear constraint would be added. If you trim an arc to a line that is tangent. appropriate constraints are automatically created. the Point on Curve constraint would change to Coincident. With the cursor on the top line.Sketching In the example below. If one of the boundary curves is later trimmed to the line. both the arc on the left and the spline on the right were control-selected as boundary curves.

The curve being extended must extend to an actual intersection with the boundary curve. As with Quick Trim. by using the crayon" select method. arcs and conics to the closest curve in the sketch. The system will preview the results in pre-selection color. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-42 You can extend multiple curves at one time. when you use Quick Extend. Quick Extend Quick Extend will extend lines. appropriate constraints are automatically created. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Hold down MB1 and drag across the ends of curves you want to extend.Sketching the tangency constraint will be retained. Before After You can also select specific boundary curves by using the control-select method.

0 millimeter fillets in the upper left and lower left corners of the sketch. Step 5 Create a 4 millimeter fillet using lines L16 and L20. Step 4 Make sure Trim Inputs is on (depressed). trimming the lines. Step 2 Activate the sketch. and press Enter. You will be using this sketch geometry to create fillets. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-43 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . - Enter 4 in the Radius field on the graphics screen.Creating Fillets Step 1 Open the part file pau_skt_fillet_1. - Double-click with MB1 on any of the sketch curves. Step 3 Choose the Fillet icon. and start the Modeling application.Sketching Activity 3 . and do it with a single select. You first want to create 4.

and this time do not trim the lines being filleted. - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 Step 6 Create a four millimeter fillet using lines L16 and L17.Sketching - Select both lines at the same time. with a single select. by selecting at their intersection. - Drag the cursor around the screen and notice that you can select which quadrant you want. 13-44 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Turn off Trim Inputs. Select in the lower right quadrant to place the fillet in the desired quadrant. Select the two lines at their intersection.

Step 7 Create a 4 millimeter fillet between lines L17 and L18.) . - Notice that the 4 millimeter radius was used. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-45 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 With MB1 held down.0 Radius value should still be in the text field on the graphics screen. Select by dragging across the two lines. The 4.Sketching - Select in the upper right quadrant. The curves crossed with the crayon" are the curves selected. drag across the two lines as below: (This is another method of selecting the curves to be filleted.

and drag the size and quadrant. Drag the cursor around the screen. - Drag (with MB1). as shown below: ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-46 It used the selection location of the curves to determine the radius. but his time do NOT use a radius value.Sketching Step 8 Create another fillet between lines L18 and L20 by using the crayon". Step 9 Create a fillet between lines L18 and L19. - Use Backspace to erase the 4 in the text field. - Individually select the lines L18 and L19. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-47 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 .Sketching - Select a location to create an arc similar to the one shown below. Step 10 Close the part file. - Choose Finish.

Step 4 Set the Infer Constraints Setting. - Enter the Modeling application.Sketching Activity 4 . so you will toggle all constraints off. Step 3 Create a sketch. key in s21_profile and press Enter.Sketching a Gasket Step 1 Open pau_seedpart_in and save it as ***_gasket_1 where *** represent your initials. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Click on the sketch name. - Choose Infer Constraints Settings. In this sketch we do not want to apply any constraints at this time. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-48 - Choose OK to accept the XC-YC Plane. Step 2 Change the Work Layer to 21 so that the part file will be compliant with class standards. - Choose Sketch.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-49 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 .Sketching - Set the dialog as shown below. Step 5 Create the sketch curves to define the main profile. - Choose OK. Create the 4 lines as shown below. - Choose Profile.

- Turn on Trim Inputs. as shown below. at positions 1. 2. 2 3 1 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-50 A fillet is created and the lines are trimmed to the tangent points. Select the lines. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Sketching - Choose Fillet. The system also displays tangent symbols at the 2 tangent points. and then a cursor location at 3.

as shown below. 2.Sketching - Select the lines. and then a cursor location at 3. at positions 1 and 2. 1 2 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-51 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . 3 1 2 - Key in 1 for the Radius value and press Enter. Select the lines. as shown below. at positions 1.

Sketching

The 1 inch radius fillet was created and the lines trimmed to the tangent points.

-

Select the lines, as shown below, at positions 1 and 2.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
13
Step 6 Define the holes of the gasket.
-

2

1

Choose Infer Constraints Settings. Toggle Coincident Choose OK. on.

13-52

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Sketching

-

Choose Circle. At the approximate center of the profile, click and drag to create a circle similar to the one shown below.

-

Move the cursor over and along the arc on the left side of the profile, until the arc center symbol (1) appears, then click and drag to create a circle with a diameter of approximately 0.75.

1

The system now will infer a constraint of coincident between the arc and the circle.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

13-53

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
13

Sketching -

Create the circle for the opposite side using the same method.

13

The sketch of the profile is now complete. The shape and design intent will be further refined in a later activity with the application of dimensional and geometric constraints.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
13-54

-

Choose Finish.

Step 7 Move the reference features to the appropriate layer to conform with class standards.
-

Choose Format→Move to Layer from the main menu. Select the datum plane and 2 datum axes. Choose OK. Enter layer number 61 as the destination layer to move the objects to and choose OK.

Step 8 Choose File"Close"Save and Close.

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Sketching

Activity 5 - Using Quick Trim and Quick Extend
Step 1 Open the part file pau_skt_quick_1, and start the Modeling application.

Step 2 Trim curves with Quick Trim.
-

Double click on one of the sketch curves to activate the sketch.

-

Choose Quick Trim.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

13-55

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
13

Sketching -

Select the line where the arrow is pointing in the illustration below.

-

13

Hold MB1 down and drag the cursor across the 2 curves as shown below.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
13-56

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Sketching -

Ctrl Select the curves labeled 1 and 2 for boundaries. Select on curves 3 and 4 to trim the center portion.

1

3 4 2

-

Choose Quick Extend. Place the cursor on the arc at location 1 as labeled below.
1

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

13-57

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
13

Step 3 Extending curves with Quick Extend.

Sketching

The status line informs you that the system cannot extend the curve. This is because there is no other curve that would intersect with the arc.
-

Place the cursor on the arc at location 2 as labeled below.

2

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
13
13-58

This time notice how the system provides a preview of the extension.
-

Select the arc at location 2 to create the extension.

Step 4 Continue to experiment with Quick Trim and Quick Extend until the instructor is ready to continue.

-

Choose Finish.

Step 5 Close the part file.

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Sketching

Sketch Points
Sketch objects are defined by theoretical points. A line, for instance, is defined by two points. The sketcher attempts to mathematically solve for the location of the points by analyzing the constraints (rules) that are placed on objects. The points that the sketch solver analyzes are referred to as sketch points. By controlling the locations of these sketch points the line itself may be controlled. There are various ways to control these points. The sketch points associated with different types of curves are illustrated in the graphic below.

Line

Fillet Arc Circle

Ellipse

Degree of Freedom Arrows (DOF)
Degree of freedom arrows occur at sketch points to indicate that the solver is unable to fully define where the sketch point exists on the sketch plane. DOF arrows are only displayed during the creation of dimensions or constraints; they are yellow, and their base emanates at the sketch point with arrowheads pointing in both the horizontal or vertical directions (when the sketch point has no constraints). An arrow pointing to the right means that the sketch point in question is free to move in the horizontal direction, both to the right and left. An arrow pointing up means that the sketch point in question is free to move in the vertical direction, both up and down. Should there be DOF arrows at a given point in both directions, the point is free to move in both directions.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

13-59

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
13

Spline

+ Point

Sketching

These arrows provide visual feedback to the user while in the process of constraining the sketch.

(no display) Undefined in X and Y Directions Undefined in Y Direction only Undefined in X Direction only Defined in X and Y Directions

The system removes DOF arrows as rules are written that define the location of the sketch points.
D

Arc - Arcs have sketch points at the center and at either end. These sketch points as well as the radius of the arc may be defined if the user so desires. Circle - Circles may have the center point as well as a radius or diameter defined. Ellipse -An ellipse may have the location of its center defined; also, the parameters for the size and orientation of the ellipse are stored for future editing. Fillet - Fillets are a specialized case of arc; by definition a fillet is tangent to the objects with which it is associated. The system applies this rule as the fillet is created. Fillets may have the same information defined as other arcs, and in some cases the tangency that is assigned will define the endpoints. Line - Lines may have the sketch points at either end defined. Point - Points may be defined relative to other objects or at specific locations in space. Spline - Degree three splines may have their defining points located. Slopes of the spline at the defining points may also be defined. Splines that are of a degree other than three may be added to sketches; however, since their defining points are not located at their knot points, there is no way to locate their defining points using constraints.

D

D

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
13
13-60

D

D D

D

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Sketching

Constraining Sketches
Design Intent
The power in sketching is derived from the ability to capture design intent. This is accomplished by setting up rules that dictate how sketch objects will react to changing input. These rules are called constraints. As many or as few constraints as necessary may be applied to cause the sketch profile to update in the manner desired. Unigraphics sketches are not required to be fully constrained. A group of these rules may be thought of as a constraint set. The constraint set is comprised of two types of constraints, dimensional and geometric and are accessed from the Sketch Constraints tool bar.

The Sketch Constraints Tool Bar

Create Constraints Dimensions

Creating Dimensional Constraints
A dimensional constraint establishes the size of a sketch object (such as the length of a line or radius of an arc) or the scalar relationship between two objects (such as the distance between two points). Dimensional constraints appear in the graphics window. Unlike drafting dimensions, changing the value of the dimensional constraints changes the shape and or size of the sketch objects that are controlled by the sketch points. This changes the feature of the solid model that the sketch curves control.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

13-61

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
13

Sketching

The Dimensions icon

accesses the Dimensions dialog.

You can use the dialog to create and edit dimensions, as well as change some of the preferences. There are nine icons located near the top of the dialog box. The top left hand icon is the most useful as it infers the dimension type based on the objects that are selected and where their dimension text is located. It is also the default icon. The other eight icons are supplied for times when the system is unable to infer the desired dimension type. These different options are filters" that when selected will only allow a specific dimension type to be created. Because of this, certain types of geometry may not be selectable if they do not coincide with the dimension type selected. As dimensional constraints are being created, the dimension, its extension lines, and arrows are displayed as soon as the geometry has been selected. Drag the dimension to the desired location and place it by clicking the left mouse button. During some dimensioning the system infers a dimension type before all of the geometry has been selected. In these instances continue to select geometry until the correct dimension type is displayed, or select the icon for the dimension type desired and reselect the geometry.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
13
13-62

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Sketching

As dimensional constraints are being created, the system creates an expression. This expression's name and value are displayed in the current expression fields of the Constraints dialog box. This places the value field in overstrike mode so the user may enter the desired dimensional constraint. A slider is also provided below the value text and may be used to change the value.
Enter new name Enter new statement or numeric value

Use slider bar to change value

Below the value slider are two option menus for manipulating the appearance of the dimensional constraint. The left hand option menu is for defining how the text and arrows of the dimensional constraint will be displayed. Options are for automatic text placement where the system decides the appearance, manual text placement with the arrows inside the extension lines, or manual text placement with the arrows outside the extension lines.
Auto Placement

Manual Placement, Arrows In Manual Placement, Arrows Out

The right hand option menu is for defining whether the dimension's leader is attached to the right or left of the dimension text.
Leader From Left

Leader From Right

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

13-63

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
13

Sketching

Both of these option menus may be used before, during or after dimension creation.

Text Height
The display height of the dimension text is controlled by the text entry field at the bottom of the dialog box. This value may be changed any time the Dimensions dialog box is active. The default value is .150 inches. There are no limits to values for this field. Modifying this value changes all the dimensional constraints in the active sketch.

Dimensional Constraint Types
Inferred - Allows the system to select any of the dimension types listed below, (except perimeter) based on object selection and cursor location. Points, points on sketch curves (including spline knot points), edges, lines, arcs, datum planes, and datum axes are selectable using this method. Horizontal - Used to filter the system to specify a distance constraint between two points with respect to the X axis of the sketch coordinate system. Points, points on sketch curves (including spline knot points), edges, lines, and arcs are selectable using this method.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
13
13-64

YC ZC XC

.500

4.000

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Sketching

Vertical - Used to filter the system to specify a distance constraint between two points with respect to the Y axis of the sketch coordinate system. Points, points on sketch curves (including spline knot points), edges, lines, and arcs are selectable using this method.

YC

2.000

ZC

XC

.500

Arcs selected for 1.23 dimension

1.23

.500

Line endpoints selected for .500 dimension

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

13-65

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
13

Parallel - Used to filter the system to specify a distance constraint directly between two sketch entities. The parallel dimension is the shortest distance between the two points. All sketch objects are selectable using this method. The points selected will be inferred from the objects selected.

Sketching Perpendicular .6302 Angular . The first object selected using this method must be linear.Used to filter the system to specify an angular dimensional constraint between two lines.8502 . ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-66 p0=45. Only linear objects may be selected with this method. . the second will be a point inferred from the next object selected.507 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Used to filter the system to specify a distance constraint measured perpendicular to a selected line and a point or the normal distance. The angle is measured counterclockwise from the ends of the lines nearest the cursor upon selection.

250 Diameter. There is no graphical representation of this constraint on the graphics screen. Perimeter_p7=6. i.The Perimeter constraint is used to constrain the collective lengths of lines and arcs to a desired value. a dimensional constraint is created and its name is prefixed with Perimeter. Only arcs and circles may be selected with this method.456.Used to filter the system to specify a radial size constraint for an arc or circle. Only arcs and circles may be selected with this method.Sketching Radius . Editing Dimensional Constraints` The editing of dimensional constraints may be achieved as follows: EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-67 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . After the desired curves are selected the user chooses OK.568 Perimeter.e. p1=2. R p4=0.Used to filter the system to specify a diametral size constraint for an arc or circle.

To edit the position. the constraints are evaluated and the geometry is modified. The Delay Evaluation is a toggle on the Sketch tool bar that controls this condition. Update Model The Update Model icon located on the Sketch tool bar may be used to force the model to update without leaving the sketch function. Sketches are evaluated automatically when the Constraints dialog box is exited. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-68 Delay Evaluation At times it is advantageous not to have the geometry change until all of the dimensional constraints have been modified.Sketching D D To edit the value. NOTE: The name and value of a dimensional constraint may also be edited by using the Expression Editor.Enter a new value in the text entry field or use the slider.Select a different option from the option menu. Position . Value . As dimensional constraints are edited. Evaluate Sketch The Evaluate Sketch button is provided so that the user may control sketch evaluation when the Delay Evaluation toggle is on.Click and hold the left mouse button to drag the dimension to its new position.Select a different option from the option menu.Enter a new text size in the text entry field. simply drag a dimension's location. Text height . simply double click on the dimension and edit the value in the text box and press Enter. Leader side .Enter a new name in the text entry field. Additional editing that may be done with the Dimensions dialog as listed below: D D D D D D Name . Text placement method . Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

A toggle switch labeled Retain Dimension is supplied on the Sketch Preferences dialog box to enable the display should there be a need to display dimensions without an active sketch (such as to reference expression names between sketches. etc. Then the icons for constraints will remain on the screen after you choose the first constraint.Sketching When a sketch is deactivated the display of the dimensional constraints is disabled. plotting. The Create Constraints icon There is no dialog. a constant angle constraint. you can control-select the objects. activates the process of creating constraints. and then choosing the desired constraint icon from the upper left corner of the graphics screen. You can use MB2 to cancel creation of constraints . EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-69 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . Constraints are created by selecting the geometry. for instance. Creating Geometric Constraints A geometric constraint establishes a geometric characteristic of a sketch object (such as defining a line as being horizontal) or the type of relationship between two or more objects (such as requiring that two lines be parallel or perpendicular. If you wish to assign multiple constraints at one time. or that several arcs have the same radius). Only icons for constraints that are possible for the selected curves will be displayed.). simply dictates that the line stay at the angle it is at when the constraint is applied. Geometric constraints have no editable numeric values.

will display the symbols for all the Sometimes. the symbols may not be displayed. when the curves are very small on the screen (the view is zoomed out).Sketching Listed below are all the possible constraints and their respective icon. Point on Curve. Tangent. The other symbols are not displayed at all times. Midpoint. The following is a definition of each of the available geometric constraints: Coincident . Fixed Collinear Horizontal Vertical Parallel Perpendicular Equal Length Constant Length Displaying Constraint Symbols Constant Angle Concentric Tangent Equal Radius Coincident Point on Curve Midpoint Point on String ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-70 Constraint symbols are displayed when a sketch is active.Defines two or more linear objects as lying on or passing through the same theoretical straight line. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Defines two or more points as having the same location. Collinear . The Show All Constraints icon constraints in the active sketch. Symbols for Coincident. You may need to zoom in to see them. and Concentric are always displayed.

Defines two or more lines as being the same length.Defines fixed characteristics for geometry.Defines a line as having a constant length. This constraint is automatically created when the mirror function is used. as follows: D D D D D D D D D D Arc or circle .locates the centerpoint and defines the radii.locates the endpoint. Constant Length . Spline control point . Ellipse center .Defines a line as horizontal.defines the radius and the location of the centerpoint. Constant Angle .Defines two or more arcs as having the same radius. Point . Line .Defines two objects as being mirror images of each other. Midpoint of Curve .defines the angle and length. Horizontal . or ellipse center .Defines two or more arcs as having the same center. Ellipse . Equal Radius . Fix .locates the centerpoint. For the Midpoint of Curve constraint. NOTE: Mirror .defines the location. Equal Length .locates the centerpoint and defines the radii. Spline .Defines a line as having a constant angle. It cannot be created manually.removes all of its rigid DOFs (it cannot be rigidly rotated or rigidly dragged). EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-71 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . Arc center. Arc or elliptical arc endpoint .Sketching Concentric . Elliptical arc .Defines the location of a sketch point as coincident with the midpoint of a curve. depending on the type of geometry selected. select the curve anywhere other than at its end points.locates the control point. circle center.locates the centerpoint. elliptical arc center.

Scale. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-72 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Defines a spline. Non Uniform . Slope of Curve .Defines two or more linear objects as being parallel to each other.Defines the location of a sketch point as lying on a curve.Defines two objects as being tangent to each other. a spline will scale in the horizontal direction while keeping the original dimensions in the vertical direction during modification. A Scale constraint may not be mixed with fixing of an internal spline point as the uses of the two different constraint types are mutually exclusive. Point on String . Tangent .Defines the location of a sketch point as lying on an extracted string. Vertical .Thus constrained. and another object as being tangent to each other at the selected point. Uniform . Point on Curve .Sketching Parallel . Scale.Defines a line as vertical. selected at a defining point. Perpendicular .A spline will scale proportionally in both the horizontal and vertical when the horizontal length changes.Defines two linear objects as being perpendicular to each other.

Actions that can be taken on the listed constraints. Determines which objects will have their constraints listed. The constraints may be listed by object/s or all of the constraints of the active sketch may be listed at once. . Determines what category of constraints will be listed. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-73 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 Determines if the filtered constraint will be included or excluded in the list.Sketching Show/Remove Constraints The Show/Remove Constraints is a tool that aids you in the management of constraints. Determines what type of constraints will be listed.

or Inferred constraints. pre highlighting does not occur. The user has the option to list only the Explicit.Sketching Constraint Interrogation One way to determine what geometric constraints are present is to pass the selection ball over a sketch object. or both may be listed at the same time. Explicit and Inferred. Uniform Scale. Non Uniform ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-74 Constraint Categories There are two major categories of geometric constraints. Fix Concentric Coincident Colinear Point on Curve Point on String Midpoint on Curve Horizontal Vertical Parallel Perpendicular Tangent Equal Length Equal Radius Constant Length Constant Angle Mirror Slope of Curve Scale. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . If the selection ball passes over an object which has no constraints associated with it. the sketch object will be pre highlighted as well as other sketch objects that share the constraint and the constraint marker will appear next to the sketch objects. The constraint types and their markers are shown in the figure below. Inferred constraints are the Coincident constraints that the system has inferred and assigned. Explicit constraints are constraints that the user has created by assignment using the constraints dialog or by virtue of the creation method. If the object has a constraint associated with it.

Turn on Select Constraints (on the Selection tool bar). the associated constraints. depending on the selected constraint category. Any time there are constraints listed in the list box they may be browsed by selecting the constraint to highlight it. D D EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-75 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 Listing Box . and then choose the Delete icon. The Up and Down arrows on most keyboards will mimic this behavior. They are: Selected Object Once an object is selected. simply select the new object. Removing Constraints Constraints may be deleted 3 ways: D Highlight them in the Show/Remove Constraints dialog List box and select Remove Highlighted Constraint(s). the sketch object(s) that is associated with it is also highlighted in the graphics area. Turn on Select Constraints. The Step Up the List and Step Down the List buttons allow easy navigation through the various constraints. To view constraints associated with a different sketch object. are listed in the dialog box. depending on the selected constraint category. and then use MB3→Delete to delete selected constraint. Selected Objects Allows the selection of multiple objects. are listed in the dialog box. the associated constraints. When the constraint is highlighted in the list box. Objects may be deselected by holding the shift key down and selecting the object.Sketching Constraint Listing The constraints may also be listed in the Show/Remove Constraints dialog by selecting one of the three options at the top of the dialog window. select the constraint symbol on the graphics screen. select the constraint symbol on the graphics screen. depending on the selected constraint category. All in Active Sketch List all the constraints of the active sketch.

Undo takes the creation procedure back one step at a time. or the accelerator keys. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Dragging Geometry Under constrained geometry can be dragged by simply holding down and dragging MB1 while on the selected curve(s) or point(s). the selection toolbar changes. allows selection of all objects in the sketch - Select Constraints screen. under constrained.Sketching Undo The user may access undo from the edit pulldown on the main menu. When the sketch is under constrained the status line will indicate the number of constraints needed. the status line lists the constraint condition for the active sketch. Constraint Conditions When the Constraints dialog box is active. or over constrained. allows selection of constraint symbols on the graphics Deselect All deselects all objects that are currently selected. Selection When in the Sketcher Task Environment. the third mouse button pop up menu. A sketch may be fully constrained. It has two icons that are only available in the Sketcher. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-76 Select Sketch Objects curves and dimensions.

The design intent has been captured sufficiently when the constraint set applied to the profile causes it to update in the intended manner. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-77 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . In order to completely capture the design intent of a particular profile. Degree of freedom arrows are displayed at each point that could not be solved to identify the direction in which that point remains free to move. it may be beneficial to fully constrain the sketch. A sketch is under constrained when there is insufficient information to completely locate each sketch point. It is important to remember that there is no requirement to fully constrain a sketch. This occurs when the solver is able to completely define all sketch geometry. Each time a sketch is evaluated. the system attempts to solve the set of constraints that describe how the geometric objects are positioned and their relationships with each other.Sketching A sketch is evaluated each time a constraint is placed upon the sketch.

It is important to remember that there is no numeric input in fixing an object. The bottom point of line A has a fixed geometric constraint applied by the user. then placing a dimensional constraint on each to identify their length would cause the sketch to be over constrained. Sketch objects may be located relative to edges of a solid model. A sketch is over constrained when too much constraint information is supplied to the solver. Defining the location of an object may be accomplished in a number of ways. Fixing the location of a point fully defines the location of that point to the solver. Degree of freedom arrows may assist in the constraining process. Line A has a system applied vertical geometric constraint. specifying a geometric constraint on two lines that identifies them as being equal in length. datum planes. or positioning dimensions. An object must be created in the proper location or be otherwise located prior to fixing in order for the fix constraint to be properly applied. until the location of at least one object is defined. The degree of freedom arrow at the top of line A now points in the Y axis direction. or to datum axes using geometric constraints. dimensional constraints. This indicates the point is constrained in the X axis direction but not in the Y axis direction. however. no degree of freedom arrows will be removed. For instance. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-78 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . such as the 3 degree snap angle default for horizontal and vertical lines. some elements are partially constrained due to system applied constraints.Sketching Constraining Example Lines constrained to be horizontal LINE A Lines constrained to be vertical In the profile above.

The sketch is displayed in the last solved condition. An unwanted constraint must be removed before the system will change the geometric configuration. Dimensional constraints that are in conflict in the current configuration with the current constraint set are displayed in pink. Constraints may need to be added or removed in order for the sketcher to be able to solve the constraint set. Dimensional constraints that are not related to the over constrained condition are displayed in green. Geometry that is not related to the over constrained condition is displayed in cyan. This indicates that the constraint set that has been supplied is not solvable with the geometry in its current configuration. Geometry that is not solvable in the current configuration with the current constraint set is displayed in gray.Sketching The system highlights in yellow the geometry and dimensional constraints that are causing the over constrained condition in order to prompt for the over constrained situation to be corrected. At times the system displays all geometry in gray and all dimensional constraints in pink. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-79 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 .

The included angle of the angled lines. Step 1 Open pau_pipevise_1 and start the Modeling application.Sketching Activity 6 . - Double click on a sketch curve. The width of the slot at the bottom of the angled lines is controlled by the radius at the bottom of the slot. - 13-80 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Choose the Show/Remove Constraints icon. Design Intent Apply constraints to the curves so that the following may be controlled: The outside envelope of the part.Constraining a Profile Constrain the pipe vise profile sketch to satisfy the stated design intent. The angled lines must remain centered in the part horizontally. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 Step 2 Activate the sketch S21_PROFILE. Step 3 View the system applied constraints.

The dialog box should look similar to the graphic shown at right. - The system created constraints are now displayed in the list box. - Choose the first constraint in the list.Sketching The Show/Remove Constrains dialog box is displayed. Ensure that the Show Constraints category to Explicit. - Choose the radio button in the List Constraints For: area for All In Active Sketch. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-81 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 .

There should be one horizontal line highlighted in the graphics window.Sketching The object referred to in the list is highlighted in the graphics area. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 Step 5 Constrain the location of a point. - Select the lower endpoint of the left vertical line. - Step 4 View the degree of freedom arrows. Select the vertical datum axis. Cancel the Show/Remove Constraints dialog box. In the upper left corner of the screen choose the Point on Curve icon. the sketch points are free to move in all directions. Let the instructor know if this is not the case. Even though most of the objects in the sketch have constraints associated with them. 13-82 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Choose the Create Constraints icon. - Use the UP and DOWN arrow buttons located to the right of the list box to browse through the constraint list. This is because the system cannot locate any of the points relative to model space. - Notice that there are degree of freedom arrows at each of the sketch points.

Select the horizontal datum axis.Sketching The geometry now changes to follow the constraint. - Select the left endpoint of the bottom horizontal line. The point at the bottom of the left vertical line is now constrained in the horizontal direction. Choose the Point on Curve icon. - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-83 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 .

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-84 Step 6 Move the datum planes and axes to layer 61. Step 7 Continue adding constraints to satisfy the stated design intent. one of the arrows on the opposite end of those lines has disappeared. Choose Datums and choose OK. Enter 61 in the dialog box layer field and press Enter. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . due to the horizontal and vertical constraints on the lines that share the sketch point. - Double click on a sketch curve to activate the sketch. - Choose Finish. Choose Format→Move to Layer Choose Type. The degree of freedom arrows go away at this point. Choose Select All and OK. The datums have served their purpose of locating the sketch. You will now move them to ease selection of objects and clean up the screen display. The shared sketch point at the bottom of the left vertical line is now constrained in both the horizontal and vertical directions.Sketching The geometry now changes to follow the new constraint. and.

Hold the Ctrl key down and select the bottom horizontal line and the lower endpoint of the line originating from the arc center. Repeat the process for the other side of the slot. Choose Collinear and Equal Length.Sketching - Choose Create Constraints. - - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-85 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . Choose Point on Curve. Select the end of the short vertical line on the same side of the arc. Select the arc at the bottom of the slot taking note on which side you choose. Choose Tangent. Hold the Ctrl key down and select the two horizontal lines at the top of the profile. - Now Equal Length - Choose Deselect All.

- Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .75. Drag the dimension to position it and select with MB1 to place it. Select the line between the midpoint and the arc center. Select the left vertical line and place the dimension for it. With the constraint type set to infer. Change the value to 3. Now vertical - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-86 Adding dimensional constraints to satisfy the controlling portions of the design intent will allow the profile to be changed by modifying the numerical values. Fit the view if necessary. select the bottom horizontal line. - Choose Deselect All.Sketching - Choose Midpoint. Type in a value of 5 and press Enter. - Choose the Dimensions icon. Choose Vertical.

avoiding its control points.5 and choose OK. Place this angular dimension and change its value to the 'p' number assigned to the other angular dimension. Select the line connecting the arc center and the midpoint and place this vertical dimension. Select the bottom end of the right angled line. avoiding its control points. not endpoint) of the left angled line. - Select here first Select here second - Select the left end of the top right horizontal line. Select the lower end (over half way.25. Place the radius dimension and change its value to . Place the angular dimension and change its value to 45°. Select the right end of the top left horizontal line.5. Change its value to 1. - Select the arc at the bottom of the slot. - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-87 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . Change its value to . Fit the view if necessary.Sketching - Select the top left horizontal line and place the dimension.

we would have to constrain the sketch in a different manner. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Notice that the depth of the notch is unchanged as a result of this change. - 13 Double click on the first angular dimensional constraint that was created and change it from a 45° to 30°. Step 8 Change the constraints on the sketch to alter the included angle in the notch. Step 9 Choose File "Close"All Parts. 13-88 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Choose Finish.Sketching The Status line now informs you that the sketch is fully constrained. Remember that there is no need to fully constrain the profile if it is updating in the manner desired. Should that have not been our intent.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-89 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 .Sketching Activity 7 . - Ensure that the Modeling application is active. Step 3 Activate the sketch containing the profile. Double click on a sketch curve to activate the sketch. Fit the view.Constraining the Gasket In this activity you will fully constrain the sketch that was created earlier. Step 2 Make Layer 61 Selectable in order to view the reference features. Step 1 Open ***_gasket_1 where *** represent your initials or open pau_gasket_1 and save as ***_gasket_1a.

Choose All in Active Sketch.Sketching Use the steps on the following pages to constrain the profile as shown below. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Choose Show/Remove Constraints. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-90 Step 4 Review the existing constraints. Set Show Constraints to Explicit.

Choose Cancel. Notice the two Equal Radius symbols. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-91 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . This is due to the creation method that was used. - - Set Show Constraints to Inferred. Notice how each curve in the profile is tangent to its adjacent curve. - - Toggle Show All Constraints on. Select one of the circles. - Select the circle on the other side and notice how the system indicates an arc to which it is coincident. - In the Show/Remove Constraints dialog.Sketching - Review the constraints by clicking on each one in the listing and observe which curves are highlighted in the graphic window. choose Selected Objects. Notice that there are no constraints listed. Now observe that a Coincident constraint is listed.

avoiding control points along the way. The arcs that share this constraint are highlighted. Step 5 Constrain the sketch. The circle and arc that share that point of incidence are highlighted. - Choose the Select Sketch Objects icon. - Select the center circle and the bottom arc. Notice the Degree Of Freedom markers associated with the sketch points. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . from the Selection - Place the cursor over one of the Equal Radius symbols.Sketching - Choose the Select Constraints icon toolbar. remember that these are supplied to give feedback on the constraint condition of the sketch. These markers will be removed from the display as the sketch points are explicitly located. - Place the cursor over one of the Coincident symbols. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-92 - Choose Create Constraints.

- The entire profile moves to follow the constraint just applied. Choose Point on Curve. Step 6 Locate the profile in space. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-93 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 .Sketching - Choose Concentric. - Select the arc center of the center circle and the horizontal datum axis.

constraining it to fall on the centerline" represented by the datum axis. Repeat the above actions for the right circle. - Note that the degree of freedom markers at the large arc center have been removed. - 13-94 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Select the arc center of the left circle and the horizontal datum axis. this point is now explicitly located. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 Step 7 Apply Point on Curve design intent.Sketching - Select the arc center of the center circle again and the vertical datum axis. The design intent is that the arc center of all three circles lie on the same horizontal centerline. Choose Point on Curve. Choose Point on Curve.

- EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-95 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . Choose Equal Radius. points and curves have a different constraint set than those of two curves. Also note that the Degree Of Freedom markers at the selected points have been removed in the vertical direction. Step 8 Applying equal radius design intent. The upper and lower center arcs are intended to be the same radius. - Select the upper and lower arcs of the profile. Be sure not to include control points in the selection process.Sketching Note how the profile changes shape to obey the constraints as they are applied. The circles on either end are intended to be the same size as shown by the dimension. These points has been constrained in the vertical direction but are still free to move in the horizontal direction.

Arrows In. 13 Step 9 Apply dimensional constraints to define the size of the profile. Place the dimension. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13-96 - Use the Inferred dimension type to create all of the dimensions shown below. Create a horizontal dimension between the arc center of the left circle and the arc center of the center circle. - Change Auto Placement to Manual Placement. - Select the center circle and place the dimension. Choose the Dimensions icon. Location of the dimension is not as important as being able to read it.Sketching - Repeat the process for the two small circles. - Change the value of the dimension to 2 and press Enter. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

625.25.5. Select the lower arc and place the dimension. Change the value of the dimension to 1. Create a horizontal dimension between the arc centers of the two smaller circles and place the dimension. - Select one of the end circles and place the dimension. Change the value of the dimension to . Select one of the end arcs and place the dimension. Change the value of the dimension to 5. - The status line indicates that the sketch needs 5 constraints in order to be fully constrained. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-97 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 .Sketching - Change the value of the dimension to 2.5. Change the value of the dimension to . Notice that we forgot to create a concentric constraint between the upper arc and the center circle.5. The status line indicates that the sketch needs 2 more constraints.

- Double click on the dimension with the value 5.Sketching - Choose Create Constraints.25. Choose Concentric. - The status line now states that the Sketch is fully constrained. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 - Choose Create Constraints to exit that function. Select the center circle and the upper arc. Step 10 Change the design intent by making the gasket longer. 13-98 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . avoiding control points.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-99 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . - Choose Finish. Step 11 Choose File"Close"Save and Close.Sketching - Edit the value to 7.25. Notice that the profile updates and the tangent condition is maintained.

Unigraphics allows Reference objects within sketches. Reference curves are ignored during sweep operations. The value for this reference dimension will be updated as the sketch is changed. or Dimension. Curve. but it does not control the sketch geometry with which it is associated. 13-100 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . set the radio button to the status desired. select the object(s) and choose OK or Apply. The Convert To/From Reference icon is located in the sketch management area of the Sketch Tools dialog box. To support these needs. Additionally. sketch curves may need to be associated to other sketch curves that are not intended to represent a portion of the swept feature. Reference curves are displayed in gray color and phantom line font.Sketching Convert To/From Reference At times it is nice to be able to see what the effects of a change are numerically. regardless of the preference setting. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 To change the status of the objects. Reference dimensional constraints are shown in white color and only the value portion of the expression is shown. These reference objects may be either curves or dimensional constraints. An option menu is provided to filter for All (the default). but adding a dimensional constraint to do this causes the sketch to be over constrained.

but its simplicity allows the concept of over constrained to be easily shown. Step 2 Create a sketch on Layer 21. Design Intent Apply constraints to control the length and width of the sketch. you will constrain and edit a simple sketch to change the design intent. Change the work layer to 21. - Choose OK. This configuration is not one that you would likely sketch.Constraint Conditions In this activity. - Choose Sketch.Sketching Activity 8 . - Start the Modeling application. The shape of the sketch should remain rectangular. Width Length Step 1 Open pau_seedpart_in. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-101 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 .

- Choose the Show/Remove Constraints icon. Select a cursor location. Choose Cancel. - Choose the Rectangle icon. - - Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Select an endpoint of the bottom horizontal line and the horizontal datum axis. then drag and select a second cursor location to create the rectangle. Select an endpoint of the left vertical line and the vertical datum axis. Choose Point on Curve.Sketching Step 3 Create a rectangle. - Step 4 Interrogate the constraints that currently exist on this sketch. Highlight the top constraint in the list and use the down arrow button to browse through the constraints. Choose the Create Constraints icon. Set the Show Constraints to Explicit. Choose Cancel. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-102 - Step 5 Apply constraints to locate the sketch on the sketch plane. Choose the radio button for All In Active Sketch.

Type 61 in the destination layer field and choose OK. Double click on a sketch curve.500 - Choose the Dimensions icon. - Choose Finish.750 p2=4. Change the value to 4. select the bottom horizontal line and place the dimension. p3=2. Choose Format→Move to Layer Select the reference objects and choose OK. With the dimension type set to Infer. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-103 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 Step 7 Apply dimensional constraints to control the length and width of the part as per the design intent. Step 6 Move the reference features to the proper layer.Sketching - Choose Point on Curve. .5.

Choose OK. Change the value to 2.Sketching - Select the left hand vertical line and place the dimension.274 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 - p4=31. the degree of freedom arrows are eliminated. Select the lower left endpoint and the upper right endpoint to define the line. along with the geometric constraints of horizontal and vertical that the system applied to the lines due to the manner of construction. p5=5. Choose the Line icon.75. and 13-104 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - As dimensional constraints are being created. The sketch is fully constrained using one vertical and one horizontal dimensional constraint.430 Step 8 Create a diagonal line in the sketch and convert it to reference. Design Change Modify the sketch so that it can be controlled by the angle and length of a diagonal line. Choose the Convert To/From Reference icon ensure that Reference is toggled On.

The system changes the color of the sketch objects that have constraints applied to them that are associated to the over constrained condition. Select the right end of the lower horizontal line and the right end of the diagonal line. Step 9 Apply an angular dimensional constraint. one or more of the offending constraints must by removed. Notice that the sketch configuration does not change when the value is modified. The sketch is over constrained.Sketching - Select the diagonal line and choose OK. Remember. The system leaves the geometry in its last solved state until the over constrained condition is resolved.5. In this case all of the active sketch curves and dimensional constraints are displayed in yellow. - The angle will be applied to the ends of the lines closest to the cursor position in a counter clockwise manner. Choose the Dimensions icon. To correct the over constrained condition. the new design intent is to drive the sketch with angular and diagonal length dimensions. At this point the system has more information than is required. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-105 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . and indicate a location for the angular dimension. - Select the diagonal line and place a parallel dimension. Change the value of the dimension to 6. Step 10 Apply a parallel dimensional constraint.

500 p3=2. p5=6.500 Step 11 Convert sketch dimensions to reference. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-106 - Choose the Convert To/From Reference icon.000 p2=4. The reference dimensional constraints are shown to reflect the value only.750 p4=35. Step 12 Choose File "Close"All Parts.Sketching - Choose Cancel. Another method of resolving the over constrained condition would have been to delete the horizontal and vertical dimensions. and choose OK. Reference dimensions do not apply rules to the geometry to which they are attached. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The sketch is returned to a fully constrained condition. Select the horizontal and vertical dimensions. - Choose Finish.

The level of constraint. partial or full. is determined by the design intent and what is necessary to capture it. Constrained Sketches Created Dimensional Constraints Edited Dimensional Constraints Created Geometric Constraints Created Inferred Geometric Constraints EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-107 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 . A sketch parametrically controls curves and captures design intent. Sketches may be used to define a base feature. Created a sketch on an existing solid face. In this lesson you: D D D D D D D D Created a sketch on a fixed datum plane.Sketching SUMMARY This lesson introduced the concept of sketch creation. and additional associative features to the base feature. Freehand sketched curves in a sketch. To do this constraints are applied to sketch objects in order to capture the design intent. guide paths.

Sketching (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 13-108 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-1 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 . Extrude a body with offsets.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Swept Features and Boolean Operations Lesson 14 PURPOSE To introduce Swept Features and Boolean Operations. Create a solid by sweeping a profile along a guide curve. you will be able to: D D D D Extrude a body. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson. Create a Body of Revolution.

solid edges. and sheet bodies. solid faces. Section string Axis Resulting feature A Sweep Along Guide body is one that has been swept along a guide string. The section string may be composed of explicit curves.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Types of Swept Features Swept features/bodies are created by extruding. sketch curves. 14-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . An Extruded Body is one that is swept in a linear direction for a specified distance. Section string Resulting feature Direction A Body of Revolution is one that has been rotated around a specified axis. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 Guide string Section string Resulting feature The features/bodies that are created will be associated with both the section string and the guide string. revolving. or sweeping a section string.

By default the system selects the entire sketch when any sketch curve is selected.select any one curve belonging to the sketch. D Sweeping a partial sketch is a technique that is used when one sketch may define multiple features. To select individual curves within a sketch .Swept Features and Boolean Operations Creating Swept Features from Sketches When sweeping a sketch you may or may not want to sweep all of the sketch curves. When using a sketch to define the section string do one of the following: D To select all the curves in a sketch .choose the Curve or Chain Curves option. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 . and then select the desired curves.

The extrusion starts at. and is normal to.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Extrude The Insert"Form Feature"Extrude option allows a solid body/feature to be created by sweeping planar. The extrusion will be normal to the plane of the section string. Trim Between Two Faces/Plane option allows the start and end of the extrusion to be associated with specified faces or planes of the same body regardless of the location of the section string geometry. D Extrusion Options Direction & Distance option allows specification of the extrusion direction and the start and end distances of the extrusion relative to the plane of the selected section string. the plane of the section string. When set to Solid" the following rules will apply: D D Extruding a set of closed planar connected curves creates a solid body. controls whether a solid body or a sheet body is created when extruding section string geometry. The extrusion does not need to start at the plane of the section string. section string geometry in a linear direction for a specified distance. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 14-4 Trim to Face/Plane option allows the end distance of an extrusion to be associated to an existing solid face or datum plane. Extruding a curve or set of planar connected curves which are not closed creates a sheet body unless extrude with offsets is used. Extruding a set of closed planar connected curves with another closed set within the boundary of the first creates a solid with an interior hole. Rules for Extruding Section String Objects The Body Type switch found under Preferences→Modeling. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Swept Features and Boolean Operations Activity 1 . As you work through this lesson and learn new sweep skills. First Offset . Choose Cycle Vector Direction so that the vector points down and choose OK. . . Fit the View. Step 1 Open part file pau_draglink_2. - Choose Extrude. Choose Direction & Distance. 0 152. Step 3 Save the part. . and start the modeling application. you will continue to develop the draglink by applying those skills.Swept Features In this activity you will start to create the draglink part. . EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 . Second Offset . . End Distance . Taper Angle . Step 2 Extrude the curves. save as ***_draglink_2. Key in the following: Start Distance .5 0 0 0 - - Choose OK. Select all of the curves and choose OK.

or a Boolean operation (Unite. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 14-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . the following menu appears for the Boolean Operation. Subtract. Unigraphics senses when a solid already exists in a file and another is being created. The Boolean Operations may also be created as a separate feature using the Insert"Feature Operation options shown in the menu below. or Intersect) may be performed on the two solids during creation to make one resultant solid. When using these operations.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Boolean Operations Boolean operations are used to create a single solid body out of two or more existing solid bodies. The new solid may be created as a separate solid using Create. a Target Solid and a Tool Solid need to be specified to perform the boolean operation.

the block is chosen as the target solid. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-7 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 . Defining Target and Tool Solids The Target solid is the solid body on which operations are executed.Swept Features and Boolean Operations NOTE: Creation of Booleans as separate features allows for future editing of the Boolean operations. to unite the two cylinders to the block. In the figure below. The Tool solid is the solid body that operates upon the target solid.

material density. Therefore. Unite This option allows two or more solid bodies to be combined into one. of the Target Solid.Swept Features and Boolean Operations NOTE: The target solid passes its attributes on to the Boolean operation result. etc. the resultant solid inherits the layer. Target solid Completed solid ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 14-8 Tool solids Before After Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Target solid Tool solids The Boolean Operations are described below.

Swept Features and Boolean Operations Subtract This option allows material to be removed from a solid body (Target Body) by using another solid body as the Tool Solid. leaving empty space where the Tool body existed. The resultant solid will be that portion which is common to both of the selected solids. Tool solid Target solid Before Tool solid After Intersect This Boolean allows a new solid to be created from two solids. Before After Target solid Tool solid EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 .

or intersect a tool solid with a target solid and the two solids do not touch. subtract. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 Zero thickness Generator Curves 14-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Swept Features and Boolean Operations Swept Feature Errors If you attempt to unite a tool solid within a target solid and there is no change in topology. the system would warn you with the following message. the system would warn you with the following message. If you attempt to unite. the system would warn you with the following message. If you attempt to subtract a tool solid from a target solid and the operation would produce a zero thickness.

Swept Features and Boolean Operations Rules for Extruding With Taper D The Taper Start radio buttons determine if the taper starts At Defining String or At Start Distance when a taper is specified. If the section string included interior holes. the holes would be tapered in the opposite direction to the outside objects. Positive Taper Angle Normal vector D D D Negative Taper Angle Plane of selected objects EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 . A negative angle creates an outward taper. A positive taper angle creates an inward taper.

The arrow displayed in solid font is the Extrusion Direction arrow.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Extruding With Offsets Once an extrusion method has been specified. Positive Extrusion Direction Positive Offset Direction ZC YC XC Using positive values in the First Offset or Second Offset field will offset the extrusion in the direction of the arrow. indicating the direction that positive values will be extruded. arrows are displayed in the graphics area to relay information. Using negative values in the First Offset or Second Offset field will offset the extrusion in the opposite direction of the dashed arrow.) Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Offset Offset Examples Section Geometry ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 14-12 Offset on arrow side (Positive) Section Geometry Offset on opposite side (Negative) Offset on both sides (One offset neg. indicating the direction that positive offset values will be applied. The extrusion values as well as the offset values may be entered in the Parameters menu.. one offset pos. The arrow displayed in dashed font is the Offset Direction arrow.

Step 1 Open the part pau_extrude_1. Choose OK to accept the default direction (vector pointing up).Swept Features and Boolean Operations Activity 2 . additional extruded features will be added to complete the part. Choose OK. Step 3 Create a tube by extruding with an offset. large circle as the section geometry. Select the inside. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 . If it is pointing to the center use a positive value for the Second Offset.5 0 .Extruding with Offsets In this activity. - Choose Extrude. use a negative value for the Second Offset.25 0 - If the offset vector is pointing away from the center of the part. Choose Direction Distance. Step 2 Save the file as ***_extrude_1 where *** represent your initials. Enter the following values: Start Distance = End Distance = First Offset = Second Offset = Taper Angle = 0 2.

The solid feature created to this length is also defined as being . ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 Step 4 Create a flange at the top of the cylinder.25 units thick inside the generator curve. Choose Create.Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Press Enter. Choose Insert"Feature Operation"Unite. The current model should look like the figure below. The selected curve is extruded from its origin. Choose Extrude. Select the tube as the tool body. - 14-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . to a distance 2. Select the base as the target body. normal to its creation plane as was indicated by the solid arrow. Choose OK. This thickness was defined by the value entered in the Second Offset field due to the direction of the dashed arrow. Choose Fit from the third mouse button Pop Up Menu.5 units from the start distance.

Select this edge - Choose OK. Choose Cycle Vector Direction so that the vector points down and choose OK.Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Select the top outer edge of the cylindrical extrusion. Choose Direction Distance. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-15 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 .

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 Step 5 Subtract an extrusion from the flange. This thickness was defined by the values entered in the First and Second Offset fields relative to dashed arrow.25 0 - Choose OK. Choose Insert"Feature Operation"Unite. normal to its creation plane as was indicated by the solid arrow.Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Key in: Start Distance = End Distance = First Offset = Second Offset = Taper Angle = 0 .25 units from the start distance. to a distance . The selected edge is extruded from its origin. 14-16 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The solid feature created to this length is also defined as being .25 0 . Select the main body as the target body. Choose Create. Choose OK.25 units thick outside the generator edge. - Choose Extrude. Select the feature that was just created as the tool body.

Select this edge - Choose OK.15 . The edge must be extruded with the offsets in the proper direction to create the groove shown below. Choose Direction Distance. Choose Cycle Vector Direction so that the vector points down and choose OK. - Key in: Start Distance = End Distance = First Offset = Second Offset = Taper Angle = 0 .275 0 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-17 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 .Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Select the edge as shown to extrude.075 .

Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Choose OK. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 14-18 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Choose Subtract. Step 6 Save and close the part.

D D D EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-19 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 . Open section strings will always be swept into a solid body when using the sweep with offset option.e. Rules for Sweeping Section String Objects Along a Guide D Just like other sweep types. providing the Modeling Preferences Body Type is set to Solid. An open section string swept along a guide path that forms an enclosed loop will automatically cap the end faces. solid or sheet bodies are created based on the current Modeling Preferences Body Type setting and the closure condition of the curves (i. open string or enclosed string). Only one Section String and only one Guide String may be selected.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Sweep along Guide The Insert"Form Feature"Sweep along Guide option allows features to be created by sweeping a section string along a guide string.

The section string also needs to be located on an end point of one of the guide string objects.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Guide Strings Containing Sharp Corners When using Sweep along Guide where the guide string contains sharp corners. it is recommended that the section string be placed away from a sharp corner. Guide string Two separate line entities Section string here located on an endpoint Do not put Section string here ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 14-20 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Solid body Unigraphics NX .

The Cue prompts to Select section string. Choose OK to accept the direction. Sweep along Guide to create a solid body. Choose OK. - - Select the yellow guide string and confirm the selections as necessary. - The cue prompts to Specify Sweep offsets and a dialog box displays for First Offset and Second Offset. Guide string Section string - Choose Insert"Form Feature"Sweep along Guide. . The curves are displayed in two colors. Step 1 Open part file pau_sweep_1 and start the Modeling application.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Activity 3 .Sweeping Along a Guide In this activity. but they will not be used here. Sweep the section string along the guide string to create a shape that could be used as a base or platform. Offsets work the same way as for extrusions. use the third method of sweeping. Select the orange curves and confirm the selections as necessary. Choose OK. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-21 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 The cue prompts to Select guide string.

- Optional Challenge . Choose OK on the dialog box to create the solid body. The Sweep along Guide function may be used to sweep any section string along a guide string. do not save. this time use a .Undo the solid and create it again. Shade the display if desired to better view the model. The open section string was swept along the full length of the guide string and the system automatically caps the open ends to produce a solid body. 14-22 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The part should resemble the figure shown. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 Step 2 Close the part.25 single offset toward the outside of the curves. The base is created.Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Ensure that the First and Second Offsets are set to 0 (zero).

there is a possibility that multiple sweep areas may exist. The system will prompt you to define a region when the selected generator geometry is made up of one of the following: D D Noncontiguous geometry that makes up a closed loop. Region 1 Region 2 Selecting these six curves produces two possible sweep regions. Example of noncontiguous curves. Noncontiguous closed loop made up of 4 curves. Geometry that provides more than one possible sweep area.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Defining a Sweep Region In some cases when sweep generator geometry is selected. At these times you will be prompted by the system to define a region to sweep. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-23 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 .

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 Feature to be created.Defining a Sweep Region In this activity you will continue to develop the draglink part. Step 1 Make ***_draglink_2 the active part. Step 2 Create a feature by sweeping curves along a path. - Make layer 42 the work layer and all other layers invisible. 14-24 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Notice that there is no top to the I Beam shape.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Activity 4 . Generator geometry.

. Key in the following: First Offset . Select the I Beam body as the tool body. 0 - - - - Choose Create. Make layer 1 the work layer and layer 43 selectable. Fit the view. Indicate the region by selecting inside the I Beam shape. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-25 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 Choose OK. These curves will be used to define the sweep cross section. - Choose Insert"Form Feature"Sweep along Guide. 0 Second Offset . Select the first body created as the target body. Choose OK. Select the curves shown above for the section string and choose OK. Fit the view. Choose Insert"Feature Operation"Unite. Step 3 Save the part. Define the guide string by selecting the yellow curves and choose OK. . .Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Make layer 41 selectable. .

First Offset and Second Offset function in the same manner as the offsets discussed in extruded bodies. D Body of Revolution Options Axis & Angle .This option allows creation of a feature on the target solid by revolving section curves between two trimming faces or datum planes. The plane of the selected curves is considered zero degrees.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Revolve The Insert"Form Feature"Revolve option allows you to create a feature by rotating a section string around an axis through a specified angle. The angles entered determine the number of degrees the system revolves the selected curves about the selected axis.This option allows creation of a feature on the target solid by revolving the section geometry to a trimming face or datum plane. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .This option allows creation of a single feature by revolving the section curves about a specified axis. D The amount of rotation is determined by entering a Start Angle and End Angle. The total number of degrees cannot exceed 360. the rotation must be a full 360° and the Modeling Preferences Body Type switch must be set to Solid. The Right Hand rule determines direction of swept. a solid or sheet body is created based on the closure condition of the curves and current Body Type setting found under Preferences→Modeling. D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 14-26 D Trim To Face/Plane . Rules for Revolving Section String Objects Just like with extruded section strings. Entering a Start Angle which is greater than the End Angle causes the system to sweep in the direction of negative rotation. Trim Between Two Faces/Planes . Exceptions apply as follows: D Revolving open section strings will cause the system to automatically cap the end faces to produce a solid body however.

the entire string is then selected. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-27 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 Chain Direction . pick any one curve and choose OK. The Chain Curves option is an easy way to select a group of contiguous curves. Select the curves as shown below.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Activity 5 . - Choose OK twice. Select this end of this object first Select this object second or choose OK.Creating a Body of Revolution In this activity. The cue line will prompt you to Select Start Curve of Chain. - Choose Revolve. Care must be taken to select the first object such that the system may chain toward the last object. the start of the chain must be defined as well as the chain direction. If the loop is closed. you will create revolved features using a variety of methods. Choose Axis Angle. Step 2 Select and Revolve the Section String. Step 1 Open part file pau_revolve_1. If the loop is open as below. - Choose Chain Curves from the dialog box.

or an open section string may be revolved with offsets to form a solid shell using any angle values. - Key in the following: Start Angle . . . - Choose Cancel and then Undo (third mouse button pop up). Step 3 Revolve a closed section string with an Offset. .J. A solid revolved body has been created from an open section string. . End Angle . End Angle. Remember. . and Offsets. 0 360 0 0 - Choose OK.K values to define vector - Select the Datum Axis and choose OK. . Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Select object or enter I. A dialog box displays fields for the Start Angle. . . ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 14-28 - Shade the part to check the shape of the solid body. Now use the same section string as before to create a new revolved body using an offset and an angle to form a shell.Swept Features and Boolean Operations The cue prompts you to Enter Direction . First Offset . if a solid body is desired through a sweep of less than 360° the section string must be closed. Second Offset .

.25 - Choose OK. The cue line should still be prompting to Select section string. Choose Axis Angle as the method of revolution. . EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-29 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 . Key in the following: Start Angle . . Step 4 Revolve a solid face using Axis and Angle option. Select the Datum Axis and choose OK.Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Choose Revolve. End Angle . . Second Offset . . First Offset . . (Datum Axis). The Right Hand Rule for Positive Rotation applies. 0 180 0 . Select the section string again and confirm the selection. . Now close one end of the solid without creating any new section string geometry by revolving an existing face. . Plane of curves Notice that the revolution starts at the plane of the curves and revolves in a CCW direction with respect to the positive axis of rotation.

as the rotation point. . First Offset . . .Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Choose Solid Face from the dialog box. . Select the solid face as shown and confirm the selection. as shown below. End Angle . Second Offset . 0 -90 0 0 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Choose OK twice. Select this face - Choose Axis Angle as the method of revolution. . Choose XC Axis and choose OK. Select the far end point of the edge. . Select left end of the top linear edge of the selected face ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 14-30 - Key in the following: Start Angle . . .

Add a lip to the outside edge of the part by extending the outside edges of the top planar face with an offset value and height value equal to half the shell thickness. Target solid Tool solid - Choose OK. - Choose Create. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-31 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 . Step 5 Close the part do not save. Select the target and tool solids as shown below. Choose Insert"Feature Operation"Unite. The cue line prompts to Choose boolean operation from the dialog box that is to be performed with the revolved feature.This shell is one of two molded parts that must fit together. - Optional Challenge .Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Choose OK. The model should now appear as shown with one end enclosed.

Step 2 Create a body of revolution. Layer 1 will remain the work layer.Adding a Body of Revolution In this activity you will continue to develop the draglink part. EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . 14 Generator geometry. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14-32 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual Feature to be created. Step 1 Make ***_draglink_2 the active part and start the modeling application. - Make layer 44 selectable and all other layers invisible.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Activity 6 .

. Step 3 Save the part. . Select section string as shown below and choose OK. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-33 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 Choose OK. Choose Reset and OK to define the revolution point. Section String - Choose Axis Angle. Second Offset . First Offset . Key in the following: Start Angle . . Choose OK. . Select the last feature created as the tool body. .Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Choose Insert"Form Feature"Revolve. . 0 360 0 0 - - Choose Create. Select the main body as the target body. Define the axis direction by choosing ZC Axis and choose OK. Choose Insert"Feature Operation"Unite. End Angle . . . .

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 14-34 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Swept Features and Boolean Operations Trimming Face Options When using the Trim to Face/Plane or Trim Between Two Faces/Plane options. Extend Trim Face option extends the face/Plane infinitely. it must be the portion that the boolean operation effects. This dialog controls how the trimming face/plane will interact with the cross section string. the following dialog will appear. If only a portion of the cross section geometry intersects the trimming face/plane. Do not Extend Trim Face option will only allow the operation to succeed if the cross section geometry or a portion of the cross section geometry intersects the trimming face/plane.

Swept Features and Boolean Operations Activity 7 . EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-35 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 . Step 1 Open part file pau_revolve_2. solid edges. Choose Revolve. - Remember. curves. a section string may be composed of any combination of solid faces. Step 2 Create the Body of Revolution. Filtering for specific object types may be accomplished by choosing an option from the dialog box.Revolving and Trimming to a Face In this activity you will revolve a small area on the top of the face shown below. Select this edge. - Choose Solid Edge to filter for solid edges. For the first part of the section string. to create a curved open shape on the top edge of the bracket. if necessary. select the front top edge of the solid and. or sheet bodies by selecting it in the graphics area. confirm the selection.

resetting the filter to all types. The region (area) to be revolved must be specified. The Cue line prompts to Define Region Point for Cut Section. Without filtering.Swept Features and Boolean Operations The entire edge will highlight. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Select the other two edges as indicated below. select the orange line. Select this line. - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 14-36 - Choose OK to confirm that all objects have been selected for the section string. confirming the selections if necessary. - Choose OK to complete the edge selection. confirming it if necessary. Select these two edges.

choose OK. Select face : 14 A datum axis has been created to use as the axis of rotation. The Cue prompts to Choose revolution method. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-37 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ . Now the defined region may be revolved and trimmed to a specified face. Ensure that the both Offset values are set to 0 and choose OK on the Revolved Body dialog box to create the revolution without offsets. - Choose the Datum Axis and then choose OK. - Filter for Solid Face and choose the solid face as shown. - Choose the Trim To Face option.Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Select the region surrounded by the highlighted objects. Select region : The rectangular region will highlight in a cyan color.

do not save. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 14-38 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Intersect). Subtract.Swept Features and Boolean Operations The rotation will occur around the specified axis. - Step 3 Close the part. The Cue prompts to Choose boolean operation from the dialog box (Unite. - Choose Unite to unite the revolved feature to the solid model. Fit the view.

- Make layer 45 the work layer. Generator geometry. - Choose Extrude. Step 2 Extrude a section string to a face.Extruding to a Face In this activity you will complete the development of the draglink part. Step 1 Make ***_draglink_2 the active part and start the modeling application. and all other layers invisible.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Activity 8 . EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-39 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 . layer 1 selectable.

. . Select the shaded face shown below. 0 Second Offset . . Choose Cycle Vector Direction so that the vector points down and choose OK. 0 aper Angle . Key in the following: First Offset . . Section String - Choose Trim to Face/Plane. . . 0 - Choose OK. - Select this face. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 14-40 - Choose OK. Toggle Do not Extend Trim Face on.Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Select the section string as shown below and choose OK.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-41 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 . Step 3 Save and close the part. Choose Cancel.Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Choose Subtract.

In this lesson you: D D D D D D Extruded a body. and sheet bodies. solid edges. The section string may be composed of explicit curves. Applied boolean operations. Extruded with offsets. solid faces. Boolean operations are used to create a single solid body out of two or more existing solid bodies. Created a Swept Feature Along a Guide. revolving. or sweeping a section string. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14 14-42 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Swept Features and Boolean Operations SUMMARY Swept features are created by extruding. Extruded to a face. Created a Body of Revolution. sketch curves.

Edit a feature's parameters and position. Edit feature parameters during playback. Rename a feature. Move a Feature. Unsuppress a feature. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 .Editing the Model Editing the Model Lesson 15 PURPOSE To manipulate solid body features by editing their parameters. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson. you will be able to: D D D D D D D D D Playback the construction of a model. Suppress a feature. Delete a Feature. Reattach a feature to a different face.

Some of the Edit options are outside the scope of this class.Editing the Model Common Features of the Edit Pull Down Menu The Edit pull down menu offers common choices that relate to changing existing solid bodies and features. Edit Feature Toolbar All icons not shown ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 15-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Those that are within the scope are documented here.

Editing the Model Delayed Update on Edit When enabled. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-3 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 . feature updates are delayed while edits are made. a feature move. Delayed Update on Edit If Delayed Update on Edit is OFF. Update This option allows the user to control when the solid model is recalculated and the display updated with the edits previously made when Delayed Update on Edit is enabled. followed by an edit to another feature may be accomplished without updating the model until after both edits are complete. NOTE: Delayed Update on Edit may not be used to delay a delete. If Delayed Update on Edit is ON. the Delayed Update on Edit option allows the user to control when the system performs the display updates based on the edits performed. This option is a toggle between ON and OFF. the part is updated after the completion of each edit function. suppress or unsuppress feature operation. This saves time on complex models with many features. For example. Off is the default setting.

NOTE: The system will automatically update the model when the part file is saved. choose the Update icon in the Edit Feature toolbar or Edit"Update in the Menu bar and the feature updates are performed. The Status Line tracks and reports the update activity.Editing the Model To view the effects of edits on the model. Update ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 15-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Editing the Model Editing Features Using the Edit Feature toolbar or the Edit→Feature option allows existing solid bodies and features to be altered and manipulated while maintaining any implied or predefined associativity. Edit Feature Toolbar Edit Parameters Edit Move Positioning Feature Suppress Unsuppress Playback All icons not shown Edit Feature Pull Down Menu EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-5 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 .

Select the feature(s) to be suppressed then choose Apply or OK. Unsuppress This option restores previously suppressed features. a list of all suppressed features is displayed in the Unsuppress Feature dialog box. but are temporarily removed from the model and display. edit. Suppressed features still actually exist within the math model. After the Suppress Feature icon is selected. other features may also be unsuppressed by association. 15 After the Unsuppress Feature icon is selected. such as small holes and blends. and display time. the associated features are also suppressed.Editing the Model Suppress The Suppress Feature option simulates the temporary removal of one or more features from the solid body and its display. their display may be restored using Unsuppress Feature. The removal of non critical features. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . and then unsuppress the blend. the blend need not be deleted. from the model for other applications. Creation of features in locations where conflicting geometry exists. This speeds up the creation. Since the suppressed features still exist. object selection. When a feature that has associated features is suppressed. For example: if there is a need to position a feature using an edge that has already been blended. making it easier to work with. Suppressing features facilitates: D D D Temporary reduction in the size of the model. Suppress the blend. Select the feature(s) to be unsuppressed then choose Apply or OK. When features are unsuppressed. a list of all features is displayed in the Suppress Feature dialog box. create and position the new feature.

a second Move Feature dialog box will present four methods available to move the feature: D D D D Delta XC. Features whose position is determined via associative positioning methods must be moved using the Edit"Feature"Positioning option. When you select the Move Feature icon .Editing the Model Move Choosing Move Feature allows a feature that is not associatively positioned to be moved to a new position. YC. Once you select a feature. the Move Feature dialog box will appear. ZC To a Point Rotate Between Two Axes CSYS to CSYS EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 . This option excludes all extruded and revolved features as well as features whose location has been constrained using positioning dimensions.

Z This option allows the feature to be moved by specifying a distance and direction using rectangular coordinates. (Delta XC. The Point Constructor will become available during the operation to assist in the move. The figure below is an example of this. where the negative X axis is the Reference axis and the negative Y axis is the Destination axis. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 15-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Editing the Model Delta X. Reference axis ZC YC XC Destination axis Before After CSYS to CSYS This option allows the selected feature to be repositioned from its current coordinate system to the desired coordinate system. The current or Reference Coordinate System must be defined as well as the desired or Destination Coordinate System using the Coordinate System Subfunction dialog. Delta YC. Rotate Between Two Axes This option allows the selected feature to be moved by rotating that feature from a reference axis to a destination axis. based upon the Work Coordinate System. and Delta ZC) To a Point This option allows the feature to be moved from a reference point to a destination point. Y.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-9 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 . not position. Allows the selection of Features When a feature is deleted from a body. For example. the hole will also be deleted. and the datum plane is deleted. is dependent on the deleted feature will also be deleted. Selecting the delete icon introduces the Class Selection dialog box. Selecting the Features button within the Class Selection dialog box option allows the selection of features of a solid model to be deleted. if a hole has been created using a datum plane for its placement face.Editing the Model The newly relocated feature will maintain the same relative position to the Destination Coordinate System as it had with the Reference Coordinate System. Deleting Features Deleting features is accomplished through the use of the Delete icon in the Standard toolbar or Edit"Delete from the Menu bar. NOTE: Any features whose placement. If a feature is mistakenly deleted. the Undo function may be used immediately after the deletion to restore the feature. the space it occupied or voided is filled in exactly as it was before the feature was created.

or until a feature fails to update. a different feature may be browsed to. its defining parameters may be interrogated or edited. When the Playback Feature icon is chosen. Once a feature has been dealt with. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 15-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . the Edit during Update dialog appears and starts with the first feature created. The Message window shows any applicable error or warning messages. At any time a trigger may be set to update the model starting at the current feature and continuing until the model is complete. Once the intended feature has been reached. Features may be browsed through forward or backward. The model may also be edited as it is reviewed. as well as whether the current feature updated successfully or failed.Editing the Model Playback Playback allows the creation of the model to be reviewed feature by feature.

The Edit during Update dialog also contains icons for the review and edit options that are available for the model. but are grayed out if not applicable. The first row of icons always appear. NOTE: Most options outside the Edit During Update dialog are disabled while the model is being reviewed or edited. may not appear in the current model until the last related feature is rebuilt.Editing the Model Show Failure Area temporarily displays failed geometry. Pause lets the user choose other Edit during Update options. in order of creation. the Edit during Update dialog will be presented. The possible options are: began. Update Tool Should the model fail to update after an edit. The Post Recovery Update Status options specify what should happen when the icon option chosen is completed. such as instances in an array. rather than automatically resuming update. This option is available only if an object involved in the failure.) . Undo undoes the last modification made to the model before updating EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-11 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 Step Back To allows backward navigation through the model to a selected feature that may be chosen from the Update Selection dialog. The remaining icons may or may not appear depending on the circumstances. is available for display. such as a tool body. NOTE: Some features. Show Current Model displays the part of the model that has been successfully rebuilt. (The dialog contains a list of the features created before the current one. D D Continue restarts the automatic update process from where it left off.

that feature is skipped. is used to acknowledge multiple warning messages about failed features to allow the update to continue. Accept is used to acknowledge a single warning message about a failed feature (but not an error message) to allow the update to continue.Editing the Model Step Back allows backward navigation through the model one feature at a time. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 15-12 Suppress suppresses the feature currently being updated. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Continue triggers the update process. This is useful for messages that will recur. Step To allows forward navigation through the model to a selected feature. Accept Remaining. the Update Selection dialog lists the features that have not yet been rebuilt. The status of features may be viewed by choosing Information"Feature" Update Status Report. In this case. Delete allows deletion the of the feature that failed to update. or to ignore a number of messages. listing out of date" features with either update or dependant failure reasons. The feature that fails is marked out of date". Editing the failed feature to resolve the problem automatically removes the out of date" mark from the Update Status Report. which continues until the model is completely rebuilt or until a feature fails. Step advances one feature at a time through the model. If Continue is chosen when a failure occurs. similar to accept.

See the Edit Positioning section of this lesson for more details about repositioning features.) Review the model cannot be used to review features that failed during update or that have not yet been rebuilt. NOTE: An editing option must be selected before any work may be performed outside the Edit during Update dialog. Review the model allows investigation. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-13 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 . Removed Unused References Edit Parameters Edit Position Edit Parameters allows modification of the parameters of the feature currently being updated. Edit allows you to change the parameters of the feature currently being updated. Remove Unused References and Edit Position options. but not editing. Edit Position allows the selected or failed feature to be repositioned.Editing the Model Suppress Remaining suppresses the feature currently being updated and all subsequent features. of the rebuilt model with options from the menu bar or the third mouse button pop up menu. A sub menu will display with the Edit Parameters. See the Edit Parameters section of this lesson for more information about this option. (The options available are the same as those in the Gateway application.

Go To. NOTE: For performance reasons. When Playback is chosen. the display is updated. or Edit Positioning Dimension is chosen on the same or an earlier feature. the options that allow advance through the model (Step. the display does not change during update when an update method other than Show Current Model is used. the display updates each time a feature is rebuilt. Step Back. The display does not update if other options such as Step Back To.Editing the Model If a failure occurs. and then rethought. Step Back. If these options are being used. and Continue) are grayed out until the failure is resolved and the feature successfully updates. Step Back To. or Continue are chosen. NOTE: Edits are not permanent until the model is completely rebuilt. choose Show Current Model. and it is desirable to see what the model looks like at this stage of its rebuilding. all of the solids in the model that will be updated disappear from the graphic window. If Step is chosen to re create the model one feature at a time. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 15-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . This may happen if Undo. Step To. the edits will be lost. Edit Parameters. or to the rebuilding of an earlier feature. After the model update has finished. making it necessary to return to the beginning of that feature's rebuilding. If a feature is edited.

Select Features Depending on which category the user has selected. where the object needing editing is selected first from the graphic window and then the necessary action is defined.Editing the Model Selection Toolbar The selection toolbar may be used anytime the selection of a feature for modification or the extraction of data is required. This lesson will focus on the use of the Select Features option. the Type Filter may be used to narrow the band of selectable objects. Reset All icons not shown Select All Deselect All Up One Level EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 . This method of editing uses an Object/Action approach. Features The remaining options of the toolbar may be used to further discriminate in the selection of objects.

Options may vary based upon application and feature ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 15-16 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . mouse button 3 (MB3) may be used to select an available operator for that object. Various Feature options Sketch options NOTE: selected. NOTE: When depressing MB3 the cursor must be on top of the selected object for the pop-up dialogs to appear.Editing the Model Once an object has been selected.

from the Edit - All of the solid features are suppressed except the base solid feature which is BLOCK(2). Step 1 Open part file pau_edit_feature_1 and start the Modeling application. Move & Delete Features In this activity. Choose the Step icon. the Playback function will be used to gain an understanding of how a model was constructed. Step 2 Review the model construction. Choose the Feature Playback icon Feature toolbar.Playback. - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-17 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 . The skills required to move a feature that is not located by positioning dimensions will also be demonstrated.Editing the Model Activity 1 . Step 3 Move forward to the next feature.

- Choose Feature Parameters. Step 4 Examine the extruded feature.Editing the Model The next solid feature. where the arrows begin. The EXTRUDED(3) feature is highlighted in the graphic window because it is the current feature. Examine the dialog box window and the graphic window to see that the edge of the BLOCK(2) feature. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . in the Edit during Update dialog - Choose the Edit Parameters icon. was extruded with an offset value to create this feature. is updated. Each solid feature may be examined in a similar manner as it is updated. EXTRUDED(3). - Choose the Edit icon box. The next set of actions will demonstrate how a feature may be examined to see how it was constructed. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 15-18 - Choose Back twice and then Cancel to return to the Edit During Update dialog.

The next action will allow the graphic window to be refreshed. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-19 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 . - Try to Fit the view using the Fit icon toolbar. T_SLOT(4).Editing the Model The defining parameters of the feature could also have been redefined using this option. - Choose the Review the model icon. The next feature. is updated. Step 5 Move forward to the next feature. - Choose the Step icon. in the View Most options outside the Edit During Update dialog are disabled while the model is being reviewed or edited.

Editing the Model - Fit the view using the Fit icon. Continue to Step through until the model has been completely updated. Step 6 Move a feature relative to the WCS. Review the model allows view options to be accessed during the review/edit process. - Choose OK. The pad will be moved using the Move Feature function. The pad illustrated below is a form feature that was not located with positioning dimensions. Non-Positioned Pad Z X Y ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 15-20 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

and not listed.5 0 - Choose OK. from the Edit Feature The dialog box window shows a partial list of the features of the model. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-21 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 . - Choose RECTANGULAR_PAD(12). BLOCK(2) is the base solid on which all of the other features are constructed. RECTANGULAR_PAD(12) is a feature located without positioning dimensions. All of the other features of the model are located associatively to the model using positioning dimensions and therefore not eligible for the Move Feature option.Editing the Model - Choose the Move Feature icon toolbar. Choose OK. Enter the following parameters: DXC = DYC = DZC = .75 -.

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 15-22 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Editing the Model The RECTANGULAR_PAD is moved a distance of . Choose RECTANGULAR_PAD(12).5 in the negative Y direction of the WCS. Choose OK. Z X Y Mid Point - Choose XC Axis as the reference axis and choose OK. - Choose the Move Feature icon again.75 in the positive X direction of the WCS and . The Cue Line is prompting you to define a pivot point. Step 7 Rotate a feature Between Two Axes. Select the Mid Point of the Rectangular Pad edge as shown below. Choose Rotate Between Two Axes.

- Choose the X Axis. Choose RECTANGULAR_PAD(12). Y Axis icon. The RECTANGULAR_PAD is rotated 90° about the specified point from the XC axis toward the YC axis. Step 8 Move a Feature from CSYS to CSYS. Choose Csys to Csys. - Choose the Move Feature icon again. Choose OK.Editing the Model - Choose YC Axis as the destination axis and choose OK. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-23 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 .

Select X-Axis Here Z X Y Select Y-Axis Here - Choose OK. - Choose the Offset from CSYS icon as the method to define the Destination coordinate system.Editing the Model - Select the edges as illustrated below to define the X axis and Y axis of the Reference coordinate system. Choose OK. Select the yellow Existing Coordinate System at its origin. - 15 The RECTANGULAR_PAD is moved such that its relationship to the Reference coordinate system is maintained relative to the Destination coordinate system ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-24 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

- Verify the Selection toolbar has Select Features ON. Select Delete from the Pop-Up window. - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-25 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 .Editing the Model Step 9 Delete a Feature using the Object/Action approach. Place the cursor over the feature and select MB3. turned Select Features - In the graphic window select the rectangular pad that was just moved and confirm if necessary.

Step 10 Do not save or close the part. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 15-26 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Editing the Model The RECTANGULAR_PAD is removed from the model.

Editing the Model Parameters This option allows the redefinition of the parameter values of any parametric feature and causes the model to update to reflect the new values. Choose OK again to complete the model edit. Parameters may be edited in the creation dialog boxes. D D D D D D D NOTE: The Select Features option in the Selection toolbar may also used to select features from the graphic window and edit parameters using MB3. Choose OK to complete editing at each of the creation dialog boxes. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-27 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 . or Edit"Feature"Parameters D Select the feature from the graphic area or choose the feature name from the list in the Edit Parameters list dialog box and choose OK to confirm the selection. Choose OK to complete the feature edit. Some parameters which may be edited will display on the screen where they can be selected and edited directly. . . The Edit Parameters dialog box listing the different types of parameters valid for the selected feature is presented. To edit a feature's parameters: D Choose the Edit Parameters icon from the Menu bar. or . Any of the valid parameter types may be selected from the Edit Parameters dialog box to display the original creation dialog box with the current parameter values.

this option allows the addition of positioning dimensions to features that are either underspecified or were not given any positioning dimensions at the time of creation.Editing the Model Positioning This option allows a feature to be moved by editing its positioning dimensions. In addition. Complete the edit. or delete) as required. Once the feature to edit has been selected. the system will offer the following option choices based upon the positioning status of the selected feature. the Add Dimension option is automatically selected. or Edit"Feature"Positioning D D D D D 15 NOTE: The Select Features option in the Selection toolbar may also used to select features from the graphic window and edit positioning using MB3. then choose OK. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-28 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Choose the type of dimension edit (add. Select the dimension or dimension type. Select the feature to be edited. edit. To edit a feature's positioning: Choose the Edit Positioning icon from the Menu bar. NOTE: If the selected feature has no positioning dimension associated with it.

any object that is the intersection between the feature being positioned and the target solid's face may not be selected as the dimensioning geometry. Select feature to be positioned Target solid This curve is the intersection between the feature and the target solid. Therefore. Identify Solid Face may be used to position to the center of the cylinder. the intersection curve is not a valid selection to specify location. The intersection curve is a child product of the tool and target solid's face. The boolean operation does not occur until after the position of the feature has been defined. Target solid Valid target edges for positioning purposes must belong to features existing in the feature creation list of the model before the feature being positioned. When adding positioning dimensions.Editing the Model Add Dimension This option may be used to add a positioning dimension to a feature. When adding positioning dimensions to a Thru hole. no edge will be selectable as the target edge because both edges are intersection curves. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-29 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 . it is defined by the boolean operation associated with the feature type being created.

Error Messages 15 If the new location of the feature causes it to miss the target solid. this dialog box provides several options for dealing with the failed update as discussed in the Playback section. Delete Dimension Use this option to delete a positioning dimension from a feature. To use this option: D Select the dimension to edit (if there is only one positioning dimension.Editing the Model For example. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-30 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . in the figure below the features are numbered in the order in which they were created. Once all the desired dimension values have been edited. choose OK. 2 3 1 Edit Dimension Value Features may be moved by changing the values of the feature's positioning dimensions. it is selected automatically). the Edit during Update dialog box will be presented. Feature #2 may not be positioned using any face or edge from feature #3. D Continue editing as many dimension values as desired. The feature will then remain in its current location as its position is no longer associated to the model. Enter the new value.

120.Editing the Model Activity 2 . Also. Choose MB2 to approve the parameter change.Edit Features and Positioning Dimensions In this activity.75. note the expression that controls the width. Choose OK. The parametric values for the block are displayed on the graphic window. Choose MB2 again to approve the change to the indicated feature. - Continue to work with pau_edit_feature_1. Change the X Length to 2. Choose MB2 a final time to approve the change to the model. - Choose the Edit Parameters icon. Step 1 Edit a Feature's Parameters. Choose BLOCK(2). you will edit the creation parameters of a feature and then capture one aspect of the design intent by editing a feature's positioning dimensions to be associative to the creation parameters of another feature. p8=3. - Choose Feature Dialog from the Edit Parameters dialog box. A parameter may be chosen by selecting an expression in the graphic screen or by choosing Feature Dialog. - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-31 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 . this will be used in the next few steps.

Editing the Model Notice that after the part updated. - ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 15-32 The positioning dimensions for the feature are displayed in the graphic window. Assume that the design intent is that the pad should always remain in the center of the part. (Status line should read RECTANGULAR_PAD(7)) Place the cursor over the feature and select MB3. turned - - In the graphic window select the rectangular pad shown in the above figure and accept if necessary. Select Edit Positioning from the Pop-Up window. Z Y X Y Z X Before After Step 2 Edit the Pad's Positioning Dimensions using the Object/Action approach. This situation will be remedied in the next step. Verify the Selection toolbar has Select Features ON. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . the pad on the bottom is no longer in the center.

Choose MB2 again to signify the end of dimension editing for this feature. Since the pad should always stay in the center of the part. - Choose MB2 to approve the dimension edit. The expression p8 controls the width of the part. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-33 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 .Editing the Model - Choose Edit Dimension Value. the view may need to be rotated and updated (MB3). - - The part should update and the pad is now located in the center of the block.560 expression. Choose MB2 again to signify the end of positioning editing for this feature. - Enter p8/2. Choose MB2 a final time to signify the end of positioning editing for the model. In the graphic screen select the p39=1. entering a simple equation will capture this aspect of the design intent. To see the pad feature and expressions better. At this point another feature could have been selected for editing.

75 dimension from the graphic window. Change the value to 5. accept the feature with MB2. when it reads BLOCK(2).) to appear. Watch the Status line. Select Edit Parameters from the Pop-Up window.). - Choose the Fit icon. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 15-34 Notice that the pad feature remained in the center of the block...00 . - In the graphic window select the base block feature as shown in the figure below. - Place the cursor over the feature and select MB3. Select the p8=2. You will need to wait for the ellipsis (+. then select with MB1 and use Quick Pick to step through the multiple candidates. Place cursor here and wait for the ellipsis to appear (+... Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Choose MB2 twice to complete the edit.Editing the Model Step 3 Edit the Block Width using the Object/Action approach.

- Choose BLOCK(2) and select MB2.75 .00 dimension from the graphic window. Choose MB2 three times to complete the edit. Change the value to 1. Using Edit during Update. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-35 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 . Step 1 Edit a Feature's Parameters. you will rectify the problem and continue the modeling process. Select the p8=5.Using the Update Tool In this activity. you will edit a feature that causes a feature to be positioned completely outside the target body. - Continue to work with pau_edit_feature_1. - Choose the Edit Parameters icon.Editing the Model Activity 3 .

The model appears in the graphic window relative to the new 1.75 width value. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-36 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Choose Show Failure Area.Editing the Model The Edit during Update dialog box appears. The reason for the failure may now be clearly seen. the hole falls outside the bounds of the body. - Choose the Edit icon window in the Edit During Update - 15 Choose the Edit Position icon. The feature that has caused the failure to occur is shown in the graphic window. - Choose Show Current Model. Choose Edit Dimension Value.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-37 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 .Editing the Model - Select the p45=1. The hole now falls within the solid model. correcting the failure.625 dimension from the graphic window. The model updates correctly. Step 2 Close the part. do not save. Enter p8-1 and choose MB2 four times.

Both. Holding down the third mouse button on a feature causes a feature specific pop up menu to be displayed offering pertinent editing options. by default. To access the Model Navigator in UNIX use the Navigator toolbar and to access the Model Navigator in Windows use the Resource bar.Editing the Model Model Navigator The Model Navigator is a special window that allows investigation of. are located vertically on the right side of the Unigraphics window. Also. most of the options are not available if the Modeling application is not active. UNIX: Icon from Navigator toolbar Windows: Icon from Resource Bar The options on the pop up menu may vary depending on what feature is selected. as well as actions to be performed on a feature. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 15-38 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . and what operation may be pending at the time.

Display Dimensions Choosing Display Dimensions causes the feature's parameter values to be displayed (just as they are with Edit Parameters). The temporary display remains until a Refresh is done. For more information about these topics consult the technical documentation.Editing the Model The following options appear on this pop up menu for Feature nodes: D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D Display Dimensions Show/Hide Select Make Current Feature Edit Parameters Edit Positioning Suppress/Unsuppress Reorder Before Reorder After Group Replace Rename Delete Object Dependency Browser Information Properties The following options appear on the pop up menu for Work Part nodes: D D D Expand/Collapse All (with Quick Look listing only) List Interpart Children List Interpart Parents Work Part nodes are not discussed in this text. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-39 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 .

The ancestors of the hole are the pad and the block features. If the Hide Parents option is used on a swept feature." which are produced directly from a curve feature operation. If this option is used on a feature whose time stamp positions it in the middle of the build hierarchy. The Hide Body option blanks" the solid body that the feature is applied to.Editing the Model Show/Hide Allows the body or parents for the selected feature to be hidden or displayed. if a pad feature is placed on a block feature. This option may be used to make an existing feature the current feature of the solid body. Make Current Feature Provides a quick and easy method for inserting features into a part. then the hole becomes a direct child to the pad. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 15-40 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . NOTE: If feature creation is not currently applicable. As new features are created they are inserted into the build hierarchy before the inactive features. Select Allows the parents or children of a feature to be selected in the Model Navigator. the Make Current Feature option is unavailable. This option is not effective in showing or hiding "resulting curves. and then add more features at that point in the model hierarchy. This option also allows for all descendants/ancestors to be selected. This function blanks/unblanks the object(s) and their display can be brought back by using the Show/Hide options or by using the blanking functions found under the Edit"Blank options in the Menu bar. the system will hide (blank) the parent curves which generated the swept feature. all of the features after it are marked inactive. the pad is a child of the block. such as with Offset Curve. If the swept feature is derived by a solid edge(s) then the Hide Parents option will hide (blank) the parent solid body. The Hide Parents option is more applicable to swept features. however the hole is also a descendant of the block. such as from the Gateway application. If a hole is placed on the pad feature. making it the current feature. For example.

Suppress works with the checkbox associated with the feature node. Edit Positioning Same as Edit Positioning as discussed previously in this lesson. Double clicking on a feature name in the Model Navigator will bring up the Edit Parameters dialog box. Group Same as Format"Group Features (see technical documentation for more information). Nodes may also be dragged and dropped in the Model Navigator window to perform a feature reorder. which may be used to unsuppress the feature. When the feature is unsuppressed the check is displayed in the checkbox. Reorder Before/After Allows the construction order of the features in the model to be altered by positioning the selected feature before or after other features in the build hierarchy. The option on the pop up menu changes to Unsuppress. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-41 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 . Edit Parameters Same as Edit Parameters as discussed previously in this lesson. Choose the feature that the selected node is to be reordered relative to from the Reorder Before or Reorder After cascade menus. the check is removed from the checkbox. Multiple features may be selected by holding the Ctrl key down during selection. Suppress and Unsuppress Feature Choosing Suppress causes the feature to be suppressed and an immediate update to the model to be performed. the last feature in that part is the current feature. When the feature is suppressed.Editing the Model NOTE: When a pre-V16 part file is loaded.

delete and move feature operations. To delete a Feature Set without deleting its members.Editing the Model This option lets you group features into a special collection called a Feature Set. NOTE: If you delete a Feature Set. Rename Features are named by the system on creation. Replace The replace option allows a feature's definition to be replaced or redefined" by another feature. first remove its members. For example. Object Dependency Browser The Object Dependency Browser allows the parent and child relationships of a feature to be interrogated. Delete Same as Edit→Delete as discussed previously in this lesson. Members of a Feature Set can be controlled together during suppress. Choosing Group causes the Sets of Features dialog box to appear. For more information on replace see the technical documentation. The features included in the Feature Set can also be hidden so they do not show in the Model Navigator and can only be accessed under the Feature Set Name. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 15-42 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . such as BLOCK(1). Information Provides information about the selected feature in the Information window. The rename option allows user defined names to be assigned in place of the system assigned names. a surface that is used as a trim face could be replaced for a different surface without having to delete or redefine several other features. all of its member features are also deleted.

which can be edited similarly to the Rename function. General properties include the feature name.Editing the Model Properties The properties option provides access to General and Attribute information for the feature selected. Attributes can be added to any feature to include information which could be called out in a specified column of the Model Navigator. For more information on feature attributes and Model Navigator columns see the technical documentation. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-43 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 .

Windows ONLY: Choose the tack icon in the upper left hand corner to permanently display the Model Navigator. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 15-44 - Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Step 2 See how the part was constructed. Start with BLOCK(0) and work down. - In the Model Navigator. Step 1 Open part file pau_edit_feature_2 and start the Modeling application. is by suppressing all the features and then unsuppressing each feature one at a time. This should afford a better understanding of how the part was constructed. Step 3 Reorder the Hollow feature. Click on the checkmark to the left of BLOCK(0). press and hold down MB1. This is because the subsequent features possess a child relationship to the block. unsuppress each feature by clicking in the checkbox to restore the display. Place the cursor over the node for HOLLOW(1). Another way of reviewing the construction of a model.Reordering with the Model Navigator This activity will show how reordering a feature impacts the design of the part.Editing the Model Activity 4 . - Select the Hollow feature in the Model Navigator. - - The block feature is suppressed as well as all of the other features. drag the feature on top of EXTRUDED(3). - Choose the Model Navigator icon from the Navigator toolbar (UNIX) or from the Resource Bar (Windows) and size as required.

it can now be renamed with a description that is more meaningful to the user. (Windows users remember the tack) Step 5 Choose File"Close"All Parts. - Press and hold down MB1 on HOLLOW(2) and drag the feature on top of BLEND(5). Step 4 Identify and Rename a Feature. - Close the Model Navigator Window. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-45 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 . The Rename dialog box appears. - Press and hold down MB1 on HOLLOW(5) and drag the feature on top of BLEND(6). - Enter THROAT_BLEND and press Enter. Now there is a radius on the inside corners.Editing the Model The hollow feature is reordered after the extruded feature and the graphic window reflects the edit. Notice that the time stamp [(4)] was added. - Place the cursor over the node name BLEND(4). use the third mouse button pop up menu to choose Rename. Notice the sharp corners on the inside radii. The corresponding feature highlights in the graphic window. The new name is reflected in the Model Navigator. - Select the node name BLEND(4) using the first mouse button. Since the feature has been identified.

In the figure below. grooves. etc. the model must include a thru feature for either of the Specify Thru Face options to be enabled. trim faces of extruded and revolved features. Objects that may have their references redefined include most features (holes. slots. pockets. a thru face. and user defined features (UDFs). For example. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 15-46 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . and linear instance sets of these features. and bosses). A feature reference may be an attachment face. a slot feature is reattached from the original placement face to a new face. Original slot feature Slot feature is reattached to a new placement face Using the Reattach Menu dialog box The Reattach Menu dialog box only enables the options pertaining to redefining the selected feature. an edge. pads. Reattach allows the feature references of the feature to be redefined.Editing the Model Reattaching a Feature One of the feature parameters available for editing under Edit Parameters is Reattach. or include a UDF for the Specify Tool Placement Face option to be enabled.

Editing the Model When an option icon is chosen. if the Specify First Thru Face icon is chosen. the system highlights the current thru face for the selected feature. For example. Current positioning dimensions Reference direction type Use to change direction of the normal direction Specify location of feature Use to change reference direction EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-47 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 . the system highlights the existing references of the type in question.

the following options on the Reattach Menu dialog box are available: Filter allows filtering of selectable object types. The following object types are available: D D D D D All Types Face Datum Plane Edge Datum Axis 15 The above list of filter options is dependent on the specific Reattach option icon chosen. For Specify Horizontal Reference. Specify First Thru Face. and Specify Tool Placement Face. Redefine Positioning Dimensions allows new positioning dimensions to be specified for the feature being edited. faces. only faces and datum planes are selectable. For example. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-48 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Specify First Thru Face allows the first through/trim face of the feature being edited to be redefined. for Specify Target Placement Face. and datum axes are selectable. while using any of these redefine feature options. The default is All Types. Specify Second Thru Face allows the second through/ trim face of the feature being edited to be redefined.Editing the Model Reattach Menu dialog box Options The following options are available to redefine feature references: Specify Target Placement Face allows a new attachment face for the feature being edited to be specified. Specify Reference Direction allows a new horizontal reference to be specified for the feature being edited. datum planes. edges. Specify Tool Placement Face allows the tool face of a User Defined Feature (UDF) to be redefined. In addition. Specify Second Thru Face.

this option is grayed out. Reverse Side allows the feature's normal direction to be reversed when reattaching that feature to a datum plane. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-49 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 . allow the definition of a new horizontal or vertical feature reference. If a feature does not have any positioning dimensions. its available references are highlighted in the graphic window. Horizontal and Vertical. Delete Positioning Dimension allows deletion of a selected positioning dimension. Since features are initially placed at the center of a plane. Specify Origin allows quick relocation of the reattached feature by moving it to a specified origin. The Direction Reference options. This option is useful when reattaching features to datum planes. Reverse Direction allows the feature's reference direction to be reversed. If the first mouse button is used to select a dimension in this list.Editing the Model A list window displays the types of positioning dimensions currently on the selected feature. This option may be used with all features. Double clicking with the first mouse button on a dimension in the list allows it to be redefined. The default is always set for the existing reference type. the update may fail since the plane's center may not be near the feature's actual position.

Choose Reattach from the Edit Parameters dialog box. you will move a feature from one face to another. - In the graphic window select the rectangular pad and accept if necessary.Editing the Model Activity 5 . - ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 15-50 A Reattach dialog box displays icons for the selection steps and other options for reattaching the feature. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Select Edit Parameters from the Pop-Up window.Reattaching a Feature In this activity. (Status line should read RECTANGULAR_PAD(7)) Place the cursor over the feature and select MB3. Step 1 Open the part file pau_reattach_1 and start the Modeling application. Step 2 Reattach the extruded feature.

and accept the selection. and accept the selection. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-51 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 . and the cue prompts you for selection of a new horizontal reference. - Select the vertical positioning dimension (2. Redefine Positioning Dimensions. notice that the current placement face for the Rectangular Pad feature is highlighted in the graphic window. Choose the lower front edge of the solid as the target object as shown below.Editing the Model The icon for Specify Target Placement Face is highlighted. the current horizontal reference vector is displayed in the graphic window. - Select the lower edge of the face as the horizontal reference. - Select the right face of the solid. Now the second icon. Target Face Horizontal Reference Now the third icon. Specify Reference Direction highlights.500). The Cue Line prompts to select a Target face to define the new placement face for the feature. Also. highlights and the Cue Line prompts you to select a Dimension to Redefine.

Select the right outside edge of the pad feature as the tool edge. - Tool edge Target Object ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 15-52 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .000). Tool edge Target object - Select the horizontal positioning dimension (1. Select the right vertical edge of the solid as the Target Object as shown below.Editing the Model - Select the bottom outside edge of the pad feature as the tool edge.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-53 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 .Editing the Model - Choose MB2 twice to complete the reattachment of the feature. Step 3 Choose File"Close"All Parts.

Editing the Model SUMMARY The Edit Features functions in Unigraphics provides an efficient and robust capability to change design. fit. form. The good designer will possess good modeling skills that keep in mind downstream editing requirements. Because parametric values can be accessed and edited. investment of parametric design time is not wasted when the need for design changes occur. and function. This lesson introduced: D D D D D D D D D D D Delayed Update on Edit Suppress a Feature Unsuppress a Feature Move a Feature Delete a Feature Use the Playback Function Edit Feature Parameters Edit Feature Positioning Edit During Edit The Model Navigator Reattach a Feature to a Different Face ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 15-54 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson. you will be able to: D D Create a Rectangular Array. Create a Circular Array.Instance Arrays Lesson 16 PURPOSE To introduce Instance Arrays. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 16-1 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 Instance Arrays .

Choosing Insert"Feature Operation"Instance yields the following dialog box which supports Rectangular and Circular Instance Arrays as well as the ability to Mirror Features or Mirror an entire solid Body. duplicates existing features. eliminating repetitive efforts in the creation of models.Instance Arrays ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 16-2 Instance Using Insert"Feature Operation"Instance from the main menu bar. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

in very complex models. the parameters of the Instance Array itself may be edited.Instance Arrays This option allows Instance arrays from an existing feature to be created. Since all instances of a feature are associated. However. system performance may be affected. using the Simple method may increase performance and in a worst case scenario the Identical method may be required. the parameters of the feature may be edited and those changes are reflected in every instance of the feature. The following Instance options are available: D D D D D Rectangular Circular Mirror Body (Not covered in this course) Mirror Feature (Not covered in this course) Pattern Face (Not covered in this course) There are three methods of creating Instance arrays: D D D General Simple Identical In most cases the General method is the best practice. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 16-3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 Instance . The Instance not only duplicates the feature but preserves the parameters of the feature. that is. NOTE: Most Feature Operations may not be instanced. The instance itself is also a parametric feature. similar to a copy. In these cases. An instance is a shape linked feature.

The WCS can be redefined while in the process of creating arrays. the following parameters must be entered: D D D D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 16-4 Number Along XC: The total number of instances in the XC direction. YC Offset: The spacing between the instances in the YC direction. The direction will be relative to the current orientation of the WCS. including the original feature to be Instanced. Number Along YC: The total number of instances in the YC direction. These arrays may be in either the XC or YC direction or both. If the feature position is edited. XC Offset: The spacing between the instances in the XC direction. Parameter Settings: Number Along XC = 3 XC Offset = .75 Solid block Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The position of the rectangular array will remain relative to the location of the feature that the array is based on. After the feature(s) to be instanced is selected.75 Number Along YC =4 YC Offset = 1 Hole selected for Instance 1. The total Number of Instances for both the XC and YC must be a whole number greater than zero.00 . the array position will also update. including the original feature to be Instanced. The Offset values can be either positive or negative. All rectangular arrays will be created in a plane parallel to the XC YC plane.Instance Arrays Rectangular Instance Array This function allows the creation of a linear array of instances from the selected feature(s).

Hole selected for instance array Rotation axis +ZC Reference point Y 45_ Parameter Settings: Number = 8 = +ZC = arc center Z X Angle = 45_ Rotation Axis Reference Point EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 16-5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 Circular Instance Array . the circular array will not move with it.Instance Arrays Allows a circular array of instances from selected features to be created. after specifying the rotation axis. including the existing feature. about the reference point. NOTE: Defining a point and direction will not maintain positional associativity. Parameters include the method for creating the instance array plus the following values: D D Number: The number of instances to be created in the circular array. Once the feature is selected and the parameters specified. The plane in which the circular instance array will be created will be normal to this rotation axis. the following information must be entered: D Reference Point: Defines the location that the instanced feature will be rotated about. If the defined point moves. Using Point & Direction. a rotation axis must be selected. relative to the rotation axis. regardless of WCS orientation. Angle: The angular spacing between instances. After selecting the feature to be instanced in a circular array. A rotation axis may be defined by specifying a Point & Direction (Vector Constructor dialog box) or by specifying a Datum Axis. Defining the rotation axis by a datum axis will maintain positional associativity. the parameters for the circular array must be supplied.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 Before After Step 1 Open the part file. The figure below illustrates the model to be used for this activity and an illustration of the finished part. There will be two holes in the XC direction and 3 holes in the YC direction.Rectangular Instance Array In this activity. Design Intent The finished part will have six holes. - Open pau_array_1. Save the part as ***_array_1. 16-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . and start the Modeling application. a rectangular instance array will be created from a hole feature.Instance Arrays Activity 1 .

- Enter . Use Simple Hole type. Select the inside face as the Thru Face.Instance Arrays - Choose Hole. Select the outside face as the Planar Placement Face. . EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 16-7 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 Step 2 Create a hole feature.257 as the diameter of the hole and choose OK. Select that Planar Placement Face and the Thru Face as shown.

Instance Arrays - Position the hole as shown below. Y Axis. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The WCS must be in the proper orientation in order to create the instance array. - Choose WCS→Orient. - Choose X Axis. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 16-8 Step 3 Manipulate the WCS.

Instance Arrays - Y-Axis X-Axis The proper WCS orientation is shown below. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 16-9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 Select the Axes as shown. - Choose OK. Step 4 Create a rectangular array of the hole feature. Choose the SIMPLE_HOLE(14). . Select Rectangular Array. The feature may be selected from the graphics area or from the Instance dialog. - Choose Instance.

Step 5 Choose File"Close"Save and Close. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Enter the Parameters for the Instance as shown below: Method Number Along XC XC Offset Number Along YC YC Offset General 2 1. Choosing No will return to the Enter Parameters dialog box. A temporary display of the instance array will appear in the graphics area. - Choose Yes.687 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 16-10 - Choose OK.25 3 .Instance Arrays - Choose OK. Choosing Yes will create the instance as it is shown in the graphics area.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 16-11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 Activity 2 . Before After Step 2 Create the Instance Feature.Instance Arrays In this activity. Step 1 Open pau_array_2. - Save the part as ***_array_2. The figure below illustrates the model to be used for this activity and an illustration of the finished part.Circular Instance Array . Design Intent The finished part will have four legs that are identical and are to be equally spaced about center of the cylinder. a circular instance array will be created from multiple features. and start the Modeling application. - Choose Instance.

Instance Arrays - Choose Circular Array. Method General. Number 3 Angle 120 - Choose OK. The axis of rotation must be selected. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . dragging over their names in the Instance dialog box. - Choose OK to confirm the selections. Using a Datum Axis maintains positional associativity. and releasing MB1. Select the following five features from the Instance dialog: EXTRUDED(5) BOSS(6) BOSS(7) EXTRUDED(9) SIMPLE_HOLE(13) ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 16-12 NOTE: Multiple features may be selected by pressing MB1. Enter the Parameters for the Instance as shown below.

Choose the Single Offset option. Select the Datum Axis as shown. - Choose the Chamfer.Instance Arrays - Select the Datum Axis Method.5 and choose OK. Save the part file. Select this Datum Axis A temporary system display previews the arrangement of the instances to be created. To speed up the display process. Key in the Offset value of 1. Confirm the selection if necessary and choose OK. Select the circular edge of any one of the instanced holes. - Choose Yes if the temporary display looks correct. only the first feature selected will be previewed. . - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 16-13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 Make layer 61 selectable. Step 3 Add a chamfer to an instanced hole feature.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16-14 - Choose Chamfer all instances. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Choose Edit→Feature→Parameters. Select the first instanced feature from the Feature Selection dialog box list and choose OK.Instance Arrays 16 Notice that there is a choice to apply the chamfer only to the selected feature or to apply it to all instances. Step 4 Edit the Instance array parameters.

Instance Arrays - Choose Instance Array Dialog. The options in the dialog box may vary depending on which feature is selected. Accept the default Method of General and enter the new parameters: Total Number = 4 Angle = 360/4 Radius = 75 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 16-15 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 All options available for editing the selected feature are displayed in the dialog box that appears. .

Instance Arrays - 16 Choose OK three times to complete the edit. The part should now have four legs and appear as shown below. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16-16 Step 5 Choose File"Close"Save and Close. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Created a Circular Instance Array. eliminating repetitive efforts in the creation of models.Instance Arrays SUMMARY The Instance functionality duplicates existing features. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 16-17 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 . In this lesson you: D D Created a Rectangular Instance Array.

Instance Arrays ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) 16-18 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects Appendix A EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A Additional Projects .

Additional Projects Project 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A A-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-3 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A Project 2 .

Additional Projects Project 3 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A A-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-5 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A .

Additional Projects Project 4 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A A-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) A-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-9 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A Project 5 .

Additional Projects Project 6 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A A-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-11 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A .

Additional Projects Project 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A A-12 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-13 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A .

Additional Projects Project 8 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A A-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A .

Additional Projects Project 9 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A A-16 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-17 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A .

Additional Projects Project 10 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A A-18 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-19 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A .

Additional Projects Project 11 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A A-20 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-21 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A .

Additional Projects Project 12 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A A-22 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-23 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A .

Additional Projects Project 13 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A A-24 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-25 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A .

Additional Projects Project 14 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A A-26 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-27 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A .

Additional Projects Project 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A A-28 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-29 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A .

Additional Projects Project 16 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A A-30 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-31 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A .

Additional Projects Project 17 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A A-32 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-33 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A .

Additional Projects Project 18 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A A-34 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-35 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) A-36 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Point Constructor Options Point Constructor Options Appendix B This appendix describes the various Point Constructor methods that may be used. Points may be specified in one of two ways: either choose one of the provided. icons at the top of the dialog box. Creating Points vs. These locations are displayed as asterisks (*). the Point Constructor lets you create point objects. When you use the Point Constructor in any other option. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual B-1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ B . or directly enter the X-Y-Z coordinates in the fields provided. It allows the creation of point objects as well as the determination of locations in three dimensional space. Specifying Locations When you choose the Point icon. The Point Constructor dialog box provides a standard way to specify points throughout Unigraphics. Choose Refresh to remove the asterisks. Points appear on the screen as plus signs (+). you are only specifying temporary locations.

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The positions of the control points of a curve may also be specified. Points may be used to locate other objects. Locating positions with the Point Constructor dialog box is also valuable. As the cursor is passed over these icons. the end of a line or the center of a circle may be specified to locate objects in model space. For example. Points may also be used to construct curves or surfaces.Point Constructor Options Points have many uses in Unigraphics. the icon block displays the name of the method. Icon Methods To Specify a Point The top of the Point Constructor dialog box displays icons representing various methods for specifying a point. This option does not require a selection of the particular point type for each selection. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ B B-2 Inferred Point Depending on where you select when using this option. mid point or arc center. end point. existing point. one of the following single selection options will be used: cursor location. The icon methods are described below. such as the title block on a drawing.

if the smallest increment on the part is in eighths of an inch (. use a grid (see Preferences→Work Plane "Show Grid). When Snap to Grid is on. In the instance where an existing point is being selected it is generally a case of using that point to aid in the construction of another object such as a the endpoint of a line.125. Existing Point Use this option to specify a location by selecting an existing point.Point Constructor Options Cursor Location Use this option to construct points anywhere on the screen by positioning the cross hairs and indicating a location. The grid spacing may be set as desired. points snap to the nearest grid position. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual B-3 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ B . To locate points quickly and precisely. Remember that the point constructor allows locations in model space to be specified. The spacing in the X-direction does not need to be the same as the spacing in the Y-direction. For example. then the grid spacing would be set to . A point at exactly one inch in X and two inches in Y could be created by counting over eight grid points in X and up sixteen in Y and indicating a screen position. The location defined lies on the WCS Work plane. or the location of an object.125). such as placement of a drawing border.

Lines Conics Arcs Splines ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ B B-4 When selecting geometry. place the selection ball near the end point you wish to select. and splines. such as complete circles.Point Constructor Options End Point Use this option to specify locations at the end points of existing lines. have only one endpoint because the two ends are at the same coordinate location. arcs. The point is located at the end of the curve nearest to where it was selected (see below). conics. Selection Position Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Closed curves.

End points and Mid points of open arcs.Point Constructor Options Control Point Use this option to locate points at the control points of geometric objects. Open Arcs Lines Conics Circles Splines EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual B-5 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ B . Use the cursor to select objects. Since some objects have more than one control point. End points of conics. include: Existing points. The system locates the control point nearest the position where the curve is selected. which vary for each object type. Center points of circles or arcs. place the cross hairs near the control point desired. The control points. Mid points and End points of lines. and End points or Knot points of splines.

Intersection point of line and arc Implied intersection of two lines Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . an apparent intersection occurs and the system creates the point on the first curve selected. the system creates the point nearest to where the second curve was selected. Second Curve ZC YC XC First Curve Point Positions may be indicated at the intersection of any two non parallel curves. The system calculates an apparent intersection by projecting the curve parallel to the ZC axis. Implied intersections may be located even if the objects do not actually touch (see below). If the curves intersect more than once. Projections are always done along the ZC-axis. and the point will be defined on the first object selected (see below). Two Possible Intersections 1 Select second curve nearest the intersection you want ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ B B-6 2 When the two selected curves are not coplanar with the XC-YC plane.Point Constructor Options Intersection Point Use this option to locate a position at the intersection of two curves or at the intersection of a curve and a surface or plane.

In the example below. selecting with the circumference of the large circle within the selection ball defines the center point of the large circle.Point Constructor Options Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center Use this option to specify a position at the center of an arc or ellipse by selecting the arc along its circumference. Selection Point Center Point EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual B-7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ B . Selection Point Center Point Selecting near the center of the large circle (see below) will not select the center of the large circle since the selection ball touches the circumference of the small circle.

The angle is referenced from the positive XC axis and is measured counterclockwise in the WCS. Position on Arc 105° ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ B The angle value is entered in degrees. Position on Arc 225° B-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The angular position on the arc or ellipse may also be defined on the unconstructed portion (or extension) of an arc or ellipse (see below).Point Constructor Options Angle on Arc/Ellipse Use this option to locate a position at an angular location on an arc or an ellipse.

The quadrant position may also be defined on the unconstructed portion (or extension) of an arc (see below). The point located is the quadrant point nearest to the position selected. Select Here Quadrant Point is Located Points may be located at the starting point of the arc or ellipse and then at quarter distance intervals along the object. Select Here Quadrant Point is Located EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual B-9 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ B .Point Constructor Options Quadrant Point Use this option to locate positions at the quarter points of an arc or an ellipse.

This is a useful tool if the desire is to specify many positions where each position is offset from the previous position. The absolute coordinate system is a fixed coordinate system. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Offset allows a position to be specified away from a specified reference.Point Constructor Options Choosing a Coordinate System Choose WCS or Absolute to specify which coordinate system the system references when locating positions using the Base Point text entry fields. or base position in one of the five ways discussed below. it remains in effect until another offset method is selected. Offset ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ B B-10 This option allows the specification of a position in model space offset from a reference position in model space. The default setting is None (no offset). The WCS may be moved to any location and placed in any orientation. The WCS (Work Coordinate System) is the default. or when the position that is being specified is relative to another position most easily defined by selecting a pre existing point. The offset location may be specified relative to the reference position using either the absolute or the work coordinate system. Once an offset method has been specified.

The first point could be specified. then the next offset position based on the values. Each alternating OK specifies the next base position. the need is to specify a quick row of points. the offset would be set to rectangular and the values entered. OK could then be chosen a number of times (7) to offset the remaining points from each previous point.0. offset in the X direction and Y direction. Offset 4 Offset 3 First Point Offset 2 Offset 1 Exiting the Point Constructor menu when using an offset requires the return of the offset setting to NONE. If The NONE setting is not reset. the Point Constructor continues to offset positions from the last specified position. or by manually changing the offset type back. This may be accomplished by choosing the RESET button. and to set the Offset option to None. Reset Use the Reset button to quickly set the X-Y-Z coordinate fields to 0. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual B-11 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ B .Point Constructor Options In the example below.

and Z directions relative to the coordinate system specified from a reference point (see below). The direction of the offset is determined by the coordinate system selected and the orientation of that coordinate system.Point Constructor Options Rectangular Offset This option allows a position to be offset by entering values that represent the X. Offset Offset Point ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ B B-12 X = 2. Y.0 Y = 0.5 Reference Point Z Y X Coordinate System Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .5 Z = 1. The origin of the coordinate system has no effect on the offset.

Offset Radius Angle Delta-ZC Radius Offset Point ZC YC XC Reference Point Distance Along ZC-axis (Delta . The offset values for Radius.ZC) Angle EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual B-13 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ B . A cylindrical offset may reference either the absolute coordinate system or the work coordinate system. and Delta ZC are defined relative to the specified coordinate system and applied as illustrated below.Point Constructor Options Cylindrical Offset This option allows an offset position to be specified by entering cylindrical coordinates (see below). Angle. The radius and the angle always lie in the X Y plane of the coordinate system specified.

Angle 1 always lies in the X-Y plane. A spherical offset may reference either the work coordinate system or the absolute coordinate system. The radius defines the distance between the base point and the offset point. and Angle 2 defines the elevation of the offset point from the X-Y plane. Entered Distance Offset Point Direction of Offset Reference Point Line Selected Here Line Selected to Define Vector B-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Point Constructor Options Spherical Offset This option allows specification of an offset position using spherical coordinates. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ B Vector Offset Z Y X Offset Radius Angle 1 Angle 2 Z Y X Offset Point Radius Angle 2 Reference Point Angle 1 This option allows specification of an offset position by indicating a direction and entering a distance in that direction (see below). The point is offset toward the end of the line that is closest to where the line was selected. The direction is defined by selecting a line. two angles and a radius (see below).

.Point Constructor Options Offset Along Curve This option allows an offset position to be defined along a curve by a specified arc length distance or a percentage of the total curve path length (see below). . . Select Here . Select the curve away from the reference position on the side of the curve you want to specify the position (see below). For this Offset Direction For this Offset Direction EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual B-15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ B . Note that lines may also be used as the curves" for this offset. Reference Point Select Here . . Offset Point Direction of Offset Reference Point Offset Point Direction of Offset Reference Point How the curve is selected determines the direction in which the offset will occur.

Point Constructor Options ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ B (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) B-16 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Transformations Transformations Appendix C This appendix discusses the fundamentals of transformations. D D D D D D D Transformation procedure Terminology Translate Scale Rotate about a point Mirror through a line Rotate about a line There are no activities. The following topics are covered. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual C-1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C .

D ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C C-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The Class Selection Subfunction dialog box may be used to select the objects. NOTE: Views.. rotated. Select the objects for transformation. drawings. Transformation Procedure D D Choose Edit→Transform. layouts. Choose a transformation type from the dialog box shown below. and scaled. make multiple moves. Transformations may be used to create multiple copies of selected objects.Transformations Transformations The Edit→Transform option allows objects to be translated. There are separate options from the main menu bar to deal with these items. or the current WCS are not translatable objects. etc. scales.

Original object Transformed Object Trace Curves Before After Trace Status may be used with Translate. Trace curves are independent of the Destination Layer setting. and are always created on the current Work layer. Trace Status on creates connecting curves between the original objects end points and their transformed copies. connecting lines are not created between the original object and the transformed copies. Moves the transformed objects to the specified layer. surfaces. or boundary objects. Rotate. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual C-3 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C . or Reposition to create closed wireframe shapes. Mirror. When trace status is off. Keeps the transformed objects on their original layer. Then complete the choices on the dialog box shown below. and choose OK. Transformation Options Terminology Destination Layer allows you to select a layer on which to place the transformed objects. Choose one of the following options: D D D Work Orig Specify Places the transformed objects on the current work layer.Transformations D Complete the additional selections and choices from dialog boxes. Trace Status is not applicable to solid bodies. Scale.

NOTE: Subdivisions only divides the transformation distance into equal parts. Use Subdivisions to translate. In translation. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C C-4 When a solid body is moved. Move allows transformation of an object from its original location to a new location. Copy allows an object to be duplicated at a new location. Use the Scale operation to accomplish this. After the number of subdivisions has been entered. NOTE: A solid body cannot be moved with the transformation type set to scale. Multiple Copies may be selected to enter a desired number of copies. while keeping the original intact in its initial position. the sweep outlines. where n is equal to the subdivision factor. move as well. Undo Last remains available until you choose Reselect Objects. or paths. Other features or solid bodies sharing those sweep outlines are also moved. In scale. the distance is divided by the subdivision factor. When a solid body containing swept features is moved. Copy. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . A feature of a solid body may not be selected for this operation. the Transform Type dialog box redisplays. or Multiple Copies. Undo Last cancels any immediately preceding transform operation. In rotation. the subdivision distance is the nth root of the transformation. the angle of rotation is divided by the subdivision factor. It does not display selected objects at each subdivided segment. or rotate an object. Multiple Copies allows duplication of objects a specified number of times during certain transform operations. its positioning features and their associated dimensions are moved. The subdivision factor is equal to the number of these parts. The selection in this option is object based. scale via uniform method.Transformations Subdivisions allows the transformation distance to be divided into a number of equal parts. All sketch features (when sketched on a face or datum plane) are moved with the solid body as well. All associated datum planes and axes are also moved with their solid body. Use Undo Last after a transformation via Move.

They will not affect the execution of Undo Last. or Subdivisions made after a transformation. Destination Layer. Move. or Multiple Copies selected immediately following Undo Last. and ready for the next transformation operation.Transformations Changes in Transform Type. occur during the next transformation operation. regenerates the objects in a state that preceded Undo Last. Copy. but before it is undone. Trace Curves. Objects originally selected for transformation remain selected at the completion of the Undo Last. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual C-5 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C .

and delta ZC) coordinates. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C C-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . delta YC.Transformations Translate Objects may be Translated (moved) to a point. Translated objects maintain the original orientation. Delta allows the selected objects to be translated by specifying a new location in terms of the work (delta XC. or by a distance of delta. To a Point allows the selected objects to be translated by indicating a reference and a destination point.

The results of different reference point positions are illustrated below. Care must be exercised in choosing a reference point for the scale operation because the scale factor is applied to the geometry equally relative to the reference point. Scale allows the selected objects to be proportionately resized. Reference Point Reference Point Reference Point Reference Point Scale Factor=1/2 NOTE: A solid body may not be scaled by copying it without losing its parametric information. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual C-7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C .Transformations Scale This option affects the size of an object and the distance between the object and its reference point.. A non uniform scale method may be specified with the values relative to the WCS.

a block feature) cannot be non uniform scaled via Copy. However.25 NOTE: Non Uniform Scale will not allow a Move operation on a solid body.75 YC Scale = . ZC YC XC Before Scale Factors ZC YC XC After ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C C-8 XC Scale = .Transformations Non Uniform Scale allows objects to be resized independently with respect to the XC. The figure below illustrates an example of Non Uniform Scale. An example of where this option might be useful is to incorporate variable shrinkage factors in mold design. analytic face geometry (for example. Undo Last is available even if the rescaled object had been converted to a different kind of object. first convert those sheet bodies into b surfaces using the Convert function. If you wish to non uniform scale a solid body containing analytic surfaces. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .5 ZC Scale = 1. and ZC axes. then sew them together into a new solid body valid for non uniform scaling. With the Non Uniform Scale method. Use Copy instead. YC.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual C-9 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ XC After ÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉ C . tool paths. dimensions. Subdivisions may not be used in Non Uniform Scale. view modifications. and offset sheet bodies). drafting objects. attributes.02 ZC Scale = 1.Transformations NOTE: Once an arc is converted into a spline. it can no longer be restored to its original object type. some or all of the original object data may be lost (for example.35 YC Scale = 1.00 Before ZC When an object is transformed into a different type.(See figure below) Arc Spline YC YC ZC XC Scale Factors XC Scale = 1.

The figure below illustrates Rotation About a Point. and passing through a specified reference point. A positive rotation direction is counterclockwise. a rotation and angle dialog box displays. After the reference point for rotation has been selected.Transformations Rotate About a Point Use this option to move objects around a line parallel to the ZC axis. with multiple copies. Original Object Number of Copies: 3 Subdiv Factor: 4 Rotation Angle: 270_ Reference Point ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C C-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual ZC YC XC Line Parallel To ZC EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Transformed Object ZC Original Object Reference Line XC EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual C-11 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C YC .Transformations Mirror Through a Line A mirror image of an object may be created on the opposite side of a reference line. Three options are available for line selection. The figure below illustrates an example of Mirror Through a Line.

and Point and Vector.Transformations Rotate About a Line This option allows objects to be moved around a reference line which is not necessarily parallel to the ZC axis. The figure below illustrates an example of Rotate About a Line. Three options are available for line selection: Two Points. Existing Line. Original Hole Reference Point Z ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C C-12 Y Number Of Copies: 7 Rotation Angle: 315_ Reference Point: Arc Center X Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . A positive rotation direction is counterclockwise. multiple copies.

The Offset Curves are handled as a complete set. Also. editing of the Offset Curves is accomplished only by editing the parents. the use of Mirror Through a Line and Mirror Through a Plane can save users considerable creation time. Consider the example below. note that the circle and arc at the bottom were not mirrored. except for the offset distance. Remember. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual C-13 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C . but the lines at the top were.Transformations Using Transformations for Symmetrical Geometry For swept solids using explicit curves that have common geometrical subsets. which shows a combination of Offset Curves and curves Mirrored Through a Line: Associative Offset Curves No Associativity Parent Curves Mirrored Curves (Not Mirrored) TIP Careful consideration of the curves used as parents for the Offset Curves is necessary.

Transformations (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C C-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this appendix. you will be able to: D D D D D Create Lines Create Arcs Create Circles Create Fillets Trim Curves EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-1 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D .Curve Creation Curve Creation Appendix D PURPOSE To introduce Basic Curves.

The term horizontal appearing in any dialog box or Cue line is meant as parallel to the XC axis.Curve Creation Explicit Curves The intent of this appendix is to teach 2D generator and guide geometry for the purposes of sweeping through space to create solid bodies. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D-2 The Work Coordinate System When creating curves. The Curve creation options are brought up by choosing Insert→Curve. vertical is parallel to the YC axis. spline or conic. line. and normal is parallel to the ZC axis. the orientation or direction can be based on the WCS. will be created on the XC-YC plane or a plane parallel to it. NOTE: In Unigraphics. except the 2 curve fillet. regardless of the work view or perspective on the screen. Any 2D curve. arc. a curve is considered to be a point. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

The Basic Curves dialog box is used to create lines. there is also quick access to the Trim Curve and Edit Curve Parameters functions. arcs.Curve Creation Basic Curves When the Basic Curves icon is chosen. Circle Fillet Edit Curve Parameters Line Arc Trim The portion of the Basic Curves dialog box below the icons is different for each of the options selected. and fillets. circles. While creating these curves. The icons on this dialog box are displayed below. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D . the Basic Curves dialog box is displayed.

or radius of an arc. . These fields track the location of the cursor. As soon as a line. The Dialog Bar Location Fields D Parameter Fields Location fields . etc. or select twice for overstrike mode.). new values may be entered in the parameter text fields and the newly created object will be updated accordingly (unless String Mode is turned on. When a parameter field (such as length. the location specified is accepted and an asterisk will appear in the graphics area indicating that point. and <Enter> is pressed. and ZC. or ZC field has focus.XC. the <Tab> key may be used or click the first mouse button in the fields desired. D When the XC. Select once in the field to insert text in the existing string. such as length of a line. The text fields in the Dialog Bar will vary depending on which type of curve is being created and which options have been selected. Parameter fields . For example.any field other than the three mentioned above) has focus and <Enter> is pressed.Curve Creation The Dialog Bar The Dialog Bar is a series of text fields that appear at the bottom of the graphics window when in the Basic Curves function. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . arc. YC. radius. the values in all parameter fields are accepted and applied to the curve being constructed. the Dialog Bar below is what will appear when creating lines.These fields control parameters of the curve. D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D-4 D In Preferences→User Interface the number of decimal places displayed in the fields may be controlled as well as whether or not the fields track the current location of the cursor. or circle is finished being created. or they can be used to input a coordinate location in the WCS. YC. D To give a text field focus.

Endpoint EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D TIP The endpoints of a circle are at 0 and 360 degrees. . midpoint Endpoints. at the 3 0'clock position. an object on which the Selection Ball is placed will always be pre highlighted. The preselection color is determined by the setting in the Selection Preferences dialog window. Curve Line Arc Complete Circle Control Points Endpoints. This includes all Control points (see below) of the highlighted objects. regardless of the setting of the Preselection option in the Selection Preferences dialog box. Control Points Each type of curve has its own unique set of control points (endpoints and midpoints).Curve Creation Pre Selection Highlighting When the Basic Curves dialog box is active. There are 2 endpoints at the same exact location. midpoint Center of circle. and the Point Method is Infer. This table shows the control points for some common curve types.

When the Infer point method is being used. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Curve Creation Inferred Point Selection In line and arc creation. the system infers the following: D Cursor Location (when a control point. as well as other useful information. valuable feedback will be given in the Status line. the position of the cursor or Selection Ball as geometry is selected is very important. arc center. It will also display the type of line or arc being created. It will tell what kind of point or object is highlighted. or object is not in the Selection Ball) Control points (when inside the Selection Ball) An entire curve (when an object is selected where a control point is not encircled) D D Status Line Feedback While Basic Curves are being created.

(selection ball not over a control point) An arc center of a circle or ellipse A complete circle or ellipse. conic. arc. arc. arc. or spline.Curve Creation Inferred Selection Chart Contents of Selection Ball Nothing Selected Geometry A screen position Examples An existing point The existing point The control point The line. but not one of its control points or A complete circle or ellipse. conic. or spline An endpoint or midpoint of a line. (selection ball over the control point) A knot point of a spline (splines are covered in the Freeform Modeling Course) The circle or ellipse The control point (end point) The knot point EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-7 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D The center of the circle or ellipse . or partial ellipse A line.

The ZC value of the point will be 0. Pre selection highlighting reverts to the Selection Preferences dialog box status. Inferred Point Cursor Location Existing Point End Point Control Point Intersection Point Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center Quadrant Point Select Face Point Constructor (See page Appendix B for more information) ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D-8 When using a point method other than Infer. and String Mode. shown below. NOTE: A Cursor Location. Point Method The Point Method option menu. Control points are no longer highlighted. is simply projected onto the XC-YC plane. The options on this menu (other than Inferred Point and Select Face) work similarly to those in the Point Constructor dialog box.Curve Creation General Curve Creation Options This section discusses some of the options in the center of the Basic Curves dialog box which apply to many different curve creation situations. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . allows points to be specified relative to existing geometry by specifying a cursor location or by using the Point Subfunction. We will discuss Point Method and String Mode in this appendix. sometimes called Screen Position. The options include Delta. several things change: D D D The cursor location is no longer tracked in the Dialog Bar. Point Method.

To stop string mode and start it again with the next object created. When Back is chosen from that dialog box. NOTE: When String Mode is turned on. To stop string mode.) this option is not available. This option can also be used to create a line normal to a face. the entering of new values in the parameter text fields as soon as a line or arc is finished being created will not update the previously created curve. the Basic Curve dialog box returns. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D . When in any other curve creation mode (arc. turn the button OFF. choose Break String or press the middle mouse button. spline. the Point Constructor dialog box is displayed.Curve Creation The Select Face option allows the selection of a face for use as the limiting object for a line. etc. the end of one object becomes the beginning of the next. If the Point Constructor method is chosen. circle. Existing Point Cursor Location End Point Control Point Intersection Point Inferred Point Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center Angle on Arc/Ellipse Quadrant Point None Rectangular Restores Base Point values to zero and Offset to none Cylindrical Spherical Vector Along Curve String Mode When this option is ON.

(The Snap Angle is controlled in the Sketch Preferences dialog box. YC ZC XC Second point First point NOTE: If a screen position is specified as the second point. and this selection defines a line that is within the Snap Angle of being vertical or horizontal from the first point. Through a Point and Horizontal or Vertical When the second point of a line is defined using a screen position. the line will snap to vertical or horizontal. or values established by entering numbers in the XC. and the Angle Increment value is not zero. The points may be a combination of screen positions and control points selected in the graphics area.) Snap Angle is only applicable when using the Inferred point method. YC. the line will snap to the nearest increment of that angle.Curve Creation Line Creation Methods Between Two Points Simply define the two points (see below). YC ZC XC ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D-10 Snap angle is set to 3_ : First point 3° : Second point 3° Second point : 3° 3° First point : Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . and ZC fields in the Dialog Bar and pressing <Enter>.

Curve Creation Through a Point and at an Angle to the XC Axis D D Define the start point. YC ZC XC Cursor location Angle from XC Axis Start location Start location Cursor location EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D Angle from XC Axis plus 180 degrees . The value in the Angle text field will also update to reflect the start/cursor locations. D NOTE: Angles are measured counter clockwise from the XC axis. Establish the length by specifying a screen position. See the illustration below. or entering a length value in the Dialog Bar. Enter the desired angle in the Angle text field in the Dialog Bar and press the <Tab> key. A line at this angle or at this angle plus 180 degrees (depending on where the cursor is relative to the start point) will rubber band in the graphics area. selecting geometry.

being careful not to select one of its control points. the parallel. perpendicular. Parallel line Line at an angle Defined point Perpendicular line Selected line D If it is desired to create a line at an angle to the selected line. When the line is displayed. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D-12 D Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . entering a new value in the Dialog Bar. Move the cursor around. or at an Angle to an Existing Line D D Define the start point of the new line. enter the desired value in the Angle text field in the Dialog Bar and press tab. Select the existing line. selecting geometry.Curve Creation Through a Point and Parallel. Depending on where the cursor is. Perpendicular. or angled line (see below) may be previewed. establish the length by: specifying a screen position. The Status line shows which mode is being previewed. or immediately after the line is created. NOTE: The first two steps may be completed in either order.

Choose Apply. each new line is created at the specified distance from the last line created. The direction of the offset is dependent on how the original line was selected. each new line is created at the specified distance from the line that was originally selected.Curve Creation Parallel to An Existing Line at a Distance Parallel at Distance From . The new line is offset from the line selected and equal in length. Select a line. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D . When this option is set to Original. The offset line is created on the side where the center of the selection ball is when the original line is selected. When it is set to New. D D D D Make sure String Mode is Toggled to Off.This option affects line creation when a series of parallel lines are being created. additional parallel lines will be created. The Offset Distance value may be changed at any time. Offset distance Selected line New line If Apply is continually chosen. Enter the Offset Distance in the Dialog Bar.

Defined point (the endpoint of the arc) ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D-14 Tangent line Tangent line Perpendicular line Defined point Perpendicular line Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . (Notice that the dashed line shows the line that would be created with the dashed cursor in that position. There are times that the rubber banding line is on the wrong side of the curve. D When the desired line is displayed.Curve Creation Through a Point and Tangent or Perpendicular to a Curve D D Define the start point of the new line. being careful not to select one of its control points. Move the cursor inside. NOTE: The curve may be selected first. then the point may be defined. if a tangent line is being created. The line rubber bands tangentially to the selected curve. select the highlighted geometry. or by selecting the object in that position. Select the existing curve. The example below shows two examples of creating a line through a point and tangent or perpendicular to an arc or circle. If a perpendicular line is being created. then outside the curve until the line snaps to the other side.) The same is true for the solid line and cursor. the point must be defined first.

Curve Creation Tangent to a Curve and Tangent or Perpendicular to Another Curve D Select the first curve. select the highlighted geometry. depending on the cursor position. Tangent line Second curve Perpendicular line First curve EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-15 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D . one is tangent to a circle and the other is perpendicular to a circle. D Select the second curve. When the desired line is displayed. D The illustration below shows the creation of 2 lines. again being careful not to select one of its control points. being careful not to select one of its control points. The line rubber bands tangentially or perpendicularly to the selected curve.

NOTE: If selecting geometry to specify the length of the line would result in the line type being changed. again being careful not to select one of its control points. then select the limiting geometry. A specific length may also be established immediately after the line is created by entering the value in the Dialog Bar. perpendicular. Perpendicular. D When the desired line is displayed. The rubber banding line will be shown parallel. the selected line.Curve Creation Tangent to a Curve and Parallel. Second object First object ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D Select the curve and line as shown The parallel. being careful not to select one of its control points. or at an Angle to an Existing Line D D Select the curve. or at an angle to. perpendicular. establish the length by specifying a screen position or selecting geometry. Select the line. press the middle mouse button to choose Lock Mode. and angled lines will appear individually as the cursor is moved around D-16 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

S Define a point S Select a line S Select limiting point/object [Can also select line. perpendicular. or at an angle to a line 1 2 1 2 Line through a point and tangent or normal to a curve 2 1 S Select a point S Select a curve S Select limiting point/object (if necessary) Line tangent or perpendicular to two curves Select two curves Line tangent to a curve and parallel or perpendicular to a line A bisector line 2 1 S Select two curves S Select limiting point/object Select two lines EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-17 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D . or at an angle to the WCS Y 1 X S Define the first point S Define second point within the Snap Angle setting or S Enter the desired angle. and define second point. vertical.Curve Creation Line Creation Chart Line between two points Select two points Line through a point and horizontal. then point] Line through a point and parallel. press <Tab>.

Note the location and orientation of the WCS. - Toggle String Mode to Off. Create the lines as described in the steps only. The snap angle is set to the default of 3°.Curve Creation Activity 1 . Create a horizontal and vertical line by clicking at two different screen positions each time as shown: ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D-18 First selections here Second selections here TIP If a start position was erroneously selected. when cursor locations are specified within 3° of vertical or horizontal. Step 2 Save the part file as ***_curves_1. There is no need to cancel out of the Basic Curve dialog box. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Creating Lines In this activity lines will be created using the methods previously discussed. Step 3 Choose Insert"Curve"Basic Curves. choosing the icon again will reset the line creation process. Step 4 Create Lines Between Two Cursor Locations. Step 1 Open part file pau_curves_1 and start the Modeling application. the line will snap to a truly vertical or horizontal orientation. Additional curves will be created in subsequent activities to further increase understanding. - Choose the Line icon if not already selected. Therefore.

The line is edited to that angle. then press Enter. - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-19 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D . Step 5 Create Lines From Endpoints or Midpoints of One Line to Another. - Change the work layer to 2 and make layer 1 invisible. enter 45. and press Enter. - Double click in the Length text box on the Dialog Bar in overstrike mode and enter 4. Choose Refresh (third mouse button). The line is edited to that length. Select here Select here Notice that the line remains highlighted. - Tab to the Angle text box on the Dialog Bar.Curve Creation - Create a diagonal line as illustrated below. Turn Fit All before Displaying to On and choose OK.

Curve Creation - Select the two lines at their midpoints as shown. A line will be created point to point regardless of snap angle.) - Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Select this line here Select this line here Before After ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D-20 Step 6 Create a Line Through a Point and Parallel to Another Line. avoiding control points. The endpoint highlights before selection. (The order does not matter . - Select the bottom diagonal line with the cross hairs on the endpoint as shown below. Select this line here Select this line here Before - After Select the same two lines at their endpoints on the right.the line could have been selected before the endpoint. A line will be created point to point regardless of the snap angle. Select the base line at the top as shown.

A trim point or object now needs to be selected. Select this line as a base line Select this endpoint - Move the cursor to the right so the rubber band image is parallel to the base line and select the middle mouse button to lock in the construction mode of parallel.Curve Creation A line appears rubber banding from the first point at 90° angles from the base line. Step 7 Create a Line Parallel to an Existing Line at a Distance. Choosing this line causes the new line to be trimmed to a point that the two lines have in common (intersection point). - Choose the line created on the right. avoiding its control points. This line and the line being created define the intersection point to which the line being created is trimmed. relative to the cursor position. - Change the work layer to 3 and make layer 2 invisible. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-21 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D .

key in 0 (zero) and press Enter. In the YC text box.Curve Creation - Select the line as illustrated below (avoid the line's control points). The last line created is removed. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D-22 This line will be started at the WCS origin and its angle defined relative to the WCS. - Insert→Curve→Basic Curves. Choose third mouse button→Undo. - In the Dialog Bar. key in an Offset Distance of 2 and press Enter. Notice that the line was created on the side of the base line that the selection ball was on at the time of line selection. In the ZC text box. Enter 0 (zero) and press the Tab key. Put focus in the XC text box located in the Dialog Bar. key in 0 (zero) and press the Tab key. - Select third mouse button→Cancel. Step 8 Create a Line Through a Point at a Specified Angle. A line the same length as the existing line is created.

200° Theoretical trim line Step 9 Create a Line Through a Point and Tangent to an Existing Arc/Circle. - Position the cursor in the lower left to display the 200° line. type 200. Moving the cursor around displays the intended rubber banded line (or a line at 20° if the cursor is in the upper right area). defining the endpoint of the line. Ensure that Unbounded is Off.Curve Creation - Double click in the Angle text box of the Dialog Bar. Select the left endpoint of the horizontal line. - Change the work layer to 5 and make layer 3 invisible. Select on the right side of the arc. Instead of selecting a trim line as in Step 6. A theoretical trim line was projected off of the current cursor position and perpendicular to the line created. select a screen position. and press the Tab key to lock in that value. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-23 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D . not on a control point.

both objects must be coplanar. double click in the Angle text box and key in 20.Curve Creation As you do this. the Status line will indicate Tangent. Step 10 Create a Line at an Angle from a Line and Tangent to a Curve. Select the circle on the upper left side. The angle is measured counterclockwise from the base line. This defines the base line. - Select the last line created avoiding its control points. Select the horizontal line away from its control points. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D-24 - - - Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . In the Dialog Bar. then use the middle mouse button to select Lock Mode. Press Tab to lock in the angle value. To create a line at a specific angle from a base line and tangent to an existing curve. Move the selection ball around until the status line reads Angle.

Curve Creation A line is created tangent to the arc. 20° Step 11 Save the part. at an angle of 20° from the base curve and trimmed to the horizontal line. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-25 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D .

Curve Creation Creating Arcs and Circles Arcs and circles are created with different icons and minor differences in functionality. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D-26 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . size. As a matter of definition. and an arc is a portion of a circle. circle means a complete circle. and start and end points. Both provide immediate display feedback and rely on the simple definition of arc center.

an arc may be created that passes through three points. and the arc center. which can be adjusted by entering angle values in the Dialog Bar. or which passes through two points and is tangent to a selected object. End With this method. D D Creation Method There are two methods for creating arcs: D Start. If an arc is chosen such that one of its four control points lies within the Selection Ball. Dialog Bar Fields Radius Diameter Start Angle End Angle EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-27 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D . Point on Arc With this method. the arc itself will be selected.Curve Creation Creating Arcs When creating arcs. Start. the center point. inferring tangency or a trim location. End. its control point will be selected. then the start and endpoints of the arc are defined. If an arc is chosen with none of its control points within the Selection Ball. there are several things to keep in mind: D Arcs have four control points: two endpoints. a midpoint. D Center.

Second point First point ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D-28 : Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Define a second point. This becomes the center of the circle. That information can be defined by numerical entry or selections from the screen. Center Point. The circumference of the circle passes through this point. A value may be entered in the Dialog Bar to establish an exact radius or diameter.Curve Creation Creating Circles Circle creation simply requires the definition of a center location and a size. Point on Circle D D Define a point.

Creating Arcs and Circles In this activity. end at the second. Choose Insert→Curve→Basic Curves.Curve Creation Activity 2 . Point on Arc Creation Method (if necessary). The arc will start at the first point. Step 1 Create an Arc through three points. and pass through the third. End. Choose the Start. different methods will be used to create arcs and circles. - Change the work layer to 7 and make layer 5 invisible. Three points will be used to create an arc. Continue working with the ***_curves_1 file. Turn String Mode Off. Create an arc by selecting the screen positions in order as shown: First selection (for start point) - Second selection (for end point) EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-29 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D Third selection (for arc size) . Choose the Arc icon.

press Tab. Step 2 Create an Arc through two points and tangent to another arc.Curve Creation - Zoom out. Start. in the YC text box enter 0. Third selection (for arc size) First selection (for start point) Second selection (for end point) Step 3 Create an Arc by defining the size and end angles. An arc is created that is tangent to the first arc created. Do not select on a control point. to see the entire arc. - Choose the Center. Double click in the XC text box on the Dialog Bar and enter 0. as shown below. press Enter Select the upper right endpoint of the 45° line again. End method. if necessary. Select the arc just created. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D-30 - Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Select the ends of the 45° line. An arc displays in preview and the Cue Line prompts for an end point or object.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-31 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D . Step 4 Save the part. The arc is created starting at the diagonal line endpoint and ending at a point that is in line with the arc center and the end of the horizontal line endpoint.Curve Creation - Select the right endpoint of the horizontal line as shown: First selection (for start point) Second selection (for end point) - Choose Fit.

point on circle 2 1 S Define first point S Define second point ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D Circle center. tangent object. start point. end point. end point 3 1 2 S Define first point S Define second point S Define third point Circle center. tangent object 1 2 S Define point S Select tangent object D-32 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . point on arc 2 1 3 S Define first point S Define second point S Define third point Start point. end point.Curve Creation Arc/Circle Creation Chart Start point. end point 1 2 3 Arc center. tangent object 1 2 3 S Define first point S Define second point S Select tangent object S Define start point S Select tangent object S Define end point Start point.

the latter two methods allow manual trimming options. the Curve Fillet dialog box is displayed. This section contains a brief explanation of Fillet creation functionality. When the Fillet icon is chosen on the Basic Curves dialog box. as shown below: EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-33 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D . and 3 Curve. At the end of this section. you will find a summary of Fillet creation methods.Curve Creation Fillets Fillets are arcs that have tangent relationships with one or more curves. There are three Fillet creation methods: Simple. meaning the tangent relationships will be maintained as the fillet radius or arc center is changed. They are editable as fillets. 2 Curve.

Select from the following trim options: Trim First Curve Trim/Delete Second Curve Trim Third Curve The Delete Second Curve and Trim Third Curve options are applicable to the 3 Curve Fillet only. Specify the approximate center of the fillet (two and three curve only). none of the curves are trimmed. Indicate the desired trim methods for the objects (two and three curve only). If a fillet is created other than desired. Enter the radius of the fillet.Curve Creation Procedure D D Choose the type of fillet desired. trim options for each of the selected curves may be specified. Undo may be selected to delete the fillet and restore the selected curves. this is accomplished by using the cursor or the Point Constructor. If no trimming options are selected. Using the cursor location method in Point Constructor selects a position in the X Y plane of the WCS. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D-34 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . D D D When creating 2 and 3 Curve Fillets. When creating 2 and 3 Curve Fillets the approximate center must be indicated. Select the objects.

NOTE: The trim options and Point Constructor are not available. an error message displays. The size of the fillet is determined by entering a value for the radius first. Crosshairs L1 L1 Selected quadrant L2 L2 BEFORE AFTER Before After EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-35 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D As both lines are selected. The lines are automatically trimmed to the points of tangency. . If the Selection Ball contains only one line. Position the crosshairs in the quadrant formed by the lines to define the desired fillet center. the crosshairs determine which fillet is created.Curve Creation Simple Fillet Simple Fillet creates a fillet between two coplanar non parallel lines. The Selection Ball must be positioned in such a manner as to include both lines. it indicates the center of the arc. The fillet that is created is directly related to where the lines were selected. Each line extends or trims to the arc.

circles. (See below. the fillet plane is the plane containing the tangent of the first curve.) Curve 1 Fillet plane Fillet ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D-36 Vectors normal to both tangents Curve 2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . conics or splines.Curve Creation 2 Curve Fillet The 2 Curve Fillet constructs a fillet between two curves. Curve 1 Curve 2 Approximate fillet center Curve 2 Curve 1 If the two selected curves are in different planes. including points. lines. The plane is normal to the vectors that are normal to both tangents and is totally independent of the WCS. A two curve fillet is generated in the counterclockwise direction from the first curve to the second.

Curve Creation 3 Curve Fillet This option creates a fillet between three curves. The system constructs the fillet in such a manner that the center of the arc is equidistant to all three curves. to the tangent point of the fillet. Curve 3 Curve 1 Curve 2 Before After The system trims curves. The three curves do not have to lie in the same plane. based on the selected options. arcs. conics. the system prompts for additional information to create the fillet: D D D Tangent Outside Fillet Within Circle Circle Within Fillet. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-37 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D . If any one of the curves selected is an arc. lines. The Radius entry box is not available because it is determined by the geometry selected. A three curve fillet is a circular arc generated in a counterclockwise direction from the first curve to the third curve. and splines. which can be any combination of points.

Curve Creation Curve 1 Curve 1 Before After Fillet Curve 2 Curve 3 Curve 3 Tangent Outside Curve 1 Curve 1 Fillet ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D-38 Curve 2 Before Curve 3 After Curve 3 Fillet Within Circle Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

but not tangent to it. 1 : 2 3 : 2 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-39 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D 1 .Curve Creation Curve 1 Curve 1 Curve 2 Fillet Curve 3 Before After Curve 3 Circle Within Fillet The Point Constructor selections may be used to create a cliff edge fillet. where the fillet is contiguous with a selected curve.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D-40 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . you must also specify a quadrant for the center of the fillet. use the Edit "Curve"Fillet option.Curve Creation Fillet Creation Methods Chart Note: Numbered steps indicate this is not the only way the arc/circle can be created. This concludes discussion of the creation functions found on the Basic Curves dialog box. S Select first object S Select second object S Select third object 3 curve fillet 3 1 2 To edit a fillet. Simple fillet (lines only) S Select both lines simultaneously (both must intersect the selection ball) 2 curve fillet 2 S Select first object S Select second object 3 1 If the objects extend beyond their intersection point.

- Remember. choose Undo (using the third mouse button). Choose the Fillet icon. Practice placing fillets in 4 different line configurations. Before After To restore the lines to their original state. - Enter a radius of . select the fillet lines in each of the four corners as shown below. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-41 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D . Choose the Simple Fillet icon. Choose Insert"Curve"Basic Curves. Step 2 Create a 2 Curve Fillet (Trimming Only One Curve).Creating Fillets Step 1 Create a Simple Fillet. For this step create a fillet with two curves.Curve Creation Activity 3 .75. only two lines are used to create a Simple Fillet. but trim just one of the curves. Keep both lines inside the Selection Ball when selecting. - In Area #1. Cursor placement is critical. - Open part file pau_fillet_1 and select the Modeling application.

Notice that the fillet process is modal.5 for the radius. Ensure that the system retained . In area #2. then select the arc (second object). - Enter 1. that more fillets may be created without reselecting any icons.) - Ensure that Trim First Curve is turned on. select the yellow line (first object). - Select second Indicate here Select first Before After ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D-42 Step 3 Create a 2 Curve Fillet (and Use a Point for One of the Curves). Choose the Trim Second Curve button to turn the option off. (See below. select the cyan line. In this case trim the line but not the arc. Define which object will be trimmed. In area 2. Choose Point Constructor. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Curve Creation - Choose the 2 Curve Fillet icon. Indicate the approximate center of the fillet as shown below.75 for the radius.

Ensure that Trim Third Curve is turned on.Curve Creation - Select the endpoint at the left end of the white line. Indicate here Select point Select first Before - After Choose Back to return to the Create Fillet dialog box. Select the 3 curves in a counterclockwise order as shown. Select first Select second Indicate here Select third Before After EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-43 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D . Indicate the approximate center of the fillet as shown above. Trim the first and third curves and delete the second. Ensure that Trim First Curve is turned on. - Choose the 3 Curve Fillet icon. Step 4 Create a 3 Curve Fillet. Choose the Delete Second Curve button to turn it on.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D-44 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Curve Creation - Indicate the approximate center of the fillet as shown above. Step 5 Close all part files and do not save.

Curve Creation Editing Curves The options on the Edit Curve option allows the modifications of existing curves. then choose the Edit Curve Parameters icon. choose Insert→Curve→Basic Curves to display the Basic Curves dialog box. To display the dialog box. Edit Curve Parameters Trim EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-45 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D .

The line now rubber bands from the fixed end. The following types of curve edits are discussed in this section: D D Editing a Line Editing an Arc or Circle Editing a Line A line may be edited by changing its endpoints or its parameters (length and angle). To change a line's endpoint: D Select the line end to be modified. The direction that the line is extended is dependent on which side of the center control point selected. Specify a new position using any of the Point Method options on the dialog box. To change a line's parameters: ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D-46 D D Select the line. the edit mode for that type of curve appears.Curve Creation Edit Curve Parameters When this icon is active and a curve is selected. D A line may also be Stretched to move its endpoint. avoiding its control points. D Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . then press <Enter>. Enter new values for the length and/or angle in the Dialog Bar.

or changing them by dragging to a new location. . start angle. The arc's or circle's parameters may be changed by entering new values in the Dialog Bar. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-47 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D Select the arc or circle. Using Parameters Mode To change an arc or circle using Parameters mode: D D Enter new values in the radius. Drag the arc or circle to a new location. or enter a new XC. as follows: D D Select the center of the arc or circle. ZC location in the Dialog Bar. Moving an Arc or Circle to a New Location An arc or circle may be moved to a new location. and/or end angle fields in the Dialog Bar and press <Enter>. YC. avoiding its control points. diameter.Curve Creation Editing an Arc or Circle The two methods used to edit an arc or circle are Parameters and Dragging. regardless of the editing mode that is active.

and that endpoint will be projected onto the arc to determine its start angle. Other geometry may also be selected to control the size of the arc. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D-48 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . When it is the size desired. D To change the start or end angle of the arc or circle. press the first mouse button. A line may be selected to stop the arc at its intersection with the line. or the endpoint of another arc may be selected to make the selected arc pass through it. select it. For example. When the angle is correct. or an endpoint of another object may be selected.Curve Creation Using Dragging Mode There are two ways to change an arc or circle using Dragging mode: D To change the radius of the arc or circle. Other geometry may also be selected to control the start and/or end angles of the arc. and drag it. a line may be selected to make the arc tangent to it. press the first mouse button. avoiding its control points. select it at the desired endpoint and drag it.

A bounding object can be a curve. D D D Select the bounding objects. Select the curve to trim. it is trimmed to its intersection with one or two bounding objects. Caution must be taken when selecting the curve to trim. If there are multiple intersection points. when trimming a curve. Define the type of trim to perform. select near the desired intersection.Curve Creation Trim When a curve is trimmed. the system will prompt for the selection of the desired intersection point to be used as the bounding point. plane. point. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-49 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D Procedure . The portion of the curve being trimmed determines which end is trimmed. and not more than two. The segment of the object that is selected is always removed or extended (see below). face. Once the bounding objects have been specified. or view point. Bounding Arc Bounding Arc Intersection Point If the line is selected here BEFORE TRIM Intersection Point The left part of the line is trimmed AFTER TRIM One bounding object must be specified. multiple curves may be specified and they will all be trimmed to the bounding objects.

Step 2 Trim the Three lines to an Arc. In this case. so the selection may be skipped by clicking MB2. Select the Modeling application. it is not necessary to have a second bounding object. LINE1 Select the arc as the bounding object LINE2 LINE3 - Click MB2. LINE1 LINE2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D-50 - Select the first line to be trimmed LINE3 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Select the arc as the first bounding object. Choose the Trim icon. Select LINE1 as shown below as the curve to trim. - Open the part file pau_editcurve_1.Curve Creation Activity 4 .Trimming Curves Step 1 Trim Curves to One Bounding Object. Choose Insert"Curve"Basic Curves.

- Select the lower end of the second line. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-51 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D . LINE1 LINE2 LINE3 The system will trim LINE3 by the combination of the side of the midpoint of LINE3 and the side of the bounding curve.Curve Creation The bounding curves don't change. LINE1 LINE2 LINE3 The second line is trimmed to the defined bounding line. - Select the lower end of the third line. Step 3 Close the part. so continue trimming.

Curve Creation (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D-52 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

WCS Origin: Allows the location of the WCS to be altered using the Point Constructor. and is a common function in any CAE system. endpoints. you can define origin points. Unigraphics offers a standard dialog box that provides multiple point methods to define location.WCS Options WCS Options Appendix E This appendix describes additional WCS manipulation options. Defining Points for Location To determine the location of the WCS. while the rotation of the axes remains unchanged. start points. etc. Using the Point Constructor dialog box. the definition of specific points in space is necessary. Primitives or any other geometry. Existing Point Cursor Location Inferred Point Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center Angle on Arc/Ellipse Quadrant Point None Rectangular Cylindrical Restores Base Point values to zero and Offset to none Spherical Vector Along Curve Point on Surface Point on Curve/Edge End Point Control Point Intersection Point EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual E-1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ E . based on existing geometry or coordinate values.

from the XC axis toward the YC axis 90_ After ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ E E-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Endpoint selected as new WCS origin Before After Rotate WCS: Allows the rotation of the WCS to be altered. while the location of the axes remains unchanged. The top line of the following menu could be read Rotate about ZC. XC to YC". The figure below illustrates an example of Rotate about ZC: XC to YC Before About the ZC axis.WCS Options NOTE: For more information on Point types. see Appendix B.

Save Edit. Modeling Hot Key Ctrl N Ctrl O Ctrl P Ctrl Q Ctrl R Ctrl S Ctrl T Ctrl U Ctrl V Ctrl W Ctrl X Ctrl Y Ctrl Z Function File. Blank Copy Delete Tools. Open File. Gateway Cut Edit. New File. Operation.Hot Keys Appendix F This appendix describes the various short cuts via Hot Keys Hot Key Ctrl A Ctrl B Ctrl C Ctrl D Ctrl E Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl F G H I J K L M Function Assembly Navigator Edit. Object Edit. Layer Settings Application. Rotate (full menu) File. Transform Execute User Function Paste Application. Expression Fit View Grip Execute Information. Undo EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual F-1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ F Hot Keys . Plot View. Object Display Format.

Open Tools. Fit All Ctrl Shift S Views Debug Grip Ctrl Shift T High Quality Image Ctrl Shift U Ctrl Shift V Ctrl Shift W Ctrl Shift X Ctrl Shift Y Ctrl Shift Z Format. Layout. Blank. Boundary Tools. Reverse Blank Ctrl Shift O All View.Hot Keys F Ctrl Shift A Ctrl Shift B Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl Shift Shift Shift Shift C D E F Ctrl Shift G Ctrl Shift H Ctrl Shift I Ctrl Shift J Ctrl Shift K File. Step Preferences. Blank. Playback Quick Shaded Image Tools. Layout. Blank. Operation. Layout. Visible In View ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Preferences. Save As Ctrl Shift N Edit. Record Toolsm Macro. Zoom (full menu) Alt Tab Alt F4 F1 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 Toggles Application Closes Active Window Help on Context View Current Dialog Information Window Refresh Quick Zoom Quick Rotate Ctrl Alt B Ctrl Alt C Ctrl Alt M Ctrl Alt N Ctrl Alt W Ctrl Alt X Tools. Macro. Curvature Graph Ctrl Shift P Ctrl Shift Q Ctrl Shift R Format. New Format. Lathe Cross-Sec tion F-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . CLSF Application Manufactur ing Tools. Unblank Se lected Ctrl Shift L Ctrl Shift M Model Navigator View. Unblank All Of Part Format. Selection Edit. Macro. Unisim Application Assemblies Tools. Object Edit.

associativity . EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual GL-1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ GL . numerals. In Unigraphics.Glossary Glossary ABS .Coordinate system in which all geometry is located from a fixed or absolute zero point. Absolute Coordinate System .Pieces of information that can be associated with Unigraphics geometry and parts such as assigning a name to an object. arc . sometimes used interchangeably with the term circle.The ratio of length to height which represents the change in size of a symbol from its original. attributes . active view . and manufacture of parts in Unigraphics.A collection of piece parts and sub assemblies representing a product.A Unigraphics part file which is a user defined. an angle measured on the X Y plane of a coordinate system is positive if the direction that it is swept is counterclockwise as viewed from the positive Z axis side of the X Y plane. An angle swept in the opposite direction is said to be negative." ASCII . aspect ratio .Absolute coordinate system. an assembly is a part file which contains components.One of up to 49 views per layout in which you can directly work.American Standard Code for Information Interchange. structured combination of sub assemblies.In Unigraphics.The ability to tie together (link) separate pieces of information to aid in automating the design. assembly part . It is a set of 8 bit binary numbers representing the alphabet. and other special symbols used in text representation and communications protocol. angle . components and/or objects. punctuation.An incomplete circle. assembly . drafting.

bottom up modeling .Glossary block font ." component .A set of geometric objects that describes the containment of a part from a vantage point. by the assembly. cone direction . category. component part .A Unigraphics character font which is the default font used for creating text in drafting objects and dimensions. in an assembly part. circle . A component may be a sub assembly consisting of other. All assemblies using the component are automatically updated when opened to reflect the geometric edits made at the piece part level.The half vertex angle defines the angle formed by the axis of the cone and its side. if descriptive of the type of data found on the layers to which it is assigned. CAD/CAM . half angle .A method of selecting a sequence of curves which are joined end to end.The part file or master" pointed to by a component within an assembly. similar to a group.Defines the base origin using the Point Subfunction. cone origin . sometimes used interchangeably with the term arc. or group of layers. The actual geometry is stored in the component part and referenced. layer .A complete and closed arc. chaining . ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ GL GL-2 boundary .Computer Aided Design/Computer Aided Manufacturing. lower level components. will assist the user in identifying and managing data in a part file.A collection of objects. not copied. body . Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . A category.Modeling technique where component parts are designed and edited in isolation of their usage within some higher level assembly.Class of objects containing sheets and solids (see solid body and sheet body).A name assigned to a layer.Defines the cone direction using the Vector Subfunction. A separate Unigraphics part file that the system associates with a component object in the assembly part.

Also referred to as edit in place. arcs. Geometry from other components can be selected to aid in the modeling. Splines created using defining points are forced to pass through the points. Endpoints of splines. defining points . Midpoints and endpoints of lines 6. A control point is a position on existing geometry.Refer to the methods you can use to refine and limit your sketch. degree of freedom arrows . or a spline. curve . arc. DEFINING POINTS. a conic. design in context . The methods of constraining a sketch are geometric and dimensional. See POLES.Represents a specific location on an existing object. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual GL-3 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ GL . defaults . while the control points for an open arc are its end and midpoints.The right hand rule determines the counter clockwise direction. current layout .A method of creating a b curve in which curves (lines. The control point for a closed circle is its center. conics or splines) may be selected for conversion into a b curve. defining points. Construction points may be used as poles (control vertices). Any of the following points: 1.A system of axes used in specifying positions (CSYS). A geometric object. If the thumb is aligned with the ZC axis and pointing in the positive direction. or data points. Existing Points 2. construction points . conic. counterclockwise is defined as the direction the fingers would move from the positive XC axis to the positive YC axis.Spline construction points. spline or b curve.Arrow like indicators that show areas that require more information to fully constrain a sketch. Center points of circles 5.The layout currently displayed on the screen. These points are guaranteed to be on the spline. convert curve . A spline has a control point at each knot point.A curve in Unigraphics is any line.Assumed values when they are not specifically defined.Points used to create a spline. and DATA POINTS. an arc. counterclockwise . Endpoints and midpoints of open arcs 4. Coordinate System . Layout data is kept in an intermediate storage area until it is saved.Glossary constraints . this may refer to a line.The ability to directly edit component geometry as it is displayed in the assembly. A line has three control points: both end points and the midpoint of the line. Endpoints of conics 3. control point .

etc. width and spacing of characters belonging to a particular font. file .A hierarchical file organization structure which contains a list of filenames together with information for locating those files.An endpoint of a curve or an existing point.Various styles of lines and curves.See object filtering.Glossary dimensional constraint . dashed. bodies.This is a scalar value or expression which limits the measure of some geometric object such as the length of a line.A color coding option which helps distinguish geometry in the work part from geometry in other parts within the same assembly. font. such as solid.An all encompassing term which refers to all solids. expression . edit in place . In Unigraphics. font box . line . the radius of an arc. emphasize work part . and primitives. character . filtering . face . displayed part . The font box defines the size.A rectangle or box" composed of dashed line objects.An arithmetic or conditional statement that has a value. endpoint .A set of characters designed at a certain size.A region on the outside of a body enclosed by edges. directory .The part currently displayed in the graphics window. width and spacing.See design in context. font.A group or unit of logically related data which is labeled or named" and associated with a specified space. Expressions are used to control dimensions and the relationships between dimensions of a model. and patterns are a few types of files. or the distance between two points. feature . parts. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ GL GL-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Points along a B spline. grid . all text and dimensions on a second.A point on a spline where the curve changes from concave to convex. The line segments must be non parallel and coplanar.A body of zero thickness. For example. layer . isometric view (Tfr ISO) . The standard layouts in Unigraphics include one.Glossary free form feature .A relationship between one or more geometric objects that forces a limitation. (see body and sheet body) generator curve .one where equal distances along the coordinate axes are also equal to the view plane.A layer is a partition of a part. guide curve .A contiguous set of curves. inflection . in which views are displayed.Intersection formed by extending two line segments that do not touch to the position that they cross.The defining points of a spline. and tool paths on a third. knot points . geometric constraint .An individual menu in a sequence of menus used in performing a Unigraphics function.Isometric view orientation . four or six viewports. that can be swept or revolved to create a body. For example.A collection of viewports or window areas. interactive step . representing the endpoints of each spline segment. the user may create all geometry on one layer. Layers are analogous to the transparent material used by conventional designers. One of the axes is vertical. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual GL-5 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ GL . two lines that are perpendicular or parallel specifies a geometric constraint.A set of contiguous curves that define a path for a sweep operation. virtual intersection .A rectangular array of implied points used to accurately align locations which are entered by using the screen position" option. layout . either open or closed. two. or vice versa.

model space . etc.The point X = 0.Four Views.All geometry within the Unigraphics environment. L3 . menu .The coordinate system of a newly created part. origin .Concept used to define and control the relationships between the features of a model.The window used in listing operations. Y = 0. such as Info.Glossary layouts . L6 . See expression. This is also referred to as the absolute coordinate system. options . expression .Two Views. L2 . All expression names must be unique in a part file..Two Views. loaded part . parameters.The name of an expression is the single variable on the left hand side of the expression.) from among which the user can choose. It may be a piece part containing model geometry. parametric design . L4 . Information window .A Unigraphics surface type created by projecting (offsetting) points along all the normals of a selected surface at a specified distance to create a true" offset.prt extension. These include: L1 . Parts are loaded explicitly using the File→Open option and implicitly when they are used in an assembly being opened. Concept where the features of the model are defined by parameters. Each expression can have only one name.Single View.Standard layouts are available to the user. a sub assembly. name.A number of various alternatives (functions. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ GL GL-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . offset face .A list of options from which the user makes a selection. or a top level assembly.Six Views. modes. part . objects .Any part currently opened and in memory.A Unigraphics file containing a . Z = 0 for any particular coordinate system." Any other coordinate system may be thought of as a rotation and/or translation of the absolute coordinate system.

A component part which. sheet .A list of options (methods) by which positions can be specified in Unigraphics. the extended thumb determines the associated vector. If the origin of the coordinate system is in the palm of the right fist. point set .) EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual GL-7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ GL . Used for indicating positions. Conversely.A object consisting of one or more faces not enclosing a volume.The right hand rule is used to determine the orientation of a coordinate system. for performance reasons. has not been fully loaded.A collection of Unigraphics objects which together may represent some object or structure. A body of zero thickness. the outward extension of the index finger corresponds to the positive Y axis.A part for which the user does not have write access privilege. etc. Takes the form of a full screen cross. Refresh .Glossary part or model . screen cursor (cursor) . Only those portions of the component part necessary to render the higher level assembly are initially loaded (the reference set). the upward extension of the middle finger corresponds to the positive Z axis.A distribution of points on a curve between two bounding points on that curve. Also called sheet body. conventional . read only part . though placing great demand on the CPU. and the outward extension of the thumb corresponds to the positive X axis.Produces smooth pan. partially loaded part . right hand rule for rotation . right hand rule. real time dynamics .A function which causes the system to refresh the display list on the viewing screen. This removes temporary display items and fills in holes left by Blank or Delete.The right hand rule for rotation is used to associate vectors with directions of rotation. selecting objects. when the curled fingers are held so as to indicate a given direction of rotation. When the thumb is extended and aligned with a given vector. with the back of the hand lying on a table. and rotation of a part. the curled fingers determine the associated direction of rotation. Point Subfunction Menu . zoom.A marker on the screen which the user moves around using some position indicator device.

You refine your sketch with dimensional and geometric constraints until you achieve a precise representation of your design.The last saved version of a layout. trim . surface . A type of body (see Body). trimetric view (Tfr Tri) .To shorten or extend a curve. solid body . The measure along the X axis is 7/8 of the measure along Z. sub assembly .A contiguous series of lines and/or arcs connected at their end points. In Unigraphics II. Sketch Coordinate System (SCS) . temporary part .The underlying geometry used to define a face on a sheet body.A smooth free form curve.An empty part which is optionally created for any component parts which cannot be found in the process of opening an assembly. The underlying geometry used to define the shape of a face on a sheet. and the measure along the Y axis is 3/4 of the measure along Z.The Unigraphics System. top down modeling . stored view . A surface is always a sheet but a sheet is not necessarily a surface (see sheet body).The last saved version of a view. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ GL-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . system . When a sketch is created the WCS is changed to the SCS of the new sketch.Modeling technique where component parts can be created and edited while working at the assembly level.An enclosed volume. stored layout .A collection of geometric objects that closely approximates the outline of a particular design. GL spline .A part which both contains components and is itself used as a component in higher level assemblies.Glossary sketch . Geometric changes made at the assembly level are automatically reflected in the individual component part when saved.The SCS is a coordinate system which corresponds to the plane of the sketch.A viewing orientation which provides you with an excellent view of the principal axes. the trimetric view has the Z axis vertical. The sketch can then be extruded or revolved to obtain a 3D object or feature. string .

view dependent edit . EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual GL-9 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ GL . and Tfr Tri (top front right trimetric).Work Coordinate System. and manufacturing.Geometry created within a particular view. Front.A computer based turnkey graphics system for computer aided design. drawing reference point and scale. work layer .A particular display of the model. view dependent geometry .The layer on which geometry is being constructed. view .Modifications to the display of geometry in a particular view.A term which identifies the state of a part with respect to a series of modifications that have been made to the part since its creation. upgraded component . units .See WCS. The XC YC plane is called the work plane. you may define the unit of measure as inches or millimeters. produced by UGS. The coordinates of the WCS are called work coordinates and are denoted by XC. These include erase from view and modify color.A mode in which the user can edit a part in the current work view only. Upon log on. Tfr ISO (top front right isometric).The WCS (Work Coordinate System) is the coordinate system singled out by the user for use in construction.Glossary Unigraphics . Bottom. scale.Y and Z clipping bounds. WCS.A component which was originally created pre V10 but has been opened in V10 and upgraded to remove the duplicate geometry. verification. ZC. You may create objects on only one layer at a time. WCS .The unit of measure in which you may work when constructing in Unigraphics. Right. work plane . YC. Back. Left. It will only be displayed in that view. perspective vector. drafting. Eight standard views are available to the user: Top. view dependent modifications . version . etc. center. font and width. Work Coordinate System . View parameters include view orientation matrix. X.

XC axis . ZC axis . any construction and view dependent editing that is performed will occur only in the current work view.X axis of the work coordinate system.Y axis of the work coordinate system. the work part is always the same as the displayed part.The view in which work is being performed.The part in which you create and edit geometry. The work part can be your displayed part or any component part which is contained in your displayed assembly part. When displaying a piece part. GL-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Z axis of the work coordinate system. When the creation mode is view dependent. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ GL YC axis .Glossary work part . work view .

GL-2 creation method. 10-49 Apparent intersection point. 1-38 Close. GL-2 Origin. 9-6. 2-18 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual IN-1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ IN . 14-8 Boss. definition of. 6-3 Block. 2-3. D-47 Circular Array. D-28. center point. GL-1 Absolute Coordinate System. 6-13 Circular Array. GL-1 bottom-up . 8-12 Cone Direction. 10-52 placing the text. 13-64. 1-37 features.Index Index A ABS. 13-59. GL-2 Bottom-Up modeling. GL-2 Break String. add existing part . 8-3 Component Part. definition of. GL-2 Component Object. 5-5. D-28 edit. 2-2 Category. 13-76 B Blend. 16-11 Datum Plane . 10-17 Body. GL-1 Aspect Ratio. 3-34 Hollow Solid. 1-37 type. Layer. GL-1 Active View. GL-2 Chaining. GL-2 Constraints. 1-41 Form Feature Boss Creation.Dual Constraints. 11-27 Exit Unigraphics. GL-1 Attribute. 14-6 Intersect. 6-10 Circle. GL-2 Chamfer. during curve creation. D-9 C Cartesian. GL-2 Boolean Operations. definition of. 3-33 Bottom-Up Modeling. 14-9 Subtract. 8-4 Components. GL-1 Annotation Editor editing text. D-27 edit. 13-69. 16-5 Class selection subfunction filter methods. D-47 ASCII. 10-20 Automatic Update. 1-41 Component. B-6 Arc. GL-1 dialog bar fields. GL-3 Geometric. GL-1 Automatic Centerline. GL-2 Part. 1-41 Part File. 1-37 name. GL-1 Assemblies. 1-37 up one level. 1-39 Angle. 9-12 Chamfer Edges. 8-2 Associativity. 8-6 designing in context. 1-37 color. 8-5 Work Part. 8-16 Assembly. 14-9 Unite. point on circle. 5-7 Manipulating the Work Coordinate System. 8-5 Boundary. GL-1 Activities Blend Solid Edges. 2-10 Opening an Existing Part File. 10-50 tool bar. 1-16 Save Part As.

GL-4 Displayed Part. 15-3 Delete. D-45 trim. 10-19 Current Layout. 2-4. 10-10 Drawings adding a view. 12-4 Defaults. 13-59. 1-26 Edit curve. C-3 Dialog bar during arc creation. 2-24 Copy. Feature. 13-73 removing. 8-13. 13-61 creating dimensions. 1-15. curve. D-5 Convert. 2-2 reorienting of.Index geometric displaying. 10-2 Dual Constraints. 10-16. C-3 specify. D-46 Edit curve parameters. GL-7 Curve. GL-3 Delayed Update. 6-4 Edit Expressions. curve. 10-42 Direction. 2-2 moving of WCS. 11-3 Dual Constraints. 15-9 Delete positioning dimension. 10-7 setting the view display preferences. 10-29 local settings. 8-5 Destination layer. GL-3 Cursor.Undo. 10-17 smooth edges. 2-27 Designing in Context. GL-3 Control points. C-3 work. GL-3 Coordinate Systems. 10-3 removing drawing views . uses of. 10-33 appended text controls. 10-35 text justification options. GL-3 Create Expressions. D-46 Curves. 10-14 automatic update. 6-12 Drafting Application. C-3 original. 15-2. 15-30 Design in Context. 2-2 Cartesian. 2-16. 10-15 silhouettes. D-49 Curve parameters. GL-2 Directory. GL-4 Dimension Local Settings. edit. 10-33 Dimensions. 10-17 hidden line removal. Curves to B Curves. 15-5 transform. GL-3 Absolute. 10-40 extension line display. D-27 in curve creation. 13-73 Construction Points. basic. 10-39 precision options. 2-4 Sketch. D-3 Cylinder. 1-9 Create Centerline. 10-40 leader direction options. Cone. 4-3 Part. 10-17 uses of the drafting application. 10-2 Drawing Operations modifying a drawing. line. GL-3 Defining Points. 12-2 Datum Plane. GL-3 Control Point. D-4 Dimension Constraints. D-46 IN-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . GL-3 E Edge Blends. 10-34 arrow line display. 4-3 Feature. GL-4 Double Offset Chamfer. 10-29 Creating Utility Symbols. 12-4 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ IN D Datum Axis. C-4 Counterclockwise. 10-41 placement options. 10-10 Creating Dimensions. GL-3 Degree of freedom Arrows. GL-8 Work. GL-3 edit. C-2 Edit . transform.

15-30 Edit in Place. GL-6 Filter Box. 3-14 Hollow Feature. 5-3 I Implementation of Design Standards. 1-41 Close Part. -3 Implied intersection point.Index Edit dimension value. GL-4 close. -1 terminology. D-6 Inflection. 14-9 Unite. 4-3 Names. 3-30 Primitives. 14-8 Features. GL-5 G Generator Curve. 1-17 Quit. 10-15 Hole. 15-2. class standards. GL-4 Feature Creation Block. GL-2 Hidden Line Removal. GL-5 Geometric Constraint. 5-3 Wall Thickness. B-6 implied. 1-42 Save Part As. 3-14 Intersect. 15-5 Hole. 3-14 Hollow Solid. 4-4 Expressions. 15-7 Editing Features. B-6 Introduction. 1-41 New. 12-2 Hole. 15-27 Move Feature. GL-4 Edit Parameters. -6 K Knot Points. types of. GL-5 Instance. GL-4 Form Features. positioning dimension. GL-4 Character. GL-5 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual IN-3 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ IN . 15-6 File. 15-5 Emphasize Work Part. GL-4 Expression Editor. 1-39 Fillet create. GL-5 Guide Curve. 16-5 Rectangular Array. 1-37 Filtering. 16-2. 3-21 Subtract. 6-10 Cylinder. B-6 Infer. GL-4 Creating and Editing. 3-2 Free Form Feature. 5-3 Instance. GL-4 Endpoint. GL-5 Grid. 16-3 Pad. D-37 H Half Angle. 14-9 Intersection point apparent. 1-37 color. GL-5 F Face. GL-4 Font Box. 1-18 Filter methods. create simple fillet. 2-18 Boolean Operations. 1-9 Open. point method. 14-9 unsuppress. 15-2. 3-38 Pocket. 2-27 Datum Axis. 16-4 Intersect. GL-4 Line. 2-17 Slot. 1-37 type. two curve fillet. feature. 14-6 Boss. 16-3 Circular Array. 3-33 Chamfer. D-35 three curve fillet. D-36 feature. GL-4 Edit.

1-24 Menu. Line. B-11 using screen position with a grid. 5-2. C-4 N Non uniform scale. B-14 vector. B-3 Pre-selection highlighting. GL-5 Layout. 3-38 Parametric Design. B-7 control point. D-10 Toolbox-Curve. B-3 cursor location. 1-42 IN-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . B-8 arc/ellipse center. 15-43 Listing Window. B-13 Q Quit Unigraphics. GL-6 List information. 1-40 Millimeters. Part File Saved. B-3 intersection point. Cone. 10-50 creating text with a leader. 15-7 transform. GL-7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ IN Model Navigation Tool. B-12 spherical. Fillets. GL-7 Parts fully loaded. 1-9 Mirror through a line. D-50 M MB1. 6-12 Offset Surface. Model Navigation Tool. GL-6 Loaded Part. transform. Trim to Face. 6-2 Modifying a Drawing. 2-2. GL-7 Point subfunction angle on arc/ellipse. B-14 vector. B-6 offset. Chamfer. transform. B-4 existing point. B-15 cylindrical. 1-24 MB2. Part File. B-2. GL-2 P Pad. pop up menu options. 10-51 O Object. GL-6 Offset along curve. B-9 reset. B-12 spherical. B-3 end point. GL-5. 8-9 Pocket. GL-7 Point Subfunction. B-14 quadrant point. GL-7 Partially Loaded Part. D-41 Toolbox-Curve. 1-24 MB3. 15-1 Procedures Body of Revolution. B-15 cylindrical. D-5 Primitives. 10-3 Move Feature. B-14 Offset Angle. 15-43 Model Space. B-5 copying a point to work layer. transform. 8-8 partially loaded. GL-6 Modeling Operations. 1-17 Origin. 8-8 unloaded. B-13 rectangular. GL-6 Part. List Information. GL-6 Open. GL-6 Message.Index L Layer. GL-6 Locking a Constraint. GL-6. C-8 Notes and Labels editing text. during basic curve creation. C-4 Multiple copies. 3-30. C-11 Model. 10-52 placing the text. 3-30 Rectangular. 3-38 Point Set. Trim Curve. B-10 along curve. 13-23 rectangular. 14-37 Toolbox-Curve.

C-12 rotate about a point. 10-17 Simple fillet. 1-27. 3-21 Rectangular. C-8 rotate about a line. destination layer. GL-8 Symbols. transform. 2-2. C-4 Subtract. creating utility symbols. C-3 edit. GL-8 Selection Toolbar. 15-15 Sheet. GL-7 Rectangular Pocket. 8-5 Trace status. GL-8 Stored View. GL-7 Removing Drawing Views . 3-30. create. 8-2 Subdivisions. 6-11 Sketch. the WCS. 11-3 types of. C-3 Spline. GL-8 Tfr ISO. 8-18 rotate about a line. GL-8 constraining of. 8-23 transform. 11-2 Refresh. transform. GL-5 Tfr Tri. GL-8 Top-Down modeling. D-37 Tool Solid. C-6 delta. 10-16. definition of. create. 10-17 Snap Angle. C-4 multiple copies. C-11 move. 14-7 Temporary Part. 10-10 Reposition. 1-39 Scale. 8-22 transform. GL-7 Silhouettes. C-4 trace status. GL-8 Three curve fillet. GL-8 Sketch Curve Creation. C-7 subdivisions. C-10 scale. 10-19 associativity of utility symbols. 13-61 Coordinate System. C-2 mirror through a line. GL-7 Rotate. 10-20 deleting a utility symbol. GL-8 Target Solid. 8-16. 12-2 Datum Plane. 8-23 rotate about a point. 3-22 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual IN-5 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ IN T . 8-22 translate. GL-7 Real Time Dynamics. GL-8 Sub-assembly. GL-8 Specify. GL-8 Sub assembly. GL-8 Stored Layout. GL-8 String. 15-27 Right Hand Rule. 14-9 Surface. 10-20 System. C-3 translate. 14-7 Top-Down Modeling. 13-23 Snap angle. C-12 Rotate about a point reposition. 8-13. 3-38 Slot. 8-22 Respecify Parameters. 2-11 Rotate about a line reposition. C-10 Rotation. transform. C-3 Transform copy. GL-7 Smooth Edges. C-6 S Save Part As. 13-22 Slot. D-10 Solid Body. C-4 destination layer. 8-21. 3-22 Reference Feature Datum Axis. D-35 Single Offset Chamfer.Index R Read Only Part. C-4 non uniform scale. C-7 SCS.

GL-9 Z ZC Axis. GL-9 Isometric. 2-10 Origin. C-4 Translate reposition. GL-10 IN-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . 3-3. 2-3. 8-16. GL-5 Trimetric. 8-22 transform. 3-8 WCS. destination layer. GL-9 Inches. 15-6 Update. D-36 View. GL-9 Unite. D-49 Two curve fillet. GL-9 X XC Axis. 1-9 Unsuppress feature. GL-10 W WAVE. 1-26 Undo last. GL-9 Work Part. GL-8 Work. Component. 15-3 edit during update. 14-8 Units. GL-10 Y YC Axis. GL-9 Dynamics. create. C-6 undo last. 1-9 Millimeters. C-4 Unigraphics. 4-5 WCS Dynamics. 8-21. transform.Index to a point. GL-8 Trim curve. 2-4 Work. 2-26 Version. 15-10 Upgrade. GL-10 U Undo. GL-10 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ IN V Vectors. 1-15. transform. C-6 Trim. definition of. C-3 Work Layer. Defining of.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual .Reference Chart Tear Outs These tear out reference charts are provided for your convenience.

(This Page Intentionally Left Blank) Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

How long have you held these responsibilities? Years ______ Months ______ 4. modeling. translation interface. etc.Student Profile Practical Applications of Unigraphics Name Employer U. floor plans.S. If you have any additional comments please write them on the back of this form. Current responsibilities: 3. etc. assemblies. 1. analysis. Please check the box that best describes your current skill level in the various Unigraphics disciplines listed below. We are concerned about providing training that meets your needs.)? Date 9. How long have you been working with CAD/CAM/CAE systems? Years ______ 5. What is the function of your CAD/CAM/CAE system (documentation. Please list other completed CAD/CAM/CAE courses and the provider including Unigraphics CBT and CAST: Course Provider 10.)? 8. What do you model in your Unigraphics part files (castings. Job title: 2. none Wireframe Modeling Solid Modeling Parametric Modeling Drafting Assemblies Manufacturing novice intermediate advanced future use EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual . citizen? Yes / No When is your planned departure time?________________am/pm Please answer the following questions as honestly as you can. Are you currently using Unigraphics? _______ Version _______ Hours per week? 7. What other CAD/CAM/CAE systems are you familiar with? 6.

Additional Comments Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Datum Planes D Lesson 12. Form Features Expressions Face Operations D Lesson 6. Assembly. Datum Axes D Workbook Section 4 Rear Axle Modeling. Sketching Day 4 Thursday Morning D Lesson 14. Master Model Afternoon D Lesson 10. Getting Started D Lesson 2. Edge Operations D Workbook Section 1 Project Description & Rear Differential Modeling Day 2 Tuesday Morning D Lesson 7. D Lesson 4. and Drafting Afternoon D Lesson 13.Practical Applications of Unigraphics Course Agenda Day 1 Monday Morning D Introduction & Overview D Lesson 1. Introduction to Solid Modeling Afternoon D Lesson 3. Introduction to Assemblies D Workbook Section 2 Rear Differential Assembly D Lesson 9. Intro to Drafting D Workbook Section 3 Rear Differential Drafting Day 3 Wednesday Morning D Lesson 11. Swept Features & Boolean Operations D Workbook Section 5 Power Pack Sketching Afternoon D Workbook Section 6 D Workbook Section 7 Left Pinion Modeling. Assembly. D Lesson 5. and Drafting Rear Drive Gear Modeling EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual . Model Construction Query D Lesson 8.

Day 5 Friday Morning D Lesson 15. Editing the Model D Workbook Section 8 Part and Assembly Editing D Lesson 16. Instance Arrays Afternoon D Workbook Section 9 D Workbook Section 10 Rear Drive Gear Completion Assembly Completion Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Model Geometry Object Type Solid Geometry Inter part Modeling Sketch Geometry Curve Geometry Reference Geometry Sheet Bodies Layer Assignment 1-20 15-20 21-40 41-60 61-80 81-100 Category Name SOLIDS LINKED_OBJECTS SKETCHES CURVES DATUMS SHEETS Drafting Objects Object Type Drawing Borders Layer Assignment 101-110 Category Name FORMATS Engineering Disciplines Object Type Mechanism Tools Finite Element Meshes and Engr. Tools Manufacturing Quality Tools Layer Assignment 121-130 131-150 151-180 181-190 Category Name MECH CAE MFG QA EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual .Class Layers and Categories The following layer and category standards will be followed in this class.

(This Page Intentionally Left Blank) Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

and Circle Creation Methods Line Creation Note: When numbered picks are shown. then point] Line through a point and parallel. this is usually not the only way the line may be created. or at an angle to a line 1 2 1 2 Line through a point and tangent or normal to a curve 2 1 S Select a point S Select a curve S Select limiting point/object (if necessary) Line tangent or perpendicular to two curves Select two curves Line tangent to a curve and parallel or perpendicular to a line A bisector line 2 1 S Select two curves S Select limiting point/object Select two lines EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual . or at an angle to the WCS Y 1 X S Define the first point S Define second point within the Snap Angle setting or S Enter the desired angle and press <Tab>. perpendicular.Line. S Define a point S Select a line S Select limiting point/object [May also select line. Arc. Line between two points Select two points Line through a point and horizontal. vertical.

end point. point on circle 2 1 S Define first point S Define second point Circle center. tangent object 1 2 S Define point S Select tangent object Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . this is usually not the only way the arc or circle can be created. tangent object 1 2 S Define first point S Define second point S Select tangent object S Define start point S Select tangent object S Define end point Start point. start point. end point 1 2 3 Arc center. end point. Start point.Arc and Circle Creation Note: When numbered picks are shown. point on arc 2 1 3 S Define first point S Define second point S Define third point 3 Start point. tangent object. end point 3 1 2 S Define first point S Define second point S Define third point Circle center.

Transform Execute User Function Paste Application. Undo EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual . Save Edit.Hot Key Chart Hot Key Ctrl A Ctrl B Ctrl C Ctrl D Ctrl E Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl F G H I J K L M Function Assembly Navigator Edit. Gateway Cut Edit. Layer Settings Application. Open File. New File. Object Display Format. Operation. Object Edit. Modeling Hot Key Ctrl N Ctrl O Ctrl P Ctrl Q Ctrl R Ctrl S Ctrl T Ctrl U Ctrl V Ctrl W Ctrl X Ctrl Y Ctrl Z Function File. Rotate (full menu) File. Blank Copy Delete Tools. Expression Fit View Grip Execute Information. Plot View.

Object Edit. Operation. Blank. Reverse Blank Ctrl Shift O All View. Blank. Visible In View Preferences. Save As Ctrl Shift N Edit. Unblank Se lected Ctrl Shift L Ctrl Shift M Model Navigator View. Macro. Zoom (full menu) Alt Tab Alt F4 F1 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 Toggles Application Closes Active Window Help on Context View Current Dialog Information Window Refresh Quick Zoom Quick Rotate Ctrl Alt B Ctrl Alt C Ctrl Alt M Ctrl Alt N Ctrl Alt W Ctrl Alt X Tools. Selection Edit. Curvature Graph Ctrl Shift P Ctrl Shift Q Ctrl Shift R Format. Blank. Unblank All Of Part Format. Record Toolsm Macro. Fit All Ctrl Shift S Views Debug Grip Ctrl Shift T High Quality Image Ctrl Shift U Ctrl Shift V Ctrl Shift W Ctrl Shift X Ctrl Shift Y Ctrl Shift Z Format. Step Preferences. New Format.Ctrl Shift A Ctrl Shift B Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl Shift Shift Shift Shift C D E F Ctrl Shift G Ctrl Shift H Ctrl Shift I Ctrl Shift J Ctrl Shift K File. Lathe Cross-Sec tion Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Layout. Playback Quick Shaded Image Tools. Unisim Application Assemblies Tools. Macro. Boundary Tools. Layout. Layout. CLSF Application Manufactur ing Tools. Open Tools.

How would you rate the training facilities? Instruction .Practical Applications of Unigraphics Training Course Evaluation Name (Optional) Instructor Location Date Unigraphics NX Please give your honest opinion about the training you have received during this class. We will contact you if more information is needed.How would you rate the instruction? Was the instructor knowledgeable of the subject? Comments Poor 2 Poor 2 Poor 2 Poor 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 1. regarding the training you just received. Please check the box if you would like your comments. Were the student activities effective in learning Unigraphics? Please explain: Yes No over EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual . How well prepared do you now feel to use the functions covered in this course in your day to day activities? Please explain: 4. Provide additional comments on the reverse side of this evaluation form. Were concepts effectively communicated so that you understand how to apply the software? No Please explain: Yes 3. Were the course objectives clearly defined and were they met? Please explain: Yes No 2. Hotel Accommodations (if applicable) Hotel name What was your overall impression of this hotel? Facilities . featured in our training publications.

) Course . In order to continually improve our courseware a post class survey is conducted. What additional topics related to parametric design would you like to see covered in this course? Please explain: 7. Do you have any other suggestions on how the course could be improved? Please explain: Yes No 8. would you be willing to participate in this survey. j (If you checked this box.5. make sure that your name is on this sheet.What was your overall impression? Additional Comments Poor 2 3 4 5 6 7 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Was the workbook activity effective in reinforcing the concepts taught? Please explain: Yes No 6.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful

Master Your Semester with Scribd & The New York Times

Special offer: Get 4 months of Scribd and The New York Times for just $1.87 per week!

Master Your Semester with a Special Offer from Scribd & The New York Times